Engine Control System: Section

ENGINE
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

SECTION EC EC
E
CONTENTS
SERVICE INFORMATION ............................ 9 Input/Output Signal Chart ........................................27 F
System Description ..................................................27
INDEX FOR DTC ................................................. 9
U1000 - U1010 .......................................................... 9 AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE
G
P0011 - P0084 .......................................................... 9 (ASCD) .............................................................. 28
P0101 - P0128 ........................................................ 10 System Description ..................................................28
P0130 - P0159 ........................................................ 10 Component Description ...........................................29
H
P0171 - P0228 ........................................................ 11
P0300 - P0345 ........................................................ 11 CAN COMMUNICATION ................................... 30
P0420 - P0448 ........................................................ 12 System Description ..................................................30
P0451 - P0463 ........................................................ 12 I
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM ............... 31
P0500 - P0643 ........................................................ 12
Description ...............................................................31
P0700 - P0745 ........................................................ 13
Component Inspection .............................................33
P0850 - P1217 ........................................................ 13 J
Removal and Installation .........................................35
P1225 - P1574 ........................................................ 14
How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage .........................35
P1610 - P1615 ........................................................ 14
P1715 - P1805 ........................................................ 14 ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOV- K
P2100 - P2A03 ........................................................ 15 ERY (ORVR) ...................................................... 37
System Description ..................................................37
PRECAUTIONS ..................................................16
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................37
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System L
Component Inspection .............................................39
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
SIONER" ................................................................. 16 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION ......... 42
Precaution for Battery Service ................................ 16 Description ...............................................................42 M
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover.... 16 Component Inspection .............................................42
On Board Diagnosis (OBD) System of Engine and
A/T ........................................................................... 16 NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYS-
Precaution ............................................................... 17 TEM-NATS) ....................................................... 44 N
Description ...............................................................44
PREPARATION ..................................................20
Special Service Tool ............................................... 20 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM .... 45 O
Commercial Service Tool ........................................ 20 Introduction ..............................................................45
Two Trip Detection Logic .........................................45
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM ............................22 Emission-related Diagnostic Information .................46
Schematic ............................................................... 22 P
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ............................62
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System ..................... 23 OBD System Operation Chart .................................65
Electronic Ignition (EI) System ................................ 25
Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE ....................... 71
Speed) ..................................................................... 26 Basic Inspection ......................................................71
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check .....................75
AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL ...............27 Procedure After Replacing ECM .............................75
Revision: 2009 October EC-1 2008 & 2009 350Z

VIN Registration ..................................................... 75 Removal and Installation ....................................... 150
Exhaust Valve Timing Control Learning ................. 76
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning ...... 76 DTC P0014 P0024 EVT CONTROL ................. 151
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning ................ 76 Description ............................................................ 151
Idle Air Volume Learning ........................................ 77 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Fuel Pressure Check .............................................. 78 Mode ..................................................................... 151
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 152
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ..................................... 80 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 152
Trouble Diagnosis Introduction ............................... 80 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 153
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ................................. 84 Component Inspection .......................................... 154
Fail-Safe Chart ....................................................... 85 Removal and Installation ....................................... 155
Symptom Matrix Chart ............................................ 87
Engine Control Component Parts Location ............ 91 DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 A/F SEN-
Vacuum Hose Drawing ........................................... 97 SOR 1 HEATER ................................................ 156
Circuit Diagram ....................................................... 98 Description ............................................................ 156
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ............100 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
ECM Terminal and Reference Value .....................100 Mode ..................................................................... 156
CONSULT-III Function (ENGINE) .........................111 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 156
Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function .......................120 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 156
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor ....121 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 157
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 160
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION Component Inspection .......................................... 162
VALUE ............................................................. 126 Removal and Installation ....................................... 162
Description .............................................................126
Testing Condition ...................................................126 DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2
Inspection Procedure .............................................126 HEATER ........................................................... 163
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................127 Description ............................................................ 163
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT Mode ..................................................................... 163
INCIDENT ........................................................ 134 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 163
Description .............................................................134 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 163
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................134 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 165
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ... 135 Component Inspection .......................................... 170
Wiring Diagram ......................................................135 Removal and Installation ....................................... 171
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................138
Ground Inspection .................................................142 DTC P0075, P0081 IVT CONTROL SOLE-
NOID VALVE .................................................... 172
DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION Component Description ........................................ 172
LINE ................................................................. 144 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Description .............................................................144 Mode ..................................................................... 172
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................144 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 172
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................144 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 172
Wiring Diagram ......................................................145 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 173
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................145 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 176
Component Inspection .......................................... 177
DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION ............. 146
Removal and Installation ....................................... 178
Description .............................................................146
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................146 DTC P0078 P0084 EVT CONTROL MAGNET
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................146 RETARDER ...................................................... 179
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................146 Component Description ........................................ 179
DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL ................. 147 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ..................................................................... 179
Description .............................................................147
Mode ......................................................................147 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 179
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 180
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................148
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................148
Component Inspection ...........................................150

DTC P0101, P010B MAF SENSOR ................. 186 Removal and Installation ....................................... 230
Component Description ......................................... 186 A
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR .............................. 231
Mode ..................................................................... 186 Component Description ......................................... 231
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 187 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 231
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 231 EC
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 187
Overall Function Check ......................................... 189 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 232
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 191 Component Inspection ........................................... 233
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 194 Removal and Installation ....................................... 233 C
Component Inspection .......................................... 196 DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR ............................... 234
Removal and Installation ....................................... 198 Component Description ......................................... 234
D
DTC P0102, P0103, P010C, P010D MAF SEN- On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 234
SOR .................................................................. 199 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 234
Component Description ......................................... 199 E
Component Inspection ........................................... 236
Mode ..................................................................... 199 Removal and Installation ....................................... 236
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 199 DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION ........ 237
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 200 F
On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 237
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 201 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 237
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 204 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 237
Component Inspection .......................................... 206 Component Inspection ........................................... 237 G
Removal and Installation ....................................... 207 Removal and Installation ....................................... 238
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR .................... 208 DTC P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1 ................ 239 H
Component Description ......................................... 208 Component Description ......................................... 239
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 208 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 208 Mode ...................................................................... 239
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 209 I
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 209 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 239
Component Inspection .......................................... 211 Overall Function Check ......................................... 240
Removal and Installation ....................................... 212 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 241 J
DTC P0116 ECT SENSOR ............................... 213 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 244
Component Description ......................................... 213 Removal and Installation ....................................... 246
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 213 K
DTC P0131, P0151 A/F SENSOR 1 ................ 247
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 213 Component Description ......................................... 247
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 214 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Component Inspection .......................................... 215 Mode ...................................................................... 247 L
Removal and Installation ....................................... 215 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 247
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR .................. 216 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 247
Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 249 M
Component Description ......................................... 216
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 218 DTC P0132, P0152 A/F SENSOR 1 ................ 255 N
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 218 Component Description ......................................... 255
Component Inspection .......................................... 220 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Removal and Installation ....................................... 221 Mode ...................................................................... 255 O
DTC P0122, P0123, P0227, P0228 TP SEN- On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 255
SOR .................................................................. 222
Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 257 P
Mode ..................................................................... 222
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 222 DTC P0133, P0153 A/F SENSOR 1 ................ 263
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 223 Component Description ......................................... 263
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 223 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 227 Mode ...................................................................... 263

On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................263 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 329
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................263 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 329
Wiring Diagram ......................................................265 Component Inspection .......................................... 331
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................268 Removal and Installation ....................................... 331
Removal and Installation .......................................272
DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR ................... 332
DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2 ............................. 273 Component Description ........................................ 332
Component Description .........................................273 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 332
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 332
Mode ......................................................................273 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 333
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................273 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 333
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................273 Component Inspection .......................................... 335
Overall Function Check .........................................274 Removal and Installation ....................................... 335
Wiring Diagram ......................................................275
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................278 DTC P0196 EOT SENSOR ............................... 336
Component Inspection ...........................................281 Component Description ........................................ 336
Removal and Installation .......................................282 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 336
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 ............................. 283 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 337
Component Description .........................................283 Component Inspection .......................................... 338
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Removal and Installation ....................................... 339
Mode ......................................................................283
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................283 DTC P0197, P0198 EOT SENSOR .................. 340
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................284 Component Description ........................................ 340
Overall Function Check .........................................285 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 340
Wiring Diagram ......................................................286 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 340
Component Inspection ...........................................294 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 341
Removal and Installation .......................................295 Component Inspection .......................................... 343
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 ............................. 296
Component Description .........................................296 DTC P0222, P0223, P2132, P2133 TP SEN-
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor SOR .................................................................. 345
Mode ......................................................................296 Component Description ........................................ 345
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................296 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................296 Mode ..................................................................... 345
Overall Function Check .........................................297 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 345
Component Inspection ...........................................304 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 350
Removal and Installation .......................................305 Component Inspection .......................................... 352
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYS-
TEM FUNCTION .............................................. 306 DTC P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304,
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................306 P0305, P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MIS-
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................306 FIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE .............. 354
Wiring Diagram ......................................................310 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 354
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................313 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 354
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYS-
TEM FUNCTION .............................................. 317 DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS ............ 360
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................317 Component Description ........................................ 360
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................317 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 360
DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR ............................... 328 Component Inspection .......................................... 366
Component Description .........................................328 Removal and Installation ....................................... 366
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................328 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) .................... 367

Component Description ......................................... 367 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 411
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Component Inspection ........................................... 413 A
Mode ..................................................................... 367 Removal and Installation ....................................... 413
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 368 DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CON-
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 369 TROL VALVE .................................................. 414 EC
Component Inspection .......................................... 373 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Removal and Installation ....................................... 374 Mode ...................................................................... 414 C
DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) .. 375 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 414
Component Description ......................................... 375 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 415 D
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 416
Mode ..................................................................... 375 Component Inspection ........................................... 418
DTC P0448 EVAP CANISTER VENT CON- E
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 377 TROL VALVE .................................................. 419
Component Inspection .......................................... 383 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor F
Removal and Installation ....................................... 384 Mode ...................................................................... 419
DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 419 G
FUNCTION ....................................................... 385 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 421
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 385 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 422
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 385 Component Inspection ........................................... 423
Overall Function Check ......................................... 386 H
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 386 DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
PRESSURE SENSOR ..................................... 425
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM .......... 390 Component Description ......................................... 425 I
System Description ............................................... 390 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 390 Mode ...................................................................... 425
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 390 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 425 J
Overall Function Check ......................................... 391 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 426
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 391 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 426
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM .......... 395 K
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 395 DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 395 PRESSURE SENSOR ..................................... 430
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 396 Component Description ......................................... 430 L
DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOL-
Mode ...................................................................... 430
UME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE .............. 401 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 430
Description ............................................................ 401 M
Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 432
Mode ..................................................................... 401
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 402 N
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 403 DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 404 PRESSURE SENSOR ..................................... 438 O
Component Inspection .......................................... 407 Component Description ......................................... 438
Removal and Installation ....................................... 407 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ...................................................................... 438
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE P
VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ....... 408 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 439
Description ............................................................ 408
Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 440
Mode ..................................................................... 408
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 409 DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ......... 446
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 410 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 446

Diagnosis Procedure .............................................447 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 476
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ......... 452 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 477
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................452 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 478
Overall Function Check .........................................453 DTC P0605 ECM .............................................. 480
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................454 Component Description ........................................ 480
DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ............... 459 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 480
Component Description .........................................459 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 481
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................459 DTC P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY ......... 482
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................459 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 482
Removal and Installation .......................................460 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 482
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 483
DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ............... 461 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 484
Component Description .........................................461
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................461 DTC P0850 PNP SWITCH ................................ 488
Overall Function Check .........................................461 Component Description ........................................ 488
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................462 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Removal and Installation .......................................462 Mode ..................................................................... 488
DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ... 463 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 488
Component Description .........................................463 Overall Function Check ......................................... 489
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................463 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 490
Removal and Installation .......................................464 DTC P1078 P1084 EVT CONTROL POSITION
SENSOR ........................................................... 496
DTC P0500 VSS .............................................. 465 Component Description ........................................ 496
Description .............................................................465 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................465 Mode ..................................................................... 496
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................465 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 496
Overall Function Check .........................................466 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 497
DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM ................................ 467 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 501
Description .............................................................467
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................467 DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CON-
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................467 TROL ................................................................ 506
DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM ................................ 469 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 506
Description .............................................................469 DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT ................... 507
Description ............................................................ 507
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR .............................. 471 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 507
Component Description .........................................471 DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE ...... 508
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Description ............................................................ 508
Mode ......................................................................471
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................471 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 508
Wiring Diagram ......................................................472
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................473 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE.. 509
Component Inspection ...........................................475 Description ............................................................ 509
Removal and Installation .......................................475 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ..................................................................... 510
DTC P0603 ECM POWER SUPPLY ................ 476 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 510

Overall Function Check ......................................... 510 Component Description ......................................... 549
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 512 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor A
Main 12 Causes of Overheating ............................ 518 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 549
Component Inspection .......................................... 518 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 549 EC
Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 550
DTC P1225, P1234 TP SENSOR ..................... 519 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 553
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 519 DTC P1421 COLD START CONTROL ........... 556 C
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 519 Description ............................................................. 556
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 519 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 556
Removal and Installation ....................................... 520 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 556 D
DTC P1226, P1235 TP SENSOR ..................... 521
Component Description ......................................... 521 DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH ........ 558
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 521 Component Description ......................................... 558 E
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 521 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Removal and Installation ....................................... 522 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 558 F
DTC P1233, P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 560
CONTROL FUNCTION ..................................... 523 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 561
Description ............................................................ 523 G
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 523 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH .............. 565
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 524 Component Description ......................................... 565 H
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 527 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Component Inspection .......................................... 531 Mode ...................................................................... 565
Removal and Installation ....................................... 531 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 565 I
DTC P1236, P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 567
MOTOR ............................................................. 532 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 570
Component Description ......................................... 532 J
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 532 DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SEN-
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 533 SOR ................................................................. 579 K
Component Inspection .......................................... 538 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 579
Removal and Installation ....................................... 538 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 579 L
DTC P1238, P2119 ELECTRIC THROTTLE
CONTROL ACTUATOR ................................... 539 DTC P1715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR ............. 581
Component Description ......................................... 539 Description ............................................................. 581 M
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 539 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 539 Mode ...................................................................... 581
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 540 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 581 N
DTC P1239, P2135 TP SENSOR ..................... 541
Component Description ......................................... 541 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH ......................... 582
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Description ............................................................. 582 O
Mode ..................................................................... 541 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 541 Mode ...................................................................... 582
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 541 On Board Diagnosis Logic ..................................... 582 P
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 542 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 582
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 545 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 583
Component Inspection .......................................... 547 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 584
Removal and Installation ....................................... 548 Component Inspection ........................................... 585
DTC P1290, P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CON- DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR ................. 586
TROL MOTOR RELAY ..................................... 549 Component Description ......................................... 586

CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL .......................... 632
Mode ......................................................................586 Description ............................................................ 632
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................586 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................587 Mode ..................................................................... 632
Wiring Diagram ......................................................588 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 632
Component Inspection ...........................................591 FUEL INJECTOR .............................................. 634
Removal and Installation .......................................592 Component Description ........................................ 634
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR .................. 593 Mode ..................................................................... 634
Component Description .........................................593 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 635
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 636
Mode ......................................................................593 Component Inspection .......................................... 638
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................593 Removal and Installation ....................................... 638
Wiring Diagram ......................................................595 FUEL PUMP ..................................................... 639
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................596 Description ............................................................ 639
Component Inspection ...........................................600 CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor
Removal and Installation .......................................600 Mode ..................................................................... 639
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 640
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR .............................. 601 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 641
Component Description .........................................601 Component Inspection .......................................... 643
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Removal and Installation ....................................... 644
Mode ......................................................................601
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................601 IGNITION SIGNAL ............................................ 645
Wiring Diagram ......................................................603 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 646
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................604 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 651
Component Inspection ...........................................608 Component Inspection .......................................... 654
Removal and Installation .......................................608 Removal and Installation ....................................... 656
DTC P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1 ............... 609 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR ........... 657
Component Description .........................................609 Component Description ........................................ 657
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 658
Mode ......................................................................609 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 659
On Board Diagnosis Logic .....................................609 Removal and Installation ....................................... 661
Wiring Diagram ......................................................611
MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR ............... 662
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 662
Removal and Installation .......................................619 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH .................................. 620 (SDS) ................................................................ 664
Component Description .........................................620 Fuel Pressure ........................................................ 664
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Idle Speed and Ignition Timing ............................. 664
Mode ......................................................................620 Calculated Load Value .......................................... 664
Wiring Diagram ......................................................621 Mass Air Flow Sensor ........................................... 664
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................624 Intake Air Temperature Sensor ............................. 664
Component Inspection ...........................................628 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor ................... 664
Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor 1 Heater .................... 664
ASCD INDICATOR .......................................... 629 Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater .......................... 665
Component Description .........................................629 Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) ....................... 665
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) ..................... 665
Mode ......................................................................629 Throttle Control Motor ........................................... 665
Wiring Diagram ......................................................630 Fuel Injector .......................................................... 665
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................630 Fuel Pump ............................................................. 665

INDEX FOR DTC
< SERVICE INFORMATION >
SERVICE INFORMATION A
INDEX FOR DTC
U1000 - U1010 INFOID:0000000004656140
EC
DTC*1
Items C
CONSULT-III Reference page
(CONSULT-III screen terms)
ECM*3
GST*2
U1000 1000*4 CAN COMM CIRCUIT EC-144 D
U1001 1001*4 CAN COMM CIRCUIT EC-144
U1010 1010 CONTROL UNIT(CAN) EC-146
E
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
*2: This number is prescribed by SAE J2012.
*3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN. F
*4: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-III.
P0011 - P0084 INFOID:0000000004656141
DTC*1
Items H
3 (CONSULT-III screen terms)
ECM*
GST*2
P0011 0011 INT/V TIM CONT-B1 EC-148
I
P0014 0014 EXH/V TIM CONT-B1 EC-152
P0021 0021 INT/V TIM CONT-B2 EC-148
P0024 0024 EXH/V TIM CONT-B2 EC-152 J
P0031 0031 A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) EC-156
P0032 0032 A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) EC-156
K
P0037 0037 HO2S2 HTR (B1) EC-163
P0038 0038 HO2S2 HTR (B1) EC-163
P0051 0051 A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) EC-156 L
P0052 0052 A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) EC-156
P0057 0057 HO2S2 HTR (B2) EC-163
P0058 0058 HO2S2 HTR (B2) EC-163 M
P0075 0075 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 EC-172
P0078 0078 EX V/T MGT/RTDR-B1 EC-179
N
P0081 0081 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B2 EC-172
P0084 0084 EX V/T MGT/RTDR-B2 EC-179
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. O
*3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN.
P

INDEX FOR DTC
P0101 - P0128 INFOID:0000000004656142
DTC*1
Items
ECM*
GST*2
P0101 0101 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 EC-187
P010B 010B MAF SEN/CIRCUIT-B2 EC-187
P010C 010C MAF SEN/CIRCUIT-B2 EC-199
P010D 010D MAF SEN/CIRCUIT-B2 EC-199
P0112 0112 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 EC-208
P0113 0113 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 EC-208
P0116 0116 ECT SENSOR EC-213
P0117 0117 ECT SEN/CIRC EC-216
P0118 0118 ECT SEN/CIRC EC-216
P0122 0122 TP SEN 2/CIRC-B1 EC-222
P0123 0123 TP SEN 2/CIRC-B1 EC-222
P0125 0125 ECT SENSOR EC-231
P0127 0127 IAT SENSOR-B1 EC-234
P0128 0128 THERMSTAT FNCTN EC-237
P0130 - P0159 INFOID:0000000004656143
DTC*1
Items
2 ECM*
GST*
P0130 0130 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-239
P0131 0131 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-247
P0132 0132 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-255
P0133 0133 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-263
P0137 0137 HO2S2 (B1) EC-273
P0138 0138 HO2S2 (B1) EC-283
P0139 0139 HO2S2 (B1) EC-283
P0150 0150 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) EC-239
P0151 0151 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) EC-247
P0152 0152 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) EC-255
P0153 0153 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) EC-263
P0157 0157 HO2S2 (B2) EC-273
P0158 0158 HO2S2 (B2) EC-283
P0159 0159 HO2S2 (B2) EC-296

INDEX FOR DTC
A
P0171 - P0228 INFOID:0000000004656144
DTC*1
EC
Items
ECM*3
GST*2
C
P0171 0171 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 EC-306
P0172 0172 FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 EC-317
P0174 0174 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B2 EC-306 D
P0175 0175 FUEL SYS-RICH-B2 EC-317
P0181 0181 FTT SENSOR EC-328
E
P0182 0182 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT EC-332
P0183 0183 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT EC-332
P0196 0196 EOT SENSOR EC-336 F
P0197 0197 EOT SEN/CIRC EC-340
P0198 0198 EOT SEN/CIRC EC-340
P0222 0222 TP SEN 1/CIRC-B1 EC-345 G
P0223 0223 TP SEN 1/CIRC-B1 EC-345
P0227 0227 TP SEN 2/CIRC-B2 EC-222 H
P0228 0228 TP SEN 2/CIRC-B2 EC-222
*2: This number is prescribed by SAE J2012. I
P0300 - P0345 INFOID:0000000004656145

J
DTC*1
Items
Reference page
K
CONSULT-III (CONSULT-III screen terms)
ECM*3
GST*2
P0300 0300 MULTI CYL MISFIRE EC-354 L
P0301 0301 CYL 1 MISFIRE EC-354
P0303 0303 CYL 3 MISFIRE EC-354 M
N
P0327 0327 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 EC-360
P0328 0328 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 EC-360 O
P
P0335 0335 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT EC-367
P0340 0340 CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 EC-375
P0345 0345 CMP SEN/CIRC-B2 EC-375

INDEX FOR DTC
P0420 - P0448 INFOID:0000000004656146
DTC*1
Items
ECM*
GST*2
P0420 0420 TW CATALYST SYS-B1 EC-385
P0430 0430 TW CATALYST SYS-B2 EC-385
P0441 0441 EVAP PURG FLOW/MON EC-390
P0442 0442 EVAP SMALL LEAK EC-395
P0443 0443 PURG VOLUME CONT/V EC-404
P0447 0447 VENT CONTROL VALVE EC-414
P0448 0448 VENT CONTROL VALVE EC-419
P0451 - P0463 INFOID:0000000004656147
DTC*1
Items
2 ECM*
GST*
P0451 0451 EVAP SYS PRES SEN EC-425
P0455 0455 EVAP GROSS LEAK EC-446
P0456 0456 EVAP VERY SML LEAK EC-452
P0460 0460 FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH EC-459
P0461 0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR EC-461
P0462 0462 FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC EC-463
P0463 0463 FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC EC-463
P0500 - P0643 INFOID:0000000004656148
DTC*1
Items
2 ECM*3
GST*
P0500 0500 VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC EC-465
P0506 0506 ISC SYSTEM EC-467
P0507 0507 ISC SYSTEM EC-469
P0550 0550 PW ST P SEN/CIRC EC-471
P0603 0603 ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT EC-476

INDEX FOR DTC
DTC*1
Items A
ECM*3
GST*2
P0605 0605 ECM EC-480 EC
P0643 0643 SENSOR POWER/CIRC EC-482
*2: This number is prescribed by SAE J2012. C
P0700 - P0745 INFOID:0000000004656149

D
DTC*1
Items E
ECM*
GST*2
P0700 0700 TRANSMISSION CONT AT-97 F
P0705 0705 T/M RANGE SENSOR A AT-98
P0710 0710 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC AT-128
P0717 0717 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A AT-101 G
P0720 0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR AT-103
P0731 0731 1GR INCORRECT RATIO AT-110
H
P0734 0734 4GR INCORRECT RATIO AT-116 I
P0740 0740 TORQUE CONVERTER AT-120
J
P0744 0744 TORQUE CONVERTER AT-122
P0745 0745 PC SOLENOID A AT-124
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. K
L
P0850 - P1217 INFOID:0000000004656150
DTC*1
M
Items
2 ECM*3
GST*
N
P0850 0850 P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT EC-488
P1078 1078 EXH TIM SEN/CIR-B1 EC-496
P1084 1084 EXH TIM SEN/CIR-B2 EC-496 O
P1148 1148 CLOSED LOOP-B1 EC-506
P1168 1168 CLOSED LOOP-B2 EC-506
P
P1211 1211 TCS C/U FUNCTN EC-507
P1212 1212 TCS/CIRC EC-508
P1217 1217 ENG OVER TEMP EC-510

INDEX FOR DTC
P1225 - P1574 INFOID:0000000004656151
DTC*1
Items
ECM*
GST*2
P1225 1225 CTP LEARNING-B1 EC-519
P1233 1233 ETC FUNCTION/CIRC-B2 EC-523
P1236 1236 ETC MOT-B2 EC-532
P1238 1238 ETC ACTR-B2 EC-539
P1239 1239 TP SENSOR-B2 EC-541
P1290 1290 ETC MOT PWR-B2 EC-549
P1421 1421 COLD START CONTROL EC-556
P1564 1564 ASCD SW EC-558
P1572 1572 ASCD BRAKE SW EC-565
P1574 1574 ASCD VHL SPD SEN EC-579
P1610 - P1615 INFOID:0000000004656152
DTC*1
Items
ECM*
GST*2
P1610 1610 LOCK MODE BL-137
P1611 1611 ID DISCORD,IMM-ECM BL-137
P1612 1612 CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU BL-137
P1614 1614 CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY BL-137
P1615 1615 DIFFERENCE OF KEY BL-137
P1715 - P1805 INFOID:0000000004656153
DTC*1
Items
2 ECM*
GST*
P1715 1715 IN PULY SPEED EC-581
P1730 1730 INTERLOCK AT-135
P1752 1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOL AT-139
P1757 1757 FR BRAKE SOLENOID AT-141
P1762 1762 DRCT CLUTCH SOL AT-143
P1767 1767 HLR CLUTCH SOLENOID AT-145

INDEX FOR DTC
DTC*1
Items A
ECM*3
GST*2
P1772 1772 L C BRAKE SOLENOID AT-147 EC
P1774 1774 L C BRAKE SOLENOID AT-149
P1805 1805 BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT EC-582
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. C
D
P2100 - P2A03 INFOID:0000000004656154
E
DTC*1
Items
ECM*
GST*2 F
P2100 2100 ETC MOT PWR-B1 EC-549
P2101 2101 ETC FNCTN/CIRC-B1 EC-523
P2103 2103 ETC MOT PWR-B1 EC-549 G
P2118 2118 ETC MOT-B1 EC-532
P2119 2119 ETC ACTR-B1 EC-539
H
P2122 2122 APP SEN 1/CIRC EC-586
P2127 2127 APP SEN 2/CIRC EC-593 I
P2132 2132 TP SEN 1/CIRC-B2 EC-345
J
P2133 2133 TP SEN 1/CIRC-B2 EC-345
P2135 2135 TP SENSOR-B1 EC-541
P2138 2138 APP SENSOR EC-601 K
P2A00 2A00 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-609
P2A03 2A03 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) EC-609
L
M

PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000004656155
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYS-
TEM” and “SEAT BELTS” of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the “SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM”.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or har-
ness connectors.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s)
with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly
causing serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
Precaution for Battery Service INFOID:0000000004656156
Before disconnecting the battery, lower both the driver and passenger windows. This will prevent any interfer-
ence between the window edge and the vehicle when the door is opened/closed. During normal operation, the
window slightly raises and lowers automatically to prevent any window to vehicle interference. The automatic
window function will not work with the battery disconnected.
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover INFOID:0000000004656157
When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, cover
the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc.
PIIB3706J
On Board Diagnosis (OBD) System of Engine and A/T INFOID:0000000004656158
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the
driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration.
CAUTION:
• Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery cable before any repair
or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc. will
cause the MIL to light up.

PRECAUTIONS
• Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MIL to light up due to the open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease, A
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
• Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-lock-
ing type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-74.
EC
• Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. The interference of the harness with
a bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to the short circuit.
• Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube
may cause the MIL to light up due to the malfunction of the EVAP system or fuel injection system, C
etc.
• Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM and
TCM (Transmission control module) before returning the vehicle to the customer. D
Precaution INFOID:0000000004656159
• Always use a 12 volt battery as power source. E

• Do not attempt to disconnect battery cables while engine is
running.
• Before connecting or disconnecting the ECM harness con-
nector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect battery F
ground cable. Failure to do so may damage the ECM because
battery voltage is applied to ECM even if ignition switch is
turned OFF. G
• Before removing parts, turn ignition switch OFF and then dis-
connect battery ground cable.
SEF289H H
• Do not disassemble ECM.

• If a battery cable is disconnected, the memory will return to I
the ECM value.
The ECM will now start to self-control at its initial value.
Engine operation can vary slightly when the terminal is dis-
connected. However, this is not an indication of a malfunc- J
tion. Do not replace parts because of a slight variation.
• If the battery is disconnected, the following emission related
diagnostic information will be lost within 24 hours. K
- Diagnostic trouble codes
- 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
PBIB3532E
- Freeze frame data
L
- 1st freeze frame data
- System readiness test (SRT) codes
- Test values
• When connecting ECM harness connector (A), fasten (B) it M
securely with a lever as far as it will go as shown in the figure.
1 : ECM
N
C : Loosen
PBIB3528E P

PRECAUTIONS
• When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or
from ECM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or
break).
Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on ECM pin
terminal, when connecting pin connectors.
• Securely connect ECM harness connectors.
A poor connection can cause an extremely high (surge) volt-
age to develop in coil and condenser, thus resulting in dam-
age to ICs.
• Keep engine control system harness at least 10 cm (4 in) away
from adjacent harness, to prevent engine control system mal-
PBIB0090E
functions due to receiving external noise, degraded operation
of ICs, etc.
• Keep engine control system parts and harness dry.
• Before replacing ECM, perform ECM Terminals and Reference
Value inspection and make sure ECM functions properly.
Refer to EC-100, "ECM Terminal and Reference Value".
• Handle mass air flow sensor carefully to avoid damage.
• Do not clean mass air flow sensor with any type of detergent.
• Do not disassemble electric throttle control actuator.
• Even a slight leak in the air intake system can cause serious
incidents.
• Do not shock or jar the camshaft position sensor (PHASE),
crankshaft position sensor (POS).
MEF040D
• After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform DTC
Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check.
The DTC should not be displayed in the DTC Confirmation
Procedure if the repair is completed. The Overall Function
Check should be a good result if the repair is completed.
SEF217U
• When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never allow

the two tester probes to contact.
Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and
damage the ECM power transistor.
• Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/out-
put voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's tran-
sistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the
ground.
SEF348N

PRECAUTIONS
• B1 indicates the bank 1, B2 indicates the bank 2 as shown in A

the figure.
EC
SEC893C
D
• Do not operate fuel pump when there is no fuel in lines.

E
1 : Fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump
2 : Fuel pressure regulator
3 : Fuel tank temperature sensor
F
• Tighten fuel hose clamps to the specified torque.
PBIB2707E
H
• Do not depress accelerator pedal when starting.
• Immediately after starting, do not rev up engine unnecessar-
ily. I
• Do not rev up engine just prior to shutdown.
K
SEF709Y
• When installing C.B. ham radio or a mobile phone, be sure to L

observe the following as it may adversely affect electronic
control systems depending on installation location.
- Keep the antenna as far as possible from the electronic con- M
trol units.
- Keep the antenna feeder line more than 20 cm (8 in) away
from the harness of electronic controls.
Do not let them run parallel for a long distance. N
- Adjust the antenna and feeder line so that the standing-wave
radio can be kept smaller.
- Be sure to ground the radio to vehicle body. O
SEF708Y

PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000004656160
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.) Description
Tool name
(J-44321) Checking fuel pressure
Fuel pressure gauge
kit
LEC642
Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000004656161
Tool name
Description
(Kent-Moore No.)
Leak detector Locating the EVAP leak
i.e.: (J-41416)
S-NT703
EVAP service port Applying positive pressure through EVAP service

adapter port
i.e.: (J-41413-OBD)
S-NT704
Fuel filler cap adapter Checking fuel tank vacuum relief valve opening
i.e.: (MLR-8382) pressure
S-NT815
Socket wrench Removing and installing engine coolant tempera-

ture sensor
S-NT705

PREPARATION
Tool name
Description
(Kent-Moore No.) A
Oxygen sensor thread Reconditioning the exhaust system threads before
cleaner installing a new oxygen sensor. Use with anti-
i.e.: (J-43897-18) seize lubricant shown below. EC
(J-43897-12) a: 18 mm diameter with pitch 1.5 mm for Zirco-
nia Oxygen Sensor
b: 12 mm diameter with pitch 1.25 mm for Tita-
nia Oxygen Sensor C
AEM488
Anti-seize lubricant Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool

when reconditioning exhaust system threads. D
i.e.: (PermatexTM
133AR or equivalent
meeting MIL specifica-
tion MIL-A-907) E
S-NT779
F

Schematic INFOID:0000000004656162
PBIB3466E
1. ECM 2. Data link connector 3. MIL

Transmission range switch (A/T
models)
4. Ignition switch 5. Cooling fan 6.
Park/neutral position switch (M/T
models)
Exhaust valve timing control magnet
7. A/F sensor 1 8. Heated oxygen sensor 2 9.
retarder
Exhaust valve timing control position
10. 11. PCV valve 12. Spark plug
sensor
Intake valve timing control solenoid
13. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) 14. 15. Fuel injector
valve
16. Engine coolant temperature sensor 17. Fuel injector 18.
valve
19. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) 20. Spark plug 21.
sensor

22. 23. A/F sensor 1 24. Heated oxygen sensor 2
retarder A
25. Knock sensor 26. Crankshaft position sensor (POS) 27. Engine oil temperature sensor
28. Knock sensor 29. Three way catalyst 1 30. Three way catalyst 2
31. Three way catalyst 1 32. Three way catalyst 2 33. Muffler EC
EVAP control system pressure sen-
34. EVAP canister vent control valve 35. 36. EVAP service port
sor
EVAP canister purge volume control C
37. 38. EVAP canister 39. Fuel camper
solenoid valve
40. Fuel pump 41. Fuel pressure regulator 42. Fuel level sensor
43. Fuel tank temperature sensor 44. Fuel tank 45. Accelerator pedal position sensor D
Mass air flow sensor (with intake air
46. Electric throttle control actuator 47. Throttle position sensor 48.
temperature sensor)
49. Air cleaner 50. Electric throttle control actuator 51. Throttle position sensor
E
Mass air flow sensor (with intake air
52. 53. Air cleaner
temperature sensor)
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System INFOID:0000000004656163 F
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

G
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed*3
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Piston position H
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
I
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position J
Fuel injection
TCM(A/T models) & mixture ratio Fuel injector
Gear position
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch(M/T models) control
Knock sensor Engine knocking condition K
Battery Battery voltage*3
Power steering pressure sensor Power steering operation L
Heated oxygen sensor 2*1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner operation*2

M
Wheel sensor Vehicle speed*2
*1: This sensor is not used to control the engine system under normal conditions.
*2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. N
*3: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The amount of fuel injected from the fuel injector is determined by the ECM. The ECM controls the length of O
time the valve remains open (injection pulse duration). The amount of fuel injected is a program value in the
ECM memory. The program value is preset by engine operating conditions. These conditions are determined
by input signals (for engine speed and intake air) from both the crankshaft position sensor and the mass air P
flow sensor.
VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION INCREASE/DECREASE COMPENSATION
In addition, the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance under various operat-
ing conditions as listed below.
<Fuel increase>
• During warm-up

• When starting the engine
• During acceleration
• Hot-engine operation
• When selector lever is changed from N to D (A/T models)
• High-load, high-speed operation
<Fuel decrease>
• During deceleration
• During high engine speed operation
MIXTURE RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL (CLOSED LOOP CONTROL)
PBIB3020E
The mixture ratio feedback system provides the best air-fuel mixture ratio for driveability and emission control.
The three way catalyst 1 can then better reduce CO, HC and NOx emissions. This system uses air fuel ratio
(A/F) sensor 1 in the exhaust manifold to monitor whether the engine operation is rich or lean. The ECM
adjusts the injection pulse width according to the sensor voltage signal. For more information about air fuel
ratio (A/F) sensor 1, refer to EC-247. This maintains the mixture ratio within the range of stoichiometric (ideal
air-fuel mixture).
This stage is referred to as the closed loop control condition.
Heated oxygen sensor 2 is located downstream of the three way catalyst 1. Even if the switching characteris-
tics of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 shift, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric by the signal from
heated oxygen sensor 2.
Open Loop Control
The open loop system condition refers to when the ECM detects any of the following conditions. Feedback
control stops in order to maintain stabilized fuel combustion.
• Deceleration and acceleration
• High-load, high-speed operation
• Malfunction of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 or its circuit
• Insufficient activation of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 at low engine coolant temperature
• High engine coolant temperature
• During warm-up
• After shifting from N to D (A/T models)
• When starting the engine
MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING CONTROL
The mixture ratio feedback control system monitors the mixture ratio signal transmitted from air fuel ratio (A/F)
sensor 1. This feedback signal is then sent to the ECM. The ECM controls the basic mixture ratio as close to
the theoretical mixture ratio as possible. However, the basic mixture ratio is not necessarily controlled as orig-
inally designed. Both manufacturing differences (i.e., mass air flow sensor hot wire) and characteristic
changes during operation (i.e., fuel injector clogging) directly affect mixture ratio.
Accordingly, the difference between the basic and theoretical mixture ratios is monitored in this system. This is
then computed in terms of “injection pulse duration” to automatically compensate for the difference between
the two ratios.
“Fuel trim” refers to the feedback compensation value compared against the basic injection duration. Fuel trim
includes short term fuel trim and long term fuel trim.
“Short term fuel trim” is the short-term fuel compensation used to maintain the mixture ratio at its theoretical
value. The signal from air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 indicates whether the mixture ratio is RICH or LEAN com-
pared to the theoretical value. The signal then triggers a reduction in fuel volume if the mixture ratio is rich, and
an increase in fuel volume if it is lean.
“Long term fuel trim” is overall fuel compensation carried out long-term to compensate for continual deviation
of the short term fuel trim from the central value. Such deviation will occur due to individual engine differences,
wear over time and changes in the usage environment.

FUEL INJECTION TIMING
A
EC
SEF179U
Two types of systems are used. D

Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle according to the firing order. This system is used
when the engine is running. E
Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected simultaneously into all six cylinders twice each engine cycle. In other words, pulse signals of
the same width are simultaneously transmitted from the ECM. F
The six fuel injectors will then receive the signals two times for each engine cycle.
This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if the fail-safe system (CPU) is operating.
FUEL SHUT-OFF G
Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration, operation of the engine at excessively high speeds or oper-
ation of the vehicle at excessively high speeds.
H
Electronic Ignition (EI) System INFOID:0000000004656164

I
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed*2 J
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Piston position
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature K
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Ignition timing
Power transistor L
control
Knock sensor Engine knocking
TCM (A/T models)
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch (M/T mod- Gear position
els)
M

Wheel sensor Vehicle speed*1 N
*1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
O
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Firing order: 1-2-3-4-5-6
The ignition timing is controlled by the ECM to maintain the best air-fuel ratio for every running condition of the
engine. The ignition timing data is stored in the ECM. P
The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width and camshaft position sensor (PHASE) sig-
nal. Computing this information, ignition signals are transmitted to the power transistor.
During the following conditions, the ignition timing is revised by the ECM according to the other data stored in
the ECM.
• At starting
• During warm-up
• At idle

• At low battery voltage
• During acceleration
The knock sensor retard system is designed only for emergencies. The basic ignition timing is programmed
within the anti-knocking zone, if recommended fuel is used under dry conditions. The retard system does not
operate under normal driving conditions. If engine knocking occurs, the knock sensor monitors the condition.
The signal is transmitted to the ECM. The ECM retards the ignition timing to eliminate the knocking condition.
Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Speed) INFOID:0000000004656165

TCM (A/T models)
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch (M/T mod- Neutral position
els)
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position
Fuel cut control Fuel injector
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine speed
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Wheel sensor Vehicle speed*
*: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
If the engine speed is above 1,800 rpm under no load (for example, the shift position is neutral and engine
speed is over 1,800 rpm) fuel will be cut off after some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut off varies
based on engine speed.
Fuel cut will be operated until the engine speed reaches 1,500 rpm, then fuel cut will be cancelled.
NOTE:
This function is different from deceleration control listed under EC-23, "Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System".

AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL
AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL
A
Input/Output Signal Chart INFOID:0000000004656166
EC
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner ON signal*1
Throttle position sensor Throttle position C
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*2 D
Air conditioner
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Air conditioner relay
cut control
Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure E
Power steering pressure sensor Power steering operation
F
*2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signal of engine speed and battery voltage.
G
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This system improves engine operation when the air conditioner is used.
Under the following conditions, the air conditioner is turned OFF. H
• When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed.
• When cranking the engine.
• At high engine speeds.
I
• When the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high.
• When operating power steering during low engine speed or low vehicle speed.
• When engine speed is excessively low.
• When refrigerant pressure is excessively low or high. J
System Description INFOID:0000000004656167
This system improves engine operation when the air conditioner is used. K
Under the following conditions, the air conditioner is turned off.
• When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed.
• When cranking the engine. L
• At high engine speeds.
• When the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high.
• When operating power steering during low engine speed or low vehicle speed.
• When engine speed is excessively low. M
• When refrigerant pressure is excessively low or high.

AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator

ASCD brake switch Brake pedal operation
Stop lamp switch Brake pedal operation
ASCD clutch switch (M/T models) Clutch pedal operation
ASCD steering switch ASCD steering switch operation
Electric throttle control
ASCD vehicle speed control
TCM (A/T models) actuator
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position
(M/T models)
Wheel sensor. Vehicle speed*
TCM (A/T models) Powertrain revolution*
*: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
BASIC ASCD SYSTEM

Refer to Owner's Manual for ASCD operating instructions.
Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) allows a driver to keep vehicle at predetermined constant speed
without depressing accelerator pedal. Driver can set vehicle speed in advance between approximately 40 km/
h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH).
ECM controls throttle angle of electric throttle control actuator to regulate engine speed.
Operation status of ASCD is indicated by CRUISE indicator and SET indicator in combination meter. If any
malfunction occurs in ASCD system, it automatically deactivates control.
NOTE:
Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws.
SET OPERATION
Press MAIN switch. (The CRUISE indicator in combination meter illuminates.)
When vehicle speed reaches a desired speed between approximately 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89
MPH), press SET/COAST switch. (Then SET indicator in combination meter illuminates.)
ACCELERATE OPERATION
If the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch is pressed during cruise control driving, increase the vehicle speed until
the switch is released or vehicle speed reaches maximum speed controlled by the system.
And then ASCD will keep the new set speed.
CANCEL OPERATION
When any of following conditions exist, cruise operation will be canceled.
• CANCEL switch is pressed
• More than 2 switches at ASCD steering switch are pressed at the same time (Set speed will be cleared)
• Brake pedal is depressed
• Clutch pedal is depressed or gear position is changed to the neutral position (M/T models)
• Selector lever is changed to N, P, R position (A/T models)
• Vehicle speed decreased to 13 km/h (8 MPH) lower than the set speed
• VDC/TCS system is operated
When the ECM detects any of the following conditions, the ECM will cancel the cruise operation and inform
the driver by blinking indicator lamp.
• Engine coolant temperature is slightly higher than the normal operating temperature, CRUISE lamp may
blink slowly.
When the engine coolant temperature decreases to the normal operating temperature, CRUISE lamp will
stop blinking and the cruise operation will be able to work by pressing SET/COAST switch or RESUME/
ACCELERATE switch.
• Malfunction for some self-diagnoses regarding ASCD control: SET lamp will blink quickly.
If MAIN switch is turned to OFF during ASCD is activated, all of ASCD operations will be canceled and vehicle
speed memory will be erased.

COAST OPERATION
When the SET/COAST switch is pressed during cruise control driving, decrease vehicle set speed until the A
switch is released. And then ASCD will keep the new set speed.
RESUME OPERATION
When the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch is pressed after cancel operation other than pressing MAIN switch EC
is performed, vehicle speed will return to last set speed. To resume vehicle set speed, vehicle condition must
meet following conditions.
• Brake pedal is released C
• Clutch pedal is released (M/T models)
• A/T selector lever is in other than P and N positions (A/T models)
• Vehicle speed is greater than 40 km/h (25 MPH) and less than 144 km/h (89 MPH)
D
Component Description INFOID:0000000004656169
ASCD STEERING SWITCH E

Refer to EC-558
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Refer to EC-565and EC-620. F
ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH

Refer to EC-565and EC-620.
G
STOP LAMP SWITCH
Refer to EC-565, EC-582 and EC-620.
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR H
Refer to EC-523, EC-532, EC-539 and EC-549.
ASCD INDICATOR I
Refer to EC-629.

CAN COMMUNICATION
CAN COMMUNICATION
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec-
tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
Refer to LAN-41, "CAN System Specification Chart", about CAN communication for detail.

EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
A
Description INFOID:0000000004656171
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION EC
G
PBIB1631E
The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel
system. This reduction of hydrocarbons is accomplished by activated charcoals in the EVAP canister. H
The fuel vapor in the sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canister which contains activated carbon and the
vapor is stored there when the engine is not operating or when refueling to the fuel tank.
The vapor in the EVAP canister is purged by the air through the purge line to the intake manifold when the
engine is operating. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is controlled by ECM. When the I
engine operates, the flow rate of vapor controlled by EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
proportionally regulated as the air flow increases.
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve also shuts off the vapor purge line during decelerating and J
idling.
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING
K

PBIB3529E
1. Intake manifold collector 2. EVAP canister purge volume control 3. EVAP service port
solenoid valve
: From next page

EC
PBIB1066E
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000004656172 P
EVAP CANISTER

Check EVAP canister as follows:
1. Block port B.
2. Blow air into port A and check that it flows freely out of port C.
3. Release blocked port B.
4. Apply vacuum pressure to port B and check that vacuum pres-
sure exists at the ports A and C.
5. Block port A and B.
6. Apply pressure to port C and check that there is no leakage.
PBIB1044E
FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FILLER CAP)
1. Wipe clean valve housing.
SEF445Y
2. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.
Pressure: 15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2, 2.22 -

2.90 psi)
Vacuum: −6.0 to −3.3 kPa (−0.061 to −0.034 kg/cm2,
−0.87 to −0.48 psi)
3. If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly.
CAUTION:
Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incor- SEF943S
rect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on.
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-413.
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-331.
EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Refer to EC-418.
EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-428.
EVAP SERVICE PORT

Positive pressure is delivered to the EVAP system through the EVAP
service port. If fuel vapor leakage in the EVAP system occurs, use a A
leak detector to locate the leak.
EC
SEF462UA
D
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004656173
EVAP CANISTER E
Tighten EVAP canister as shown in the figure.
J
PBIB1029E
EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE K

1. Turn EVAP canister vent control valve counterclockwise.
2. Remove the EVAP canister vent control valve.
Always replace O-ring with a new one. L
N
PBIB1030E
How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage INFOID:0000000004656174

O
CAUTION:
• Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
• Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure in EVAP system. P
NOTE:
• Do not start engine.
• Improper installation of EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause a leak.
WITH CONSULT-III
1. Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP service port.
2. Also attach the pressure pump and hose to the EVAP service port adapter.

3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Select the “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT MODE” with CONSULT-III.
5. Touch “START”. A bar graph (Pressure indicating display) will appear on the screen.
6. Apply positive pressure to the EVAP system until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar
graph.
7. Remove EVAP service port adapter and hose with pressure pump.
8. Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to EC-31, "Descrip-
tion".
SEF200U
WITHOUT CONSULT-III
1. Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP ser-
vice port.
2. Also attach the pressure pump with pressure gauge to the EVAP
service port adapter.
SEF462UA
3. Apply battery voltage between the terminals of EVAP canister vent control valve to make a closed EVAP
system.
PBIB1086E
4. To locate the leak, deliver positive pressure to the EVAP system until pressure gauge points reach 1.38 to
2.76 kPa (0.014 to 0.028 kg/cm2, 0.2 to 0.4 psi).
5. Remove EVAP service port adapter and hose with pressure pump.
6. Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to EC-31, "Description".

ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)
A
EC
PBIB1068E
From the beginning of refueling, the air and vapor inside the fuel tank go through refueling EVAP vapor cut G
valve and EVAP/ORVR line to the EVAP canister. The vapor is absorbed by the EVAP canister and the air is
released to the atmosphere.
When the refueling has reached the full level of the fuel tank, the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve is closed and
refueling is stopped because of auto shut-off. The vapor which was absorbed by the EVAP canister is purged H
during driving.
WARNING:
When conducting inspections below, be sure to observe the following: I
• Put a “CAUTION: FLAMMABLE” sign in workshop.
• Do not smoke while servicing fuel system. Keep open flames and sparks away from work area.
• Be sure to furnish the workshop with a CO2 fire extinguisher. J
CAUTION:
• Before removing fuel line parts, carry out the following procedures:
- Put drained fuel in an explosion-proof container and put lid on securely.
- Release fuel pressure from fuel line. Refer to EC-78, "Fuel Pressure Check". K
- Disconnect battery ground cable.
• Always replace O-ring when the fuel gauge retainer is removed.
• Do not kink or twist hose and tube when they are installed. L
• Do not tighten hose and clamps excessively to avoid damaging hoses.
• After installation, run engine and check for fuel leaks at connection.
• Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically.
Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire. M
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004656176
N
SYMPTOM: FUEL ODOR FROM EVAP CANISTER IS STRONG.
1.CHECK EVAP CANISTER
O
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
2. Weigh the EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached. P
The weight should be less than 2.2 kg (4.9 lb).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.
2.CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER

Does water drain from the EVAP canister?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 3.
No >> GO TO 5.
PBIB1031E
3.REPLACE EVAP CANISTER

Replace EVAP canister with a new one.
>> GO TO 4.
4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection.
>> Repair or replace EVAP hose.

5.CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
Refer to EC-39, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.
SYMPTOM: CANNOT REFUEL/FUEL ODOR FROM THE FUEL FILLER OPENING IS STRONG
WHILE REFUELING.
attached.
2. Weigh the EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.
Does water drain from the EVAP canister?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 3.
No >> GO TO 5.
PBIB1031E
3.REPLACE EVAP CANISTER

Replace EVAP canister with a new one.

>> GO TO 4.
4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A
Check the EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection.
EC
>> Repair or replace EVAP hose.
5.CHECK VENT HOSES AND VENT TUBES
C
Check hoses and tubes between EVAP canister and refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for clogging, kink, loose-
ness and improper connection.
OK or NG
D
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes.
6.CHECK FILLER NECK TUBE E
Check recirculation line for clogging, dents and cracks.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. F
NG >> Replace filler neck tube.
G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. H
8.CHECK FUEL FILLER TUBE
Check filler neck tube and hose connected to the fuel tank for clogging, dents and cracks. I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace fuel filler tube. J
9.CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-I

Check one-way valve for clogging. K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Repair or replace one-way fuel valve with fuel tank. L
10.CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-II
1. Make sure that fuel is drained from the tank.
M
2. Remove fuel filler tube and hose.
3. Check one-way fuel valve for operation as follows.
When a stick is inserted, the valve should open, when removing
stick it should close. N
Do not drop any material into the tank.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END O
NG >> Replace fuel filler tube or replace one-way fuel valve
with fuel tank.
P
SEF665U
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000004656177
REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE

With CONSULT-III

1. Remove fuel tank. Refer to FL-10.
2. Drain fuel from the tank as follows:
a. Remove fuel feed hose located on the fuel gauge retainer.
b. Connect a spare fuel hose, one side to fuel gauge retainer where the hose was removed and the other
side to a fuel container.
c. Drain fuel using “FUEL PUMP RELAY” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows.
Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from the end of EVAP/ORVR line hose), and check that
the air flows freely into the tank.
4. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows.
a. Connect vacuum pump to hose end.
b. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit.
Always replace O-ring with new one.
c. Put fuel tank upside down.
d. Apply vacuum pressure to hose end [−13.3 kPa (−100 mmHg, −3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer
remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable.
PBIB1035E
Without CONSULT-III
1. Remove fuel tank. Refer to FL-10.
2. Drain fuel from the tank as follows:
a. Remove fuel gauge retainer.
b. Drain fuel from the tank using a handy pump into a fuel container.
3. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows.
Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from the end of EVAP/ORVR line hose), and check that
the air flows freely into the tank.
4. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows.
a. Connect vacuum pump to hose end.
b. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit.
Always replace O-ring with new one.
c. Put fuel tank upside down.

d. Apply vacuum pressure to hose end [−13.3 kPa (−100 mmHg, −3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer
remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable. A
EC
F
PBIB1035E

POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
PBIB3536E
1. PCV valve 2. Electric throttle control actuator 3. Mass air flow sensor
A. Normal condition B. Hi-load condition
: Fresh air
: Blow-by air
This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold.

The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake
manifold. During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the blow-by gas through the
PCV valve. Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any blow-by and a small amount of venti-
lating air. The ventilating air is then drawn from the air inlet tubes into the crankcase. In this process the air
passes through the hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker cover. Under full-throttle condition, the manifold
vacuum is insufficient to draw the blow-by flow through the valve. The flow goes through the hose connection
in the reverse direction.
On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not
meetthe requirement. This is because some of the flow will go
through the hoseconnection to the air inlet tubes under all condi-
tions.
PBIB1588E
PCV (POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION) VALVE

With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve from rocker cover. A
properly working valve makes a hissing noise as air passes through A
it. A strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a finger is
placed over valve inlet.
EC
PBIB1589E
D
PCV VALVE VENTILATION HOSE
1. Check hoses and hose connections for leaks.
2. Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any E
hosecannot be freed of obstructions, replace.
S-ET277

NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS)
• If the security indicator lights up with the ignition switch in the ON position or “NATS MALFUNC-
TION” is displayed on “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” screen, perform self-diagnostic results mode with
CONSULT-III using NATS program card. Refer to BL-134.
• Confirm no self-diagnostic results of NVIS (NATS) is displayed before touching “ERASE” in “SELF-
DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-III.
• When replacing ECM, initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) igni-
tion key IDs must be carried out with CONSULT-III using NATS program card.
Therefore, be sure to receive all keys from vehicle owner. Regarding the procedures of NVIS (NATS)
initialization and all NVIS (NATS) ignition key ID registration, refer to CONSULT-III Operation Manual,
IVIS/NVIS.

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
A
Introduction INFOID:0000000004656181
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system, which detects malfunctions related to engine sensors or actua- EC
tors. The ECM also records various emission-related diagnostic information including:
Emission-related diagnostic information Diagnostic service

C
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Service $03 of SAE J1979
Freeze Frame data Service $02 of SAE J1979
System Readiness Test (SRT) code Service $01 of SAE J1979 D
1st Trip Diagnostic Trouble Code (1st Trip DTC) Service $07 of SAE J1979
1st Trip Freeze Frame data
E
Test values and Test limits Service $06 of SAE J1979
Calibration ID Service $09 of SAE J1979
The above information can be checked using procedures listed in the table below. F
×: Applicable —: Not applicable
Freeze Frame 1st trip Freeze

DTC 1st trip DTC SRT status SRT code Test value
data Frame data G
CONSULT-III × × × × × × —
GST × × × — × × ×
ECM × ×* — — × — —
H
*: When DTC and 1st trip DTC simultaneously appear on the display, they cannot be clearly distinguished from each other.
The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on the instrument panel lights up when the same malfunction is detected
in two consecutive trips (Two trip detection logic), or when the ECM enters fail-safe mode. I
(Refer to EC-85, "Fail-Safe Chart".)
Two Trip Detection Logic INFOID:0000000004656182
J
When a malfunction is detected for the 1st time, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip Freeze Frame data are stored in the
ECM memory. The MIL will not light up at this stage. <1st trip>
If the same malfunction is detected again during the next drive, the DTC and Freeze Frame data are stored in K
the ECM memory, and the MIL lights up. The MIL lights up at the same time when the DTC is stored. <2nd
trip> The “trip” in the “Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed
during vehicle operation. Specific on board diagnostic items will cause the ECM to light up or blink the MIL, L
and store DTC and Freeze Frame data, even in the 1st trip, as shown below.
MIL DTC 1st trip DTC M

1st trip 2nd trip 2nd trip
Items 1st trip 2nd trip 1st trip
Lighting Lighting display-
Blinking Blinking displaying displaying displaying
up up ing
N
Misfire (Possible three way catalyst
damage) — DTC: P0300 - P0306 is × — — — — — × —
being detected
O
Misfire (Possible three way catalyst
damage) — DTC: P0300 - P0306 is — — × — — × — —
being detected
P
One trip detection diagnoses (Re-
fer to EC-46, "Emission-related Di- — × — — × — — —
agnostic Information".)
Except above — — — × — × × —
When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting up MIL when there is
malfunction on engine control system.

Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as
NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means
of operating fail-safe function.
The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected and demands the
driver to repair the malfunction.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut
Emission-related Diagnostic Information INFOID:0000000004656183
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS

DTC*1
Items MIL lighting Reference
CONSULT-III SRT code Trip
(CONSULT-III screen terms) up page
ECM*3
GST*2
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 1000*5 — 1 × EC-144
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1001 1001*5 — 2 — EC-144

1 (A/T) × (A/T)
CONTROL UNIT(CAN) U1010 1010 — EC-146
2 (M/T) — (M/T)
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING P0000 0000 — — Flashing*7 EC-62
MAY BE REQUIRED.
INT/V TIM CONT-B1 P0011 0011 — 2 × EC-147
EXH/V TIM CONT-B1 P0014 0014 — 2 × EC-151
INT/V TIM CONT-B2 P0021 0021 — 2 × EC-147
EXH/V TIM CONT-B2 P0024 0024 — 2 × EC-151
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) P0031 0031 — 2 × EC-156
A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) P0032 0032 — 2 × EC-156
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0037 0037 — 2 × EC-163
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0038 0038 — 2 × EC-163
A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) P0051 0051 — 2 × EC-156
A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) P0052 0052 — 2 × EC-156
HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0057 0057 — 2 × EC-163
HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0058 0058 — 2 × EC-163
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 P0075 0075 — 2 × EC-172
EX V/T MGT/RTDR-B1 P0078 0078 — 2 × EC-179
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B2 P0081 0081 — 2 × EC-172
EX V/T MGT/RTDR-B2 P0084 0084 — 2 × EC-179
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 P0101 0101 — 2 × EC-186
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT-B2 P010B 010B — 2 × EC-186
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT-B2 P010C 010C — 1 × EC-199
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT-B2 P010D 010D — 1 × EC-199
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 P0112 0112 — 2 × EC-208
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 P0113 0113 — 2 × EC-208
ECT SEN/CIRC P0117 0117 — 1 × EC-216
ECT SEN/CIRC P0118 0118 — 1 × EC-216
TP SEN 2/CIRC-B1 P0122 0122 — 1 × EC-222

DTC*1
Items MIL lighting Reference A
ECM*3
GST*2
TP SEN 2/CIRC-B1 P0123 0123 — 1 × EC-222 EC
ECT SENSOR P0125 0125 — 2 × EC-231
IAT SENSOR-B1 P0127 0127 — 2 × EC-234
THERMSTAT FNCTN P0128 0128 — 2 × EC-237 C
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0130 0130 — 2 × EC-239
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0131 0131 — 2 × EC-247
D
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0132 0132 — 2 × EC-255
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P0133 0133 × 2 × EC-263
HO2S2 (B1) P0137 0137 × 2 × EC-273 E
HO2S2 (B1) P0138 0138 × 2 × EC-283
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 0139 × 2 × EC-296
F
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P0150 0150 — 2 × EC-239
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P0151 0151 — 2 × EC-247
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P0152 0152 — 2 × EC-255 G
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P0153 0153 × 2 × EC-263
HO2S2 (B2) P0157 0157 × 2 × EC-273
H
HO2S2 (B2) P0158 0158 × 2 × EC-283
HO2S2 (B2) P0159 0159 × 2 × EC-296
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 P0171 0171 — 2 × EC-306 I
FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 P0172 0172 — 2 × EC-317
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B2 P0174 0174 — 2 × EC-306
FUEL SYS-RICH-B2 P0175 0175 — 2 × EC-317 J
FTT SENSOR P0181 0181 — 2 × EC-328
FTT SEN/CIRCUIT P0182 0182 — 2 × EC-332
K
FTT SEN/CIRCUIT P0183 0183 — 2 × EC-332
EOT SENSOR P0196 0196 — 2 × EC-336
EOT SEN/CIRCUIT P0197 0197 — 2 × EC-231 L
EOT SEN/CIRCUIT P0198 0198 — 2 × EC-231
TP SEN 1/CIRC-B1 P0222 0222 — 1 × EC-345
M
TP SEN 1/CIRC-B1 P0223 0223 — 1 × EC-345
TP SEN 2/CIRC-B2 P0227 0227 — 1 × EC-222
TP SEN 2/CIRC-B2 P0228 0228 — 1 × EC-222 N
MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 0300 — 2 × EC-354
CYL 1 MISFIRE P0301 0301 — 2 × EC-354
O
CYL 2 MISFIRE P0302 0302 — 2 × EC-354
CYL 3 MISFIRE P0303 0303 — 2 × EC-354
CYL 4 MISFIRE P0304 0304 — 2 × EC-354 P
CYL 5 MISFIRE P0305 0305 — 2 × EC-354
CYL 6 MISFIRE P0306 0306 — 2 × EC-354
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0327 0327 — 2 — EC-360

DTC*1
ECM*3
GST*2
CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 0335 — 2 × EC-367
CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 P0340 0340 — 2 × EC-375
CMP SEN/CIRC-B2 P0345 0345 — 2 × EC-375
TW CATALYST SYS-B1 P0420 0420 × 2 × EC-385
TW CATALYST SYS-B2 P0430 0430 × 2 × EC-385
EVAP PURG FLOW/MON P0441 0441 × 2 × EC-390
EVAP SMALL LEAK P0442 0442 × 2 × EC-395
PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0443 0443 — 2 × EC-401
VENT CONTROL VALVE P0447 0447 — 2 × EC-414
VENT CONTROL VALVE P0448 0448 — 2 × EC-419
EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0451 0451 — 2 × EC-425
EVAP GROSS LEAK P0455 0455 — 2 × EC-446
EVAP VERY SML LEAK P0456 0456 ×*4 2 × EC-452
FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH P0460 0460 — 2 × EC-459
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR P0461 0461 — 2 × EC-461
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC P0462 0462 — 2 × EC-463
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC P0463 0463 — 2 × EC-463
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*6 P0500 0500 — 2 × EC-465

ISC SYSTEM P0506 0506 — 2 × EC-467
ISC SYSTEM P0507 0507 — 2 × EC-469
PW ST P SEN/CIRC P0550 0550 — 2 — EC-471
ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT P0603 0603 — 2 × EC-476
ECM P0605 0605 — 1 or 2 × or — EC-480
SENSOR POWER/CIRC P0643 0643 — 1 × EC-482
TRANSMISSION CONT P0700 0700 — 1 × AT-97
T/M RANGE SENSOR A P0705 0705 — 2 × AT-98
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 0710 — 2 × AT-128
INPUT SPEED SENSOR A P0717 0717 — 2 × AT-108
OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR* 6 P0720 0720 — 2 × AT-103

1GR INCORRECT RATIO P0731 0731 — 2 × AT-110
TORQUE CONVERTER P0740 0740 — 2 × AT-120
TORQUE CONVERTER P0744 0744 — 2 × AT-122
PC SOLENOID A P0745 0745 — 2 × AT-124

DTC*1
Items MIL lighting Reference A
ECM*3
GST*2
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P0850 0850 — 2 × EC-488 EC
EXH TIM SEN/CIR-B1 P1078 1078 — 2 × EC-496
EXH TIM SEN/CIR-B2 P1084 1084 — 2 × EC-496
CLOSED LOOP-B1 P1148 1148 — 1 × EC-506 C
CLOSED LOOP-B2 P1168 1168 — 1 × EC-506
TCS C/U FUNCTN P1211 1211 — 2 — EC-507
D
TCS/CIRC P1212 1212 — 2 — EC-508
ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 — 1 × EC-509
CTP LEARNING-B1 P1225 1225 — 2 — EC-519 E
CTP LEARNING-B1 P1226 1226 — 2 — EC-521
ETC FUNCTION/CIRC-B2 P1233 1233 — 1 × EC-523
F
ETC MOT-B2 P1236 1236 — 1 × EC-532 G
ETC ACTR-B2 P1238 1238 — 1 × EC-539
TP SENSOR-B2 P1239 1239 — 1 × EC-541
H
ETC MOT PWR-B2 P1290 1290 — 1 × EC-549
COLD START CONTROL P1421 1421 — 2 × EC-556
ASCD SW P1564 1564 — 1 — EC-558 I
ASCD BRAKE SW P1572 1572 — 1 — EC-565
ASCD VHL SPD SEN P1574 1574 — 1 — EC-579
LOCK MODE P1610 1610 — 2 — BL-137 J
ID DISCORD,IMM-ECM P1611 1611 — 2 — BL-137
CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU P1612 1612 — 2 — BL-137
K
CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY P1614 1614 — 2 — BL-137
DIFFERENCE OF KEY P1615 1615 — 2 — BL-137
IN PULY SPEED P1715 1715 — 2 — EC-581 L
INTERLOCK P1730 1730 — 1 × AT-135
INPUT CLUTCH SOL P1752 1752 — 1 × AT-139
M
FR BRAKE SOLENOID P1757 1757 — 1 × AT-141
DRCT CLUTCH SOL P1762 1762 — 1 × AT-143
HLR CLUTCH SOLENOID P1767 1767 — 1 × AT-145 N
L C BRAKE SOLENOID P1772 1772 — 1 × AT-147
L C BRAKE SOLENOID P1774 1774 — 1 × AT-149
O
BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT P1805 1805 — 2 — EC-582
ETC MOT PWR-B1 P2100 2100 — 1 × EC-549
ETC FNCTN/CIRC-B1 P2101 2101 — 1 × EC-523 P
ETC MOT PWR-B1 P2103 2103 — 1 × EC-549
ETC MOT-B1 P2118 2118 — 1 × EC-532
ETC ACTR-B1 P2119 2119 — 1 × EC-539
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2122 2122 — 1 × EC-586
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2123 2123 — 1 × EC-586

DTC*1
ECM*3
GST*2
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2127 2127 — 1 × EC-593
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2128 2128 — 1 × EC-593
TP SENSOR2/CIRC-B2 P2132 2132 — 1 × EC-345
TP SENSOR2/CIRC-B2 P2133 2133 — 1 × EC-345
TP SENSOR-B1 P2135 2135 — 1 × EC-541
APP SENSOR P2138 2138 — 1 × EC-601
A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P2A00 2A00 — 2 × EC-609
A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P2A03 2A03 — 2 × EC-609
*4: SRT code will not be set if the self-diagnostic result is NG.
*5: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-III.
*6: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur, the MIL illuminates.
*7: When the ECM is in the mode of displaying SRT status, MIL may flash. For the details, refer to "How to Display SRT Status".
DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC

The 1st trip DTC (whose number is the same as the DTC number) is displayed for the latest self-diagnostic
results obtained. If the ECM memory was cleared previously, and the 1st trip DTC did not reoccur, the 1st trip
DTC will not be displayed.
If a malfunction is detected during the 1st trip, the 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM memory. The MIL will not
light up (two trip detection logic). If the same malfunction is not detected in the 2nd trip (meeting the required
driving pattern), the 1st trip DTC is cleared from the ECM memory. If the same malfunction is detected in the
2nd trip, both the 1st trip DTC and DTC are stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up. In other words,
the DTC is stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up when the same malfunction occurs in two consec-
utive trips. If a 1st trip DTC is stored and a non-diagnostic operation is performed between the 1st and 2nd
trips, only the 1st trip DTC will continue to be stored. For malfunctions that blink or light up the MIL during the
1st trip, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are stored in the ECM memory.
Procedures for clearing the DTC and the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory are described in "HOW TO
ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION".
For malfunctions in which 1st trip DTCs are displayed, refer to "EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFOR-
MATION ITEMS". These items are required by legal regulations to continuously monitor the system/compo-
nent. In addition, the items monitored non-continuously are also displayed on CONSULT-III.
1st trip DTC is specified in Service $07 of SAE J1979. 1st trip DTC detection occurs without lighting up the MIL
and therefore does not warn the driver of a malfunction. However, 1st trip DTC detection will not prevent the
vehicle from being tested, for example during Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) tests.
When a 1st trip DTC is detected, check, print out or write down and erase (1st trip) DTC and Freeze Frame
data as specified in Work Flow procedure Step 2, refer to EC-80, "Trouble Diagnosis Introduction". Then per-
form DTC Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check to try to duplicate the malfunction. If the mal-
function is duplicated, the item requires repair.
How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC
DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods.
With CONSULT-III
With GST
CONSULT-III or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0340, P0850, P1148, etc.
These DTCs are prescribed by SAE J2012.
(CONSULT-III also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
No Tools
The number of blinks of the MIL in the Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-Diagnostic Results) indicates the DTC.
Example: 0340, 0850, 1148, etc.
These DTCs are controlled by NISSAN.
• 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.

• Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, GST or the Diagnostic Test Mode II do not indi-
cate whether the malfunction is still occurring or has occurred in the past and has returned to nor- A
mal. CONSULT-III can identify malfunction status as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-III (if
available) is recommended.
A sample of CONSULT-III display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown below. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunc-
EC
tion is displayed in “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS” mode of CONSULT-III. Time data indicates how many
times the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC.
If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be [0].
If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be [1t]. C
FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA
The ECM records the driving conditions such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant tem-
perature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, absolute throttle position, base D
fuel schedule and intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data.
The data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-III or E
GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-III screen, not on the GST. For
details, see EC-111, "CONSULT-III Function (ENGINE)".
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data) can be stored in the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority F
for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the fol- G
lowing priorities to update the data.
Priority Items
H
Freeze frame data Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0306
1
Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175
2 Except the above items (Includes A/T related items) I
3 1st trip freeze frame data
For example, the EGR malfunction (Priority: 2) was detected and the freeze frame data was stored in the 2nd
trip. After that when the misfire (Priority: 1) is detected in another trip, the freeze frame data will be updated J
from the EGR malfunction to the misfire. The 1st trip freeze frame data is updated each time a different mal-
function is detected. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data. However, once freeze frame data is
stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze data is no longer stored (because only one freeze frame data or 1st K
trip freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM). If freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory and freeze
frame data with the same priority occurs later, the first (original) freeze frame data remains unchanged in the
ECM memory.
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM mem- L
ory is erased. Procedures for clearing the ECM memory are described in "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-
RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION".
SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE M
System Readiness Test (SRT) code is specified in Service $01 of SAE J1979.
As part of an enhanced emissions test for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M), certain states require the status of
SRT be used to indicate whether the ECM has completed self-diagnosis of major emission systems and com- N
ponents. Completion must be verified in order for the emissions inspection to proceed.
If a vehicle is rejected for a State emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, use
the information in this Service Manual to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
O
In most cases the ECM will automatically complete its self-diagnosis cycle during normal usage, and the SRT
status will indicate “CMPLT” for each application system. Once set as “CMPLT”, the SRT status remains
“CMPLT” until the self-diagnosis memory is erased.
Occasionally, certain portions of the self-diagnostic test may not be completed as a result of the customer's P
normal driving pattern; the SRT will indicate “INCMP” for these items.
NOTE:
The SRT will also indicate “INCMP” if the self-diagnosis memory is erased for any reason or if the ECM mem-
ory power supply is interrupted for several hours.
If, during the state emissions inspection, the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items, the inspector will con-
tinue with the emissions test. However, if the SRT indicates “INCMP” for one or more of the SRT items the
vehicle is returned to the customer untested.

NOTE:
If MIL is ON during the state emissions inspection, the vehicle is also returned to the customer untested even
though the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items. Therefore, it is important to check SRT (“CMPLT”) and
DTC (No DTCs) before the inspection.
SRT Item
The table below shows required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
SRT item Perfor-

(CONSULT-III indica- mance Pri- Required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT” Corresponding DTC No.
tion) ority*
CATALYST 2 Three way catalyst function P0420, P0430
1 EVAP control system P0442
EVAP SYSTEM 2 EVAP control system P0456
2 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring P0441
2 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 P0133, P0153
Heated oxygen sensor 2 P0139, P0159
HO2S
*: If completion of several SRTs is required, perform driving patterns (DTC confirmation procedure), one by one based on the priority for
models with CONSULT-III.
SRT Set Timing

SRT is set as “CMPLT” after self-diagnosis has been performed one or more times. Completion of SRT is
done regardless of whether the result is OK or NG. The set timing is different between OK and NG results and
is shown in the table below.
Example
Self-diagnosis result Ignition cycle
Diagnosis
← ON → OFF ← ON → OFF ← ON → OFF ← ON →
All OK Case 1 P0400 OK (1) — (1) OK (2) — (2)
P0402 OK (1) — (1) — (1) OK (2)
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2)
SRT of EGR “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT”
Case 2 P0400 OK (1) — (1) — (1) — (1)
P0402 — (0) — (0) OK (1) — (1)
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2)
SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT” “CMPLT”
NG exists Case 3 P0400 OK OK — —
P0402 — — — —
NG
P1402 NG — NG (Consecutive
NG)
(1st trip) DTC
1st trip DTC — 1st trip DTC
DTC (= MIL “ON”)
SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT”
OK: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is OK.
NG: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is NG.
—: Self-diagnosis is not carried out.
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results in a single cycle (Ignition OFF-ON-OFF), the SRT will
indicate “CMPLT”. → Case 1 above
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results through several different cycles, the SRT will indicate
“CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have at least one OK result. → Case 2 above

If one or more SRT related self-diagnoses showed NG results in 2 consecutive cycles, the SRT will also indi-
cate “CMPLT”. → Case 3 above A
The table above shows that the minimum number of cycles for setting SRT as “INCMP” is one (1) for each
self-diagnosis (Case 1 & 2) or two (2) for one of self-diagnoses (Case 3). However, in preparation for the state
emissions inspection, it is unnecessary for each self-diagnosis to be executed twice (Case 3) for the following
EC
reasons:
• The SRT will indicate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have one (1) OK result.
• The emissions inspection requires “CMPLT” of the SRT only with OK self-diagnosis results.
• When, during SRT driving pattern, 1st trip DTC (NG) is detected prior to “CMPLT” of SRT, the self-diagnosis C
memory must be erased from ECM after repair.
• If the 1st trip DTC is erased, all the SRT will indicate “INCMP”.
NOTE: D
SRT can be set as “CMPLT” together with the DTC(s). Therefore, DTC check must always be carried out
prior to the state emission inspection even though the SRT indicates “CMPLT”.
SRT Service Procedure E
If a vehicle has failed the state emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, review
the flowchart diagnostic sequence on the next page.
PBIB2320E
*1 "How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC" *2 "How to Display SRT Status" *3 "How to Set SRT Code"

How to Display SRT Status
WITH CONSULT-III
Selecting “SRT STATUS” in “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” mode with CONSULT-III.
For items whose SRT codes are set, a “CMPLT” is displayed on the CONSULT-III screen; for items whose
SRT codes are not set, “INCMP” is displayed.
A sample of CONSULT-III display for SRT code is shown in the figure.
“INCMP” means the self-diagnosis is incomplete and SRT is not set. “CMPLT” means the self-diagnosis is
complete and SRT is set.
NOTE:
Though displayed on the CONSULT-III screen, “HO2S HTR” is not SRT item.
WITH GST
Selecting Service $01 with GST (Generic Scan Tool)
NO TOOLS
A SRT code itself can not be displayed while only SRT status can be.
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait 20 seconds.
2. SRT status is indicated as shown below.
- When all SRT codes are set, MIL lights up continuously.
- When any SRT codes are not set, MIL will flash periodically for 10 seconds.
PBIB2317E
How to Set SRT Code

To set all SRT codes, self-diagnosis for the items indicated above must be performed one or more times. Each
diagnosis may require a long period of actual driving under various conditions.
WITH CONSULT-III
Perform corresponding DTC Confirmation Procedure one by one based on Performance Priority in the table
on "SRT Item".
WITHOUT CONSULT-III
The most efficient driving pattern in which SRT codes can be properly set is explained on the next page. The
driving pattern should be performed one or more times to set all SRT codes.

Driving Pattern
A
EC
PBIB3622E
P
• The time required for each diagnosis varies with road surface conditions, weather, altitude, individual driving
habits, etc.
Zone A refers to the range where the time, required for the diagnosis under normal conditions*, is the short-
est.
Zone B refers to the range where the diagnosis can still be performed if the diagnosis is not completed within
zone A.
*: Normal conditions refer to the following:

• Sea level
• Flat road
• Ambient air temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
• Diagnosis is performed as quickly as possible under normal conditions.
Under different conditions [For example: ambient air temperature other than 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)], diagno-
sis may also be performed.
Pattern 1:
• The engine is started at the engine coolant temperature of −10 to 35°C (14 to 95°F)
(where the voltage between the ECM terminal 71 and ground is 3.0 - 4.3V).
• The engine must be operated at idle speed until the engine coolant temperature is greater than 70°C
(158°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 71 and ground is lower than 1.4V).
• The engine is started at the fuel tank temperature of warmer than 0°C (32°F) (where the voltage
between the ECM terminal 106 and ground is less than 4.1V).
Pattern 2:
• When steady-state driving is performed again even after it is interrupted, each diagnosis can be conducted.
In this case, the time required for diagnosis may be extended.
Pattern 3:
• Operate vehicle following the driving pattern shown in the figure.
• Release the accelerator pedal during decelerating vehicle speed
from 90 km/h (56 MPH) to 0 km/h (0 MPH).
Pattern 4:
• The accelerator pedal must be held very steady during steady-
state driving.
• If the accelerator pedal is moved, the test must be conducted all
over again.
*1: Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56
MPH), then release the accelerator pedal and keep it released for
more than 10 seconds. Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle
PBIB2244E
speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH) again.
*2: Checking the vehicle speed with GST is advised.
Suggested Transmission Gear Position for A/T Models
Set the selector lever in the D position.
Suggested Upshift Speeds for M/T Models
Shown below are suggested vehicle speeds for shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions relate to fuel
economy and vehicle performance. Actual upshift speeds will vary according to road conditions, the weather
and individual driving habits.
For quick acceleration in low altitude

For normal acceleration in low altitude areas
areas and high altitude areas
[less than 1,219 m (4,000 ft)]:
[over 1,219 m (4,000 ft)]:
Gear change ACCEL shift point km/h (MPH) CRUISE shift point km/h (MPH) km/h (MPH)
1st to 2nd 21 (13) 13 (8) 24 (15)
2nd to 3rd 37 (23) 26 (16) 40 (25)
3rd to 4th 48 (30) 40 (25) 64 (40)
4th to 5th 60 (37) 45 (28) 72 (45)
6th 68 (42) 53 (33) 80 (50)
Suggested Maximum Speed in Each Gear

Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.
Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed (shown below) in any gear. For level road driving, use the high-
est gear suggested for that speed. Always observe posted speed limits and drive according to the road condi-
tions to ensure sage operation. Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause
engine damage or loss of vehicle control.
Gear km/h (MPH)

1st 65 (40)
2nd 106 (66)

Gear km/h (MPH)
A
3rd 152 (95)
4th —
5th — EC
6th —
TEST VALUE AND TEST LIMIT (GST ONLY - NOT APPLICABLE TO CONSULT-III)
The following is the information specified in Service $06 of SAE J1979. C
The test value is a parameter used to determine whether a system/circuit diagnostic test is OK or NG while
being monitored by the ECM during self-diagnosis. The test limit is a reference value which is specified as the
maximum or minimum value and is compared with the test value being monitored. D
These data (test value and test limit) are specified by On Board Monitor ID(OBDMID), Test ID (TID), Unit and
Scaling ID and can be displayed on the GST screen.
The items of the test value and test limit will be displayed with GST screen which items are provided by the E
ECM. (eg., if the bank 2 is not applied on this vehicle, only the items of the bank 1 is displayed)
Test value and Test

limit F
OBD- (GST display)
Item Self-diagnostic test item DTC Description
MID Unit and
TID Scaling G
ID
Minimum sensor output voltage for test
P0131 83H 0BH
cycle
H
Maximum sensor output voltage for test
P0131 84H 0BH
cycle
Minimum sensor output voltage for test I
P0130 85H 0BH
cycle
P0130 86H 0BH
cycle
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 J
01H Response rate: Response ratio (Lean to
(Bank 1) P0133 87H 04H
Rich)
Response rate: Response ratio (Rich to
P0133 88H 04H K
Lean)
P2A00 89H 84H The amount of shift in air fuel ratio
P2A00 8AH 84H The amount of shift in air fuel ratio L
HO2S P0130 8BH 0BH Difference in sensor output voltage
P0133 8CH 83H Response gain at the limited frequency
Minimum sensor output voltage for test M
P0138 07H 0CH
cycle
Heated oxygen sensor 2 Maximum sensor output voltage for test

02H P0137 08H 0CH
(Bank 1) cycle N
P0138 80H 0CH Sensor output voltage
P0139 81H 0CH Difference in sensor output voltage
O
P0143 07H 0CH
cycle

03H P0144 08H 0CH P
(Bank 1) cycle

Test value and Test
limit
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling
ID
P0151 83H 0BH
cycle
P0151 84H 0BH
cycle
P0150 85H 0BH
cycle
P0150 86H 0BH
cycle
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
05H Response rate: Response ratio (Lean to
(Bank 2) P0153 87H 04H
Rich)
Response rate: Response ratio (Rich to
P0153 88H 04H
Lean)
P2A03 89H 84H The amount of shift in air fuel ratio
P2A03 8AH 84H The amount of shift in air fuel ratio
HO2S P0150 8BH 0BH Difference in sensor output voltage
P0153 8CH 83H Response gain at the limited frequency
P0158 07H 0CH
cycle

06H P0157 08H 0CH
(Bank 2) cycle
P0163 07H 0CH
cycle

07H P0164 08H 0CH
(Bank2) cycle
P0420 80H 01H O2 storage index
Switching time lag engine exhaust index
P0420 82H 01H
Three way catalyst function value
21H
(Bank1) Difference in 3rd O2 sensor output volt-
P2423 83H 0CH
age
CATA- P2423 84H 84H O2 storage index in HC trap catalyst

LYST P0430 80H 01H O2 storage index
Switching time lag engine exhaust index
P0430 82H 01H
Three way catalyst function value
22H
(Bank2) Difference in 3rd O2 sensor output volt-
P2424 83H 0CH
age
P2424 84H 84H O2 storage index in HC trap catalyst

Test value and Test
limit A
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling EC
ID
Low Flow Faults: EGR temp change
P0400 80H 96H
rate (short term)
C
Low Flow Faults: EGR temp change
P0400 81H 96H
rate (long term)
EGR Low Flow Faults: Difference between D
31H EGR function
SYSTEM P0400 82H 96H max EGR temp and EGR temp under
idling condition
P0400 83H 96H Low Flow Faults: Max EGR temp
E
High Flow Faults: EGR temp increase
P1402 84H 96H
rate
EVAP control system leak Difference in pressure sensor output
39H
(Cap Off)
P0455 80H 0CH
voltage before and after pull down
F
EVAP control system leak Leak area index (for more than
3BH P0442 80H 05H
(Small leak) 0.04inch)
G
Leak area index (for more than
EVAP P0456 80H 05H
EVAP control system 0.02inch)
SYSTEM 3CH
(Very small leak) Maximum internal pressure of EVAP
P0456 81H FDH H
system during monitoring
Difference in pressure sensor output
3DH Purge flow system P0441 83H 0CH voltage before and after vent control val-
ue close I
A/F sensor 1 heater Low Input:P0031 Converted value of Heater electric cur-
41H 81H 0BH
(Bank 1) High Input:P0032 rent to voltage
Heated oxygen sensor 2 Low Input:P0037 Converted value of Heater electric cur- J
42H 80H 0CH
Heated oxygen sensor 3 Converted value of Heater electric cur-
O2 SEN- 43H P0043 80H 0CH
(Bank 1) rent to voltage K
SOR
HEATER A/F sensor 1 heater Low Input:P0051 Converted value of Heater electric cur-
45H 81H 0BH
Heated oxygen sensor 2 Low Input:P0057 Converted value of Heater electric cur- L
46H 80H 0CH
Heated oxygen sensor 3 Converted value of Heater electric cur-
47H P0063 80H 0CH
(Bank 2) rent to voltage M
Secondary Air Injection System Incor-
P0411 80H 01H
rect Flow Detected
Bank1: P0491 Secondary Air Injection System Insuffi- N
81H 01H
Bank2: P0492 cient Flow
Secondary Air Injection System Pump
P2445 82H 01H
Stuck Off
O
SEC-
Secondary Air Injection System High
OND- 71H Secondary Air system P2448 83H 01H
Airflow
ARY AIR
Bank1: P2440 Secondary Air Injection System Switch- P
84H 01H
Bank2: P2442 ing Valve Stuck Open
Secondary Air Injection System Switch-
P2440 85H 01H
ing Valve Stuck Open
Secondary Air Injection System Pump
P2444 86H 01H
Stuck On

Test value and Test
limit
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling
ID
Fuel injection system function P0171 or P0172 80H 2FH Long term fuel trim
81H
(Bank 1) P0171 or P0172 81H 24H The number of lambda control clamped
FUEL
SYSTEM P0174 or P0175 80H 2FH Long term fuel trim
Fuel injection system function
82H
(Bank 2) P0174 or P0175 81H 24H The number of lambda control clamped
Misfiring counter at 1000rev of the first
P0301 80H 24H
cylinder
Misfiring counter at 1000rev of the sec-
P0302 81H 24H
ond cylinder
Misfiring counter at 1000rev of the third
P0303 82H 24H
cylinder
Misfiring counter at 1000rev of the
P0304 83H 24H
fourth cylinder
Misfiring counter at 1000rev of the fifth
P0305 84H 24H
cylinder
Misfiring counter at 1000rev of the sixth
P0306 85H 24H
cylinder
Misfiring counter at 1000rev of the sev-
P0307 86H 24H
enth cylinder
Misfiring counter at 1000rev of the
P0308 87H 24H
eighth cylinder
Misfiring counter at 1000rev of the mul-
P0300 88H 24H
tiple cylinders
Misfiring counter at 200rev of the first
P0301 89H 24H
cylinder
MISFIRE A1H Multiple Cylinder Misfire
Misfiring counter at 200rev of the sec-
P0302 8AH 24H
ond cylinder
Misfiring counter at 200rev of the third
P0303 8BH 24H
cylinder
Misfiring counter at 200rev of the fourth
P0304 8CH 24H
cylinder
P0305 8DH 24H
cylinder
P0306 8EH 24H
cylinder
P0307 8FH 24H
cylinder
P0308 90H 24H
cylinder
Misfiring counter at 1000rev of the sin-
P0300 91H 24H
gle cylinder
Misfiring counter at 200rev of the single
P0300 92H 24H
cylinder
Misfiring counter at 200rev of the multi-
P0300 93H 24H
ple cylinders

Test value and Test
limit A
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling EC
ID
EWMA (Exponential Weighted Moving
P0301 0BH 24H Average) misfire counts for last 10 driv-
ing cycles
C
A2H No.1 Cylinder Misfire
Misfire counts for last/current driving cy-
P0301 0CH 24H
cles
D
A3H No.2 Cylinder Misfire ing cycles
Misfire counts for last/current driving cy- E
P0302 0CH 24H
cles
P0303 0BH 24H Average) misfire counts for last 10 driv- F
P0303 0CH 24H
cles G
H
P0304 0CH 24H
cles
MISFIRE
I
P0305 0CH 24H J
cles
A7H No.6 Cylinder Misfire ing cycles K
P0306 0CH 24H
cles
EWMA (Exponential Weighted Moving L
Misfire counts for last/current driving cy- M
P0307 0CH 24H
cles
ing cycles
N
A9H No.8 Cylinder Misfire
P0308 0CH 24H
cles
O
HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION
How to Erase DTC and 1st Trip DTC
With CONSULT-III P
NOTE:
• If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once.
Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
• If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-13, EC-14), skip step 1.
1. Erase DTC in TCM. AT-37, "OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)".
2. Select “ENGINE” with CONSULT-III.
3. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.

4. Touch “ERACE”. (DTC in ECM will be erased.)
With GST
NOTE:
2. Select Service $04 with GST (Generic Scan Tool).
No Tools
NOTE:
2. Erase DTC in ECM. Refer to How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results).
• If the battery is disconnected, the emission-related diagnostic information will be lost within 24
hours.
• The following data are cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
- Diagnostic trouble codes
- 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
- Freeze frame data
- 1st trip freeze frame data
- System readiness test (SRT) codes
- Test values
Actual work procedures are explained using a DTC as an example. Be careful so that not only the DTC, but all
of the data listed above, are cleared from the ECM memory during work procedures.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) INFOID:0000000004656184
DESCRIPTION
The MIL is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON with-
out the engine running. This is a bulb check.
If the MIL does not light up, refer to DI-53, or see EC-662.
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off.
If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has
detected an engine system malfunction.
SEF217U
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FUNCTION

The on board diagnostic system has the following three functions.

Diagnostic Test KEY and ENG. Function Explanation of Function A

Mode Status
Mode I Ignition switch in BULB CHECK This function checks the MIL bulb for damage (blown, open
ON position circuit, etc.).
EC
If the MIL does not come on, check MIL circuit.
Engine stopped C
D
Engine running MALFUNCTION This is a usual driving condition. When a malfunction is de-
WARNING tected twice in two consecutive driving cycles (two trip de-
tection logic), the MIL will light up to inform the driver that a
malfunction has been detected.
E
The following malfunctions will light up or blink the MIL in
the 1st trip.
• Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage)
F
• One trip detection diagnoses
Mode II Ignition switch in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC This function allows DTCs and 1st trip DTCs to be read.
ON position RESULTS
G
Engine stopped H
I
When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting up MIL when there is
malfunction on engine control system.
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as J
NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means
of operating fail-safe function.
driver to repair the malfunction. K
MIL Flashing Without DTC L

When any SRT codes are not set, MIL may flash without DTC. For the details, refer to EC-46, "Emission-
related Diagnostic Information".
M
HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
NOTE:
• It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
• It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit has N
a malfunction.
• Always ECM returns to Diagnostic Test Mode I after ignition switch is turned OFF.
How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results) O
1. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds.
2. Repeat the following procedure quickly 5 times within 5 seconds.
P
a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
b. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
3. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 10 seconds until the MIL starts
blinking.
NOTE:

Do not release the accelerator pedal for 10 seconds if MIL may start blinking on the halfway of this
10 seconds. This blinking is displaying SRT status and is continued for another 10 seconds. For
the details, refer to EC-46, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information".
4. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results).
NOTE:
Wait until the same DTC (or 1st trip DTC) appears to confirm all DTCs certainly.
PBIB0092E
How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)

1. Set ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results).
Refer to "How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)".
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for more than 10 seconds.
The emission-related diagnostic information has been erased from the backup memory in the ECM.
3. Fully release the accelerator pedal, and confirm the DTC 0000 is displayed.
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — BULB CHECK
In this mode, the MIL on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains OFF, check the bulb.
Refer to DI-53 or see EC-662.
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — MALFUNCTION WARNING
MIL Condition
ON When the malfunction is detected.
OFF No malfunction.
These DTC numbers are clarified in Diagnostic Test Mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS)
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

In this mode, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are indicated by the number of blinks of the MIL as shown below.
The DTC and 1st trip DTC are displayed at the same time. If the MIL does not illuminate in diagnostic test
mode I (Malfunction warning), all displayed items are 1st trip DTCs. If only one code is displayed when the MIL
illuminates in diagnostic test mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS), it is a DTC; if two or more codes are
displayed, they may be either DTCs or 1st trip DTCs. DTC No. is same as that of 1st trip DTC. These uniden-

tified codes can be identified by using the CONSULT-III or GST. A DTC will be used as an example for how to
read a code. A
EC
PBIB3005E
A particular trouble code can be identified by the number of four-digit numeral flashes as follows. The length of
time the 1,000th-digit numeral flashes on and off is 1.2 seconds consisting of an ON (0.6-second) - OFF (0.6- J
second) cycle. The 100th-digit numeral and lower digit numerals consist of a 0.3-second ON and 0.3-second
OFF cycle. A change from one digit numeral to another occurs at an interval of 1.0-second OFF. In other
words, the later numeral appears on the display 1.3 seconds after the former numeral has disappeared. K
Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
Flashes 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 12 13 14 15 16 L
A change from one trouble code to another occurs at an interval of 1.8-second OFF.
In this way, all the detected malfunctions are classified by their DTC numbers. The DTC 0000 refers to no mal-
function. (See EC-9) M
How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)

The DTC can be erased from the back up memory in the ECM by depressing accelerator pedal.
Refer to "How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)". N
• If the battery is disconnected, the DTC will be lost from the backup memory within 24 hours.
• Be careful not to erase the stored memory before starting trouble diagnoses.
O
OBD System Operation Chart INFOID:0000000004656185
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, 1ST TRIP DTC, DTC, AND DETECTABLE ITEMS
P
• When a malfunction is detected for the 1st time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory.
• When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory, and the MIL will come on. For details, refer to EC-45, "Two Trip Detection Logic".
• The MIL will go off after the vehicle is driven 3 times (driving pattern B) with no malfunction. The drive is
counted only when the recorded driving pattern is met (as stored in the ECM). If another malfunction occurs
while counting, the counter will reset.

• The DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 40 times (driving pattern A) with-
out the same malfunction recurring (except for Misfire and Fuel Injection System). For Misfire and Fuel Injec-
tion System, the DTC and freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 80 times (driving pattern
C) without the same malfunction recurring. The “TIME” in “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS” mode of CON-
SULT-III will count the number of times the vehicle is driven.
• The 1st trip DTC is not displayed when the self-diagnosis results in OK for the 2nd trip.
SUMMARY CHART
Items Fuel Injection System Misfire Other

MIL (goes off) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B)
DTC, Freeze Frame Data (no
80 (pattern C) 80 (pattern C) 40 (pattern A)
display)
1st Trip DTC (clear) 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern B)
1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
*1, *2 *1, *2 1 (pattern B)
(clear)
For details about patterns B and C under “Fuel Injection System” and “Misfire”, see "EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR
“MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”".
For details about patterns A and B under “Other”, see "EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUAL-
ITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”".
*1: Clear timing is at the moment OK is detected.
*2: Clear timing is when the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip.
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE ”
<EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”

EC
L
SEF392S
*1: When the same malfunction is de- *2: MIL will go off after vehicle is driven 3 *3: When the same malfunction is de- M
tected in two consecutive trips, MIL times (pattern B) without any mal- tected in two consecutive trips, the
will light up. functions. DTC and the freeze frame data will be
stored in ECM.
N
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data *5: When a malfunction is detected for *6: The 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip
will not be displayed any longer after the 1st time, the 1st trip DTC and the freeze frame data will be cleared at
vehicle is driven 80 times (pattern C) 1st trip freeze frame data will be the moment OK is detected.
without the same malfunction. (The stored in ECM. O
DTC and the freeze frame data still
remain in ECM.)
*7: When the same malfunction is de- *8: 1st trip DTC will be cleared when ve-
tected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip hicle is driven once (pattern C) with- P
freeze frame data will be cleared. out the same malfunction after DTC
is stored in ECM.
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORA-

TION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
<Driving Pattern B>
Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows:

All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system.
• The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern.
• The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunction.
• The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3. (*2 in OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART)
<Driving Pattern C>
Driving pattern C means the vehicle operation as follows:
The following conditions should be satisfied at the same time:
Engine speed: (Engine speed in the freeze frame data) ±375 rpm
Calculated load value: (Calculated load value in the freeze frame data) x (1±0.1) [%]
Engine coolant temperature (T) condition:
• When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70°C (158°F), T should be lower than 70°C (158°F).
• When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F), T should be higher than or equal to
70°C (158°F).
Example:
If the stored freeze frame data is as follows:
Engine speed: 850 rpm, Calculated load value: 30%, Engine coolant temperature: 80°C (176°F)
To be satisfied with driving pattern C, the vehicle should run under the following conditions:
Engine speed: 475 - 1,225 rpm, Calculated load value: 27 - 33%, Engine coolant temperature: more than 70°C
(158°F)
• The C counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of vehicle conditions above.
• The C counter will be counted up when vehicle conditions above is satisfied without the same malfunction.
• The DTC will not be displayed after C counter reaches 80.(*2 in OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART)
• The 1st trip DTC will be cleared when C counter is counted once without the same malfunction after DTC is
stored in ECM.
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR
“MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”

EC
L
SEF393SD
*1: When the same malfunction is de- *2: MIL will go off after vehicle is driven 3 *3: When the same malfunction is de- M
tected in two consecutive trips, MIL times (pattern B) without any mal- tected in two consecutive trips, the
will light up. functions. DTC and the freeze frame data will be
stored in ECM.
N
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data *5: When a malfunction is detected for *6: 1st trip DTC will be cleared after vehi-
will not be displayed any longer after the 1st time, the 1st trip DTC and the cle is driven once (pattern B) without
vehicle is driven 40 times (pattern A) 1st trip freeze frame data will be the same malfunction.
without the same malfunction. stored in ECM. O
(The DTC and the freeze frame data
still remain in ECM.)
*7: When the same malfunction is de-
tected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip P
freeze frame data will be cleared.
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETE-
RIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”

<Driving Pattern A>
AEC574
• The A counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of (1) - (4).
• The A counter will be counted up when (1) - (4) are satisfied without the same malfunction.
• The DTC will not be displayed after the A counter reaches 40.(*2 in OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART)
<Driving Pattern B>
Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows:
All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system.
• The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern.
• The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunctions.
• The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3 (*2 in OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART).

BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
A
Basic Inspection INFOID:0000000004656186
1.INSPECTION START EC
1. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction, or a current need for
scheduled maintenance.
2. Open engine hood and check the following: C
- Harness connectors for improper connections
- Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut
- Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections
D
- Hoses and ducts for leaks
- Air cleaner clogging
- Gasket
3. Confirm that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied. E
- Headlamp switch is OFF.
- Air conditioner switch is OFF.
- Rear window defogger switch is OFF. F
SEF983U
- Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc.
4. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature
indicator points the middle of gauge.
Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm. G
I
SEF976U
J
5. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-
load.
6. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-III or GST.
OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
L
M
SEF977U
2.REPAIR OR REPLACE
Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding Diagnostic Procedure. N
>> GO TO 3.
O
3.CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-III
1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load. P

2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no-
load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute.
3. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
Refer to EC-75, "Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check".
A/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)

M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position)
Without CONSULT-III
1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-
load. SEF978U
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no-
load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute.
3. Check idle speed. Refer to EC-75, "Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check".

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 4.
4.PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING
1. Stop engine.
2. Perform EC-76, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning".
>> GO TO 5.
5.PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING
Perform EC-76, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".
>> GO TO 6.
6.PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Refer to EC-77, "Idle Air Volume Learning".
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 7.
No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning.
2. GO TO 4.
7.CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

Without CONSULT-III

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.

NG >> GO TO 8.
Check the following.

• Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit.
EC
Refer to EC-375.
• Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit.
Refer to EC-367.
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> 1. Repair or replace.
2. GO TO 4. D
9.CHECK ECM FUNCTION
1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but E
this is a rare case.)
2. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs.
Refer to BL-134.
F
>> GO TO 4.
10.CHECK IGNITION TIMING G
1. Run engine at idle.
2. Check ignition timing with a timing light.
H
A : Timing indicator
I
A/T: 16 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
M/T: 16 ± 5° BTDC (in Neutral position)
OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 19.
NG >> GO TO 11. PBIB3530E
K
11.PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING
1. Stop engine.
2. Perform EC-76, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". L
>> GO TO 12.
12.PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING M
Perform EC-76, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".
N
>> GO TO 13.
Refer to EC-77, "Idle Air Volume Learning". O
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 14. P
No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning.
2. GO TO 4.
14.CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
With CONSULT-III


Without CONSULT-III

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 17.
15.CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN
1. Run engine at idle.
2. Check ignition timing with a timing light.
A : Timing indicator

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19.
16.CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION

Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-53.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> 1. Repair the timing chain installation.
2. GO TO 4.
• Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit.
Refer to EC-375.
• Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit.
Refer to EC-367.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.
NG >> 1. Repair or replace.
2. GO TO 4.
18.CHECK ECM FUNCTION
1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but
this is a rare case.)
Refer to BL-134.
>> GO TO 4.
19.INSPECTION END
Did you replace the ECM, referring this Basic Inspection procedure?

Yes or No
Yes >> 1. Perform EC-75, "VIN Registration" A
2. Perform EC-76, "Exhaust Valve Timing Control Learning".
3. INSPECTION END
No >> INSPECTION END EC
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check INFOID:0000000004656187
IDLE SPEED C
With CONSULT-III
Check idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. D
With GST
Check idle speed in Service $01 with GST.
E
IGNITION TIMING
1. Attach timing light to loop wire as shown.
F
PBIB3526E
I
1. Loop wire
A. Timing light B. Timing indicator
J
2. Check ignition timing.
Procedure After Replacing ECM INFOID:0000000004656188
K
When replacing ECM, the following procedure must be performed.
1. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-135, "ECM Re-communicating Function". L
2. Perform EC-75, "VIN Registration".
4. Perform EC-76, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". M
5. Perform EC-76, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".
6. Perform EC-77, "Idle Air Volume Learning".
N
VIN Registration INFOID:0000000004656189
DESCRIPTION O
VIN Registration is an operation to registering VIN in ECM. It must be performed each time ECM is replaced.
NOTE:
Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M).
P
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-III
1. Check the VIN of the vehicle and note it. Refer to GI-43.
2. Turn ignition switch ON and engine stopped.
3. Select “VIN REGISTRATION” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.

4. Follow the instruction of CONSULT-III display.
Exhaust Valve Timing Control Learning INFOID:0000000004656190
DESCRIPTION
Exhaust Valve Timing Control Learning is an operation to learn the characteristic of exhaust valve timing con-
trol magnet retarder by comparing the target angle of exhaust camshaft with the actual retarded angle of
exhaust camshaft. It must be performed each time exhaust valve timing control magnet retarder is discon-
nected or replaced, or ECM is replaced.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operation temperature.
2. Set shift lever in neutral position and confirm that following electrical or mechanical loads are not applied.
- Headlamp switch is OFF
- Air conditioner switch is OFF
- Rear defogger switch is OFF
- Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc
3. Keep the engine speed between 1,800 and 2,000 rpm.
4. Select “EXH V/T CONTROL LEARN” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
5. Touch “START” and wait 20 seconds.
6. Make sure that “CMPLT” is displayed on CONSULT-III screen.
Learning completed : CMPLT

Learning not yet : YET
Without CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operation temperature.
2. Set shift lever in neutral position and confirm that following electrical or mechanical loads are not applied.
- Headlamp switch is OFF
- Air conditioner switch is OFF
- Rear defogger switch is OFF
- Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc
3. Keep the engine speed between 1,800 and 2,000 rpm at 20 seconds.
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning INFOID:0000000004656191
DESCRIPTION
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accel-
erator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time
harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released.
2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning INFOID:0000000004656192
DESCRIPTION
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the throttle valve by
monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of
electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released.

Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound. A
Idle Air Volume Learning INFOID:0000000004656193
EC
DESCRIPTION
Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific
range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions:
• Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced. C
• Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
PREPARATION
Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied. D
Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment.
• Battery voltage: More than 12.9V (At idle)
• Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100°C (158 - 212°F) E
• Transmission range switch (A/T models): ON
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch (M/Tmodels): ON
• Electric load switch: OFF
(Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger) F
On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is
started, the headlamp will not be illuminated.
• Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position) G
• Vehicle speed: Stopped
• Transmission: Warmed-up
- For A/T models with CONSULT-III H
• Drive vehicle until “ATF TEMP SE 1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode of “A/T” system indicates less than 0.9V.
- For A/T models without CONSULT-III and M/T models
• Drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
I
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-III
1. Perform EC-76, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". J
K
4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order.
5. Select “IDLE AIR VOL LEARN” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
6. Touch “START” and wait 20 seconds. L
7. Make sure that “CMPLT” is displayed on CONSULT-III screen. If “CMPLT” is not displayed, Idle Air Vol-
ume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to
the DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE below.
M
8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the
specifications.
N
ITEM SPECIFICATION
Idle speed A/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
O
Ignition timing A/T: 16 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
Without CONSULT-III P
NOTE:
• It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
• It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit has
a malfunction.

4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order.
6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds.
7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.
a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
b. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops
blinking and turned ON.
9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MIL turned ON.
10. Start engine and let it idle.
11. Wait 20 seconds.
SEC897C
12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the
specifications.
ITEM SPECIFICATION
Idle speed A/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
Ignition timing A/T: 16 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried
out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCE-
DURE below.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
If Idle Air Volume Learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows:
1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed.
2. Check PCV valve operation.
3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage.
4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condi-
tion are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident.
It is useful to perform EC-126.
5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the
incident and perform Idle Air Volume Learning all over again:
• Engine stalls.
• Erroneous idle.
Fuel Pressure Check INFOID:0000000004656194
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE

With CONSULT-III
2. Perform “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Start engine.

4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF. A
Without CONSULT-III
1. Remove fuel pump fuse (1) located in IPDM E/R (2). EC
2. Start engine.
3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel
pressure. C
4. Turn ignition switch OFF.
5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system.
D
PBIB2206E E
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK
CAUTION:
Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger. F
NOTE:
Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel pres-
sure cannot be completely released because Z33 models do not have fuel return system.
G
Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit (J-44321) to check fuel pressure.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE".
2. Install the inline fuel quick disconnected fitting (A) between fuel H
damper (1) and fuel injector tube.
3. Connect the fuel pressure gauge (quick connector adapter
hose) (B) to the inline fuel quick disconnected fitting.
I
4. Turn ignition switch ON and check for fuel leakage.
5. Start engine and check for fuel leakage.
6. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. J
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi)

PBIB3527E
K
7. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step.
8. Check fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging.
If OK, replace “fuel filter and fuel pump assembly”.
If NG, repair or replace. L

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Trouble Diagnosis Introduction INFOID:0000000004656195
INTRODUCTION
The engine has an ECM to control major systems such as fuel con-
trol, ignition control, idle air control system, etc. The ECM accepts
input signals from sensors and instantly drives actuators. It is essen-
tial that both input and output signals are proper and stable. At the
same time, it is important that there are no malfunctions such as vac-
uum leaks, fouled spark plugs, or other malfunctions with the engine.
MEF036D
It is much more difficult to diagnose an incident that occurs intermit-

tently rather than continuously. Most intermittent incidents are
caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case,
careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replace-
ment of good parts.
SEF233G
A visual check only may not find the cause of the incidents. A road
test with CONSULT-III (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should
be performed. Follow the WORK FLOW on "WORK FLOW".
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a
customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The cus-
tomer can supply good information about such incidents, especially
intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under
what conditions they occur. A DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET like the
example on "Worksheet Sample" should be used.
Start your diagnosis by looking for conventional malfunctions first.
This will help troubleshoot driveability malfunctions on an electroni-
SEF234G
cally controlled engine vehicle.
WORK FLOW

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Overall Sequence
A
EC
PBIB3456E
P
Detailed Flow
1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM
Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurred) using the "DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET".
>> GO TO 2.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
2.CHECK DTC*1
1. Check DTC*1.
2. Perform the following procedure if DTC*1 is displayed.
- Record DTC*1 and freeze frame data*2. (Print them out with CONSULT-III or GST.)
- Erase DTC*1. (Refer to EC-46, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information".)
- Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC*1 and the symptom described by the cus-
tomer. (Symptom Matrix Chart is useful. Refer to EC-87, "Symptom Matrix Chart".)
3. Check related service bulletins for information.
Is any symptom described and any DTC detected?
Symptom is described, DTC*1 is displayed>>GO TO 3.
Symptom is described, DTC*1 is not displayed>>GO TO 4.
Symptom is not described, DTC*1 is displayed>>GO TO 5.
3.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer (except MIL ON).
DIAGNOSIS WORK SHEET is useful to verify the incident.
Connect CONSULT-III to the vehicle and check diagnosis results.
Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected.
>> GO TO 5.
4.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer.
DIAGNOSIS WORK SHEET is useful to verify the incident.
Connect CONSULT-III to the vehicle and check diagnosis results.
Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected.
>> GO TO 6.
5.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure for the displayed DTC*1, and then make sure that DTC*1 is detected
again.
If two or more DTCs*1 are detected, refer to EC-84, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" and determine trouble
diagnosis order.
NOTE:
• Freeze frame data*2 is useful if the DTC*1 is not detected.
• Perform Overall Function Check if DTC Confirmation Procedure is not included on Service Manual. This
simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC*1 cannot be detected during this check.
If the result of Overall Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC*1 by DTC Confirmation
Procedure.
Is DTC*1 detected?
Yes >> GO TO 10.
No >> Check according to EC-134.
6.PERFORM BASIC INSPECTION
Perform EC-71, "Basic Inspection".
With CONSULT-III>>GO TO 7.
Without CONSULT-III>>GO TO 9.
7.PERFORM SPEC IN DATA MONITOR MODE
With CONSULT-III
Make sure that “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “MAS A/F SE-B2”, “B/FUEL SCHDL”, and “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-
B2” are within the SP value using CONSULT-III “SPEC” in "DATA MONITOR" mode.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Refer to EC-127, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Are they within the SP value? A
Yes >> GO TO 9.
No >> GO TO 8.
8.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE EC
Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-126.

Is malfunctioning part detected? C
Yes >> GO TO 11.
No >> GO TO 9.
9.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART D
Detect malfunctioning system according to EC-87, "Symptom Matrix Chart" based on the confirmed symptom
in step 4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom.
E
>> GO TO 10.
10.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE F
Inspect according to Diagnostic Procedure of the system.
NOTE:
The Diagnostic Procedure in EC section described based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit inspection G
is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. For details, refer to Circuit Inspection in GI-
24, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident".
Is malfunctioning part detected? H
Yes >> GO TO 11.
No >> Monitor input data from related sensors or check voltage of related ECM terminals using CON-
SULT-III. Refer to EC-121, "CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor", EC-100, "ECM Termi-
nal and Reference Value". I
11.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART

1. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part. J
2. Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnostic Procedure again after repair and replace-
ment.
3. Check DTC. If DTC is displayed, erase it, refer to EC-46, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information".
K
>> GO TO 12.
12.FINAL CHECK L
When DTC was detected in step 2, perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check again,
and then make sure that the malfunction have been repaired securely.
When symptom was described from the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4, and make sure M
that the symptom is not detected.
OK or NG
NG (DTC*1 is detected)>>GO TO 10. N
NG (Symptom remains)>>GO TO 6.
OK >> 1. Before returning the vehicle to the customer, make sure to erase unnecessary DTC*1 in ECM
and TCM (Transmission Control Module). (Refer to EC-46, "Emission-related Diagnostic O
Information" and AT-37, "OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)".)
2. If the completion of SRT is needed, drive vehicle under the specific driving pattern. Refer to
EC-46, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information".
3. INSPECTION END P
*1: Include 1st trip DTC.
*2: Include 1st trip freeze frame data.
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET
Description

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
There are many operating conditions that lead to the malfunction of
engine components. A good grasp of such conditions can make trou-
bleshooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about a incident. It is
important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a cus-
tomer complaint.
Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the one on the next page in order
to organize all the information for troubleshooting.
Some conditions may cause the MIL to come on steady or blink and
DTC to be detected. Examples:
• Vehicle ran out of fuel, which caused the engine to misfire.
SEF907L
• Fuel filler cap was left off or incorrectly screwed on, allowing fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere.
Worksheet Sample
MTBL0017
DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000004656196
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority
chart.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Priority Detected items (DTC) A

1 • U1000 U1001 CAN communication line
• U1010 CAN communication
• P0101 P0102 P0103 P010B P010C P010D Mass air flow sensor
EC
• P0112 P0113 P0127 Intake air temperature sensor
• P0117 P0118 P0125 Engine coolant temperature sensor
• P0122 P0123 P0222 P0223 P0227 P0228 P1225 P1226 P1234 P1235 P1239 P2132 P2133 P2135 Throttle position
sensor C
• P0128 Thermostat function
• P0181 P0182 P0183 Fuel tank temperature sensor
• P0196 P0197 P0198 Engine oil temperature sensor
• P0327 P0328 P0332 P0333 Knock sensor D
• P0335 Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
• P0340 P0345 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
• P0460 P0461 P0462 P0463 Fuel level sensor
• P0500 Vehicle speed sensor E
• P0605 ECM
• P0643 Sensor power supply
• P0700 TCM
• P0705 P0850 Park/neutral position (PNP) switch F
• P1610 - P1615 NATS
• P2122 P2123 P2127 P2128 P2138 Accelerator pedal position sensor
2 • P0031 P0032 P0051 P0052 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater G
• P0037 P0038 P0057 P0058 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
• P0075 P0081 Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
• P0078 P0084 Exhaust valve timing control magnet retarder*
• P0130 P0131 P0132 P0133 P0150 P0151 P0152 P0153 P2A00 P2A03 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 H
• P0137 P0138 P0139 P0158 P0159 Heated oxygen sensor 2
• P0441 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring
• P0443 P0444 P0445 EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
• P0447 P0448 EVAP canister vent control valve
I
• P0451 P0452 P0453 EVAP control system pressure sensor
• P0550 Power steering pressure sensor
• P0603 ECM power supply J
• P0710 P0717 P0720 P0731 P0732 P0733 P0734 P0735 P0740 P0744 P0745 P1730 P1752 P1757 P1762 P1767
P1772 P1774 A/T related sensors, solenoid valves and switches
• P1078 P1084 Exhaust valve timing control position sensor
• P1217 Engine over temperature (OVERHEAT) K
• P1233 P2101 Electric throttle control function
• P1236 P2118 Throttle control motor
• P1290 P2103 P2103 Throttle control motor relay
• P1805 Brake switch L
3 • P0011 P0021 Intake valve timing control
• P0014 P0024 Exhaust valve timing control*
• P0171 P0172 P0174 P0175 Fuel injection system function M
• P0300 - P0306 Misfire
• P0420 P0430 Three way catalyst function
• P0442 EVAP control system (SMALL LEAK)
• P0455 EVAP control system (GROSS LEAK) N
• P0456 EVAP control system (VERY SMALL LEAK)
• P0506 P0507 Idle speed control system
• P1148 P1168 Closed loop control
• P1211 TCS control unit O
• P1212 TCS communication line
• P1238 P2119 Electric throttle control actuator
• P1421 Cold start control
• P1564 ASCD steering switch P
• P1572 ASCD brake switch
• P1574 ASCD vehicle speed sensor
• P1715 Input speed sensor
Fail-Safe Chart INFOID:0000000004656197
When the DTC listed below is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
DTC No. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode

P0102 Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
P0103
P010C
P010D
P0117 Engine coolant tempera- Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the following condition.
P0118 ture sensor circuit CONSULT-III displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.
Engine coolant temperature decided
Condition
(CONSULT-III display)
Just as ignition switch is turned ON
40°C (104°F)
or START
Approx 4 minutes or more after en-
80°C (176°F)
gine starting
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
Except as shown above
(Depends on the time)
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling
fan operates while engine is running.
P0122 Throttle position sensor The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in
P0123 order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
P0222 The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal
P0223 condition.
P0227 So, the acceleration will be poor.
P0228
P1239
P2132
P2133
P2135
P0643 Sensor power supply ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P1233 Electric throttle control ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
P2101 function fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P1236 Throttle control motor ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
P2118 fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P1238 Electric throttle control ac- (When electric throttle control actuator does not function properly due to the return spring
P2119 tuator malfunction:)
ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the
idle position. The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm.
(When throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is not in specified range:)
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20
degrees or less.
(When ECM detects the throttle valve is stuck open:)
While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, the
engine stalls.
The engine can restart in N or P (A/T), Neutral (M/T) position, and engine speed will not
exceed 1,000 rpm or more.
P1290 Throttle control motor relay
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
P2100
fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P2103
P2122 Accelerator pedal position The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in
P2123 sensor order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
P2127 The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal
P2128 condition.
P2138 So, the acceleration will be poor.
• When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting up MIL when there
is malfunction on engine control system.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected
as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by A
means of operating fail-safe function.
driver to repair the malfunction.
EC
Symptom Matrix Chart INFOID:0000000004656198 C
SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

D
SYMPTOM
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH

LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
E
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)

HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION

F
SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE

Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page G
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL
I
Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA
Fuel Fuel pump circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 EC-639
Fuel pressure regulator system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-78 J
Fuel injector circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 2 EC-634
Evaporative emission system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-31
K
Air Positive crankcase ventilation sys-
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 EC-42
tem 3 3
Incorrect idle speed adjustment 1 1 1 1 1 EC-71 L
EC-523,
Electric throttle control actuator 1 1 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
EC-539
Ignition Incorrect ignition timing adjustment 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 EC-71 M
Ignition circuit 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-645
Power supply and ground circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 EC-135
N

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYMPTOM




Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page
IDLING VIBRATION
Warranty symptom code AA ENGINE STALL
AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA
EC-186,
Mass air flow sensor circuit 2
EC-199
1
EC-216,
Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit 3 3
EC-231
EC-156,
3 EC-239,
EC-247,
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit 1 2 2 2 2 2 EC-255,
EC-263,
EC-609
EC-222,
EC-345,
Throttle position sensor circuit EC-519,
EC-521,
2 2 EC-541
EC-482,
EC-586,
Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit 3 2 1
EC-593,
EC-601
Knock sensor circuit 2 3 EC-360
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit 2 2 EC-367
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit 3 2 EC-375
Vehicle speed signal circuit 2 3 3 3 EC-465
Power steering pressure sensor circuit 2 3 3 EC-471
EC-476,
ECM 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
EC-480
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cir-
3 2 1 3 2 2 3 3 EC-172
cuit
Exhaust valve timing control magnet retarder
3 2 1 3 2 2 3 3 EC-151
circuit
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit 3 3 3 3 3 EC-488
Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit 2 3 3 4 EC-657
Electrical load signal circuit 3 EC-632
Air conditioner circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 ATC-28
VDC/TCS/ABS control unit BRC-81,
4
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) BRC-43
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
(continued on next page)

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER
A
SYMPTOM

EC


C

Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page D
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL
E
F
Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA
Fuel Fuel tank FL-10
5
Fuel piping 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-35 G
Vapor lock —
5
Valve deposit —
H
Poor fuel (Heavy weight gasoline, 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
—
Low octane)
Air Air duct EM-16 I
Air cleaner EM-16
Air leakage from air duct
(Mass air flow sensor — electric EM-16 J
5 5 5 5 5 5
throttle control actuator)
5 5 5 5
Electric throttle control actuator EM-18
Air leakage from intake manifold/ EM-18, K
Collector/Gasket EM-21
Cranking Battery SC-4
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Generator circuit SC-17 L
Starter circuit 3 SC-8
1
Signal plate 6 EM-106
M
Park/neutral position (PNP) MT-12 or
4
switch AT-98
Engine Cylinder head
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-89 N
Cylinder head gasket 4 3
Cylinder block
Piston 4 O
Piston ring
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 EM-106
Connecting rod
P
Bearing
Crankshaft

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYMPTOM




Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page
IDLING VIBRATION
Warranty symptom code AA ENGINE STALL
AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA
Valve Timing chain EM-53
mecha-
Camshaft EM-72
nism
Intake valve timing control EM-53
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Exhaust valve timing control EM-53
Intake valve
3 EM-89
Exhaust valve
Exhaust Exhaust manifold/Tube/Muffler/
Gasket EM-23, EX-
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
3
Three way catalyst
Lubrica- Oil pan/Oil strainer/Oil pump/Oil EM-27, LU-
tion filter/Oil gallery 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 9, LU-8
Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil LU-5
Cooling CO-12,
Radiator/Hose/Radiator filler cap
CO-16
Thermostat 5 CO-25
Water pump CO-22
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 5
Water gallery CO-27
Cooling fan 5 CO-20
Coolant level (Low)/Contaminat-
CO-9
ed coolant
NVIS (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System — EC-44 or
1 1
NATS) BL-134
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000004656199
EC
PBIB3474E
L
1. IPDM E/R 2. Mass air flow sensor (with intake air 3. Refrigerant pressure sensor
temperature sensor) (bank 1)
4. Cooling fan motor-2 5. Intake valve timing control solenoid 6. Exhaust valve timing control magnet M
valve retarder
7. Cooling fan motor-1 8. Mass air flow sensor (with intake air 9. Ignition coil (with power transistor)
temperature sensor) (bank 2) and spark plug (bank 2)
10. Electric throttle control actuator 11. A/F sensor 1 (bank 2) 12. Exhaust valve timing control position N
(bank 2) sensor
13. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) 14. Fuel injector (bank 2) 15. Engine coolant temperature sensor
16. Knock sensor 17. EVAP canister purge volume control 18. Fuel injector (bank 1) O
solenoid valve
19. Ignition coil (with power transistor) 20. EVAP service port 21. A/F sensor 1 (bank 1)
and spark plug (bank 1) P
22. Crankshaft position sensor (POS) 23. Electric throttle control actuator
(bank 1)

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
PBIB3501E
1. Mass air flow sensor (with intake air 2. Mass air flow sensor (with intake air
temperature sensor) (bank 1) temperature sensor) (bank 2)
PBIB3504E
1. Electric throttle control actuator 2. Electric throttle control actuator

(bank 1) (bank 2)
PBIB3508E
1. Exhaust valve timing control magnet 2. Intake valve timing control solenoid 3. Intake valve timing control solenoid
retarder (bank 1) harness connector valve (bank 1) harness connector valve (bank 2) harness connector
4. Exhaust valve timing control magnet
retarder (bank 2) harness connector
PBIB3518E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Exhaust valve timing control position 2. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) 3. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) A
sensor (bank 1) (bank 1) (bank 2)
4. Exhaust valve timing control position
sensor (bank 2)
EC
E
PBIB3520E
1. Ignition coil No.5 (with power transis- 2. Ignition coil No.3 (with power transis- 3. Ignition coil No.1 (with power transis-
tor) tor) tor) F
4. Condenser 5. Fuel injector No.3 6. Fuel injector No.1
7. Fuel injector No.2 8. Fuel injector No.4 9. Ignition coil No.2 (with power transis-
tor) G
10. Ignition coil No.4 (with power transis- 11. ignition coil No.6 (with power transis- 12. Fuel injector No.6
tor) tor)
13. Fuel injector No.5 14. Knock sensor (bank 1) 15. Knock sensor (bank 2) H
K
PBIB3521E
1. Engine coolant temperature sensor 2. A/F sensor 1 (bank 1) 3. Crankshaft position sensor L
: Vehicle front
PBIB3509E
P
1. Cooling fan motor-1 2. Cooling fan motor-2
: Vehicle front

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
PBIB3510E
1. Refrigerant pressure sensor harness 2. IPDM E/R

connector
PBIB3522E
1. Power steering pressure sensor 2. Alternator 3. Engine oil temperature sensor

: Vehicle front
PBIB3475E
1. EVAP service port 2. EVAP canister purge volume control 3. EVAP canister vent control valve
solenoid valve
4. EVAP control system pressure sen- 5. EVAP canister
sor
: Vehicle front
PBIB3495E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump 2. Fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump 3. Fuel pressure regurator A
harness connector
4. Fuel tank temperature sensor
: Vehicle front
EC
G
PBIB1907E
PBIB3516E
K
1. A/F sensor 1 (bank 1) harness con- 2. A/F sensor 1 (bank 2) harness con-
nector nector L
: Vehicle front
PBIB3517E
P
1. A/F sensor 1 (bank 1) 2. A/F sensor 1 (bank 2)
: Vehicle front

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
PBIB3502E
1. Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2) 2. Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2) 3. Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1)
harness connector
4. Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1)
harness connector
: Vehicle front
PBIB3496E
1. Accelerator pedal 2. Accelerator pedal position sensor 3. ECM

4. ECM harness connector
PBIB3498E
1. Stop lamp switch 2. ASCD brake switch 3. Brake pedal

4. ASCD clutch switch 5. Clutch pedal
PBIB3497E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. ASCD steering switch 2. RESUME/ACCELERATE switch 3. SET/COAST switch A

4. CANCEL switch 5. MAIN switch
Vacuum Hose Drawing INFOID:0000000004656200

EC
PBIB3515E K
1. Intake manifold collector 2. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
Refer to EC-22, "Schematic" for Vacuum Control System. L

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Circuit Diagram INFOID:0000000004656201
TBWT1612E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC
TBWT1613E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout INFOID:0000000004656202
PBIB3537E
ECM Terminal and Reference Value INFOID:0000000004656203
PREPARATION
ECM (1) is located behind the passenger side instrument lower
panel. For this inspection, remove passenger side instrument lower
panel.
2 : ECM harness connector
PBIB3499E
ECM INSPECTION TABLE

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
MI- WIRE
ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
NAL COLOR
NO.
2.9 - 8.8V
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
A/F sensor 1 heater
1 W/R • Idle speed
(bank 1)
(More than 140 seconds after starting en-
gine)
PBIB3538E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TER-
MI- WIRE A
NAL COLOR
NO.
0 - 14V EC
[Ignition switch: ON]

• Engine stopped
• Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) C
• Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
Throttle control motor PBIB3539E D

2 G
(Open) (bank 1)
0 - 14V
[Ignition switch: ON] E

• Engine stopped
• Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T)
• Accelerator pedal: Fully released
F
PBIB3540E
Throttle control motor relay BATTERY VOLTAGE

3 R/W
power supply (bank 1)
(11 - 14V)
G
0 - 14V
[Ignition switch: ON] H

• Engine stopped
Throttle control motor
4 BR • Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T)
(Close) (bank 1)
• Accelerator pedal: In the middle of releasing
operation I
PBIB3541E
2.9 - 8.8 J
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
5 GY/L • Idle speed K
(bank 2)
gine)
PBIB3538E L
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
• Idle speed M
7 - 12V
Exhaust valve timing control
6 L/OR [Engine is running] N
magnet retarder (bank 1)
• Around 2,500 rpm while the engine speed is
rising
O
PBIB3542E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
• Idle speed
7 - 12V
7 Y/R [Engine is running]
rising
PBIB3542E
[Engine is running]
8 B/P ECM ground Body ground
• Idle speed
0 - 0.2V
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at
11 GY Ignition signal No. 4 idle.
12 LG/R Ignition signal No. 3
15 PU Ignition signal No. 5 PBIB3543E
16 G/B Ignition signal No. 2

0.1 - 0.4V
19 L/R Ignition signal No. 6
20 Y/B Ignition signal No. 1
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: 2,000 rpm
PBIB3544E
0 - 14V
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the fol-
lowing conditions are met.
- Engine: After warming up
- Keeping the engine speed between 3,500
Heated oxygen sensor 2 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1
17 P
heater (bank 1) minute under no load.
PBIB3545E

• Engine stopped BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Engine is running] (11 - 14V)
• Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
• Idle speed
7 - 12V
Intake valve timing control
18 W/G
solenoid valve (bank 1) [Engine is running]
PBIB3546E

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TER-
MI- WIRE A
NAL COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE EC
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed C
• Accelerator pedal: Not depressed even
slightly, after engine starting.
D
PBIB3547E
EVAP canister purge volume
21 GY/R
control solenoid valve BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V) E
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: About 2,000 rpm (More than
100 seconds after starting engine) F
PBIB3548E G
• For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON 0 - 1.5V
[Engine is running] H
22 L/W Fuel pump relay
BATTERY VOLTAGE
• More than 1 second after turning ignition
(11 - 14V)
switch ON.
I
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
0 - 1.5V
• For a few seconds after turning ignition
ECM relay switch OFF J
24 BR/Y
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
• More than a few seconds after turning igni-
(11 - 14V)
tion switch OFF K
BATTERY VOLTAGE
25 OR Throttle control motor relay (11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: ON] 0 - 1.0V L
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
• Idle speed
M
7 - 12V
29 G/W
solenoid valve (bank 2) [Engine is running] N
O
PBIB3546E

• Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
P
Throttle position sensor 1 • Accelerator pedal: Fully released
30 Y
(bank 1) [Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
• Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
31 L/G
• Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
0 - 14V
[Engine is running]
33 PU/W
PBIB3545E

• Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
34 L
• Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
• Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
35 L/Y
• Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
4.0 - 5.0V
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
NOTE:
idle.
Crankshaft position sensor PBIB3549E

37 LG/B
(POS)
4.0 - 5.0V
[Engine is running]
PBIB3550E
Sensor ground [Engine is running]

40 R [Throttle position sensor • Warm-up condition 0V
(bank 1)] • Idle speed

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TER-
MI- WIRE A
NAL COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply EC
43 OR/L [Throttle position sensor [Ignition switch: ON] 5V
(bank 2)]
Sensor power supply
44 B [Throttle position sensor [Ignition switch: ON] 5V
C
(bank 1)]
Sensor power supply
46 R/B [Crankshaft position sensor [Ignition switch: ON] 5V D
(POS)]
47 Y/G [Crankshaft position sensor • Warm-up condition 0V E
(POS)] • Idle speed
48 W/L [Throttle position sensor • Warm-up condition 0V
F
0 - 14V
[Ignition switch: ON] G

• Engine stopped
49 L/B • Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T)
(Close) (bank 2)
operation H
PBIB3541E
0 - 14V I

• Engine stopped J
Throttle control motor PBIB3539E K

50 PU/W
(Open) (bank 2)
0 - 14V
[Ignition switch: ON] L

• Engine stopped
M
PBIB3540E
Throttle control motor relay BATTERY VOLTAGE N

52 R/W [Ignition switch: ON]
power supply (bank 2) (11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: OFF] 0V
53 P/L Ignition switch BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Ignition switch: ON] O
(11 - 14V)
57 L A/F sensor 1 (bank 1) [Ignition switch: ON] 2.2V
P

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
4.0 - 5.0V
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
NOTE:
idle.
Exhaust valve timing control PBIB3551E

58 Y/G
position sensor (bank 1)
4.0 - 5.0V
[Engine is running]
PBIB3552E
3.0 - 5.0V
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
NOTE:
idle.
PBIB3553E
Camshaft position sensor
59 BR/Y
(PHASE) (bank 1)
3.0 - 5.0V
[Engine is running]
PBIB3554E
Sensor power supply

[Camshaft position sensor
(PHASE) (bank 1), Exhaust
60 R/L [Ignition switch: ON] 5V
valve timing control position
sensor (bank 1), Power
steering pressure sensor]
[Ignition switch: ON] 1.8V
61 R A/F sensor 1 (bank 1) • Warm-up condition Output voltage varies with air fuel
• Engine speed: 2,000 rpm ratio.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TER-
MI- WIRE A
NAL COLOR
NO.
4.0 - 5.0V EC
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
NOTE: C
idle.
Exhaust valve timing control PBIB3551E D

62 B/Y
4.0 - 5.0V
E
[Engine is running]
F
PBIB3552E
3.0 - 5.0V G
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
NOTE: H
idle.
63 SB
Camshaft position sensor PBIB3553E
I
(PHASE) (bank 2)
1.0 - 4.0V
J
[Engine is running]
K
PBIB3554E
Sensor power supply

[Camshaft position sensor L
64 W/G (PHASE) (bank 2), Exhaust [Ignition switch: ON] 5V
sensor (bank 2)]
M
65 PU A/F sensor 1 (bank 2) [Ignition switch: ON] 2.2V
66 LG A/F sensor 1 (bank 2) • Warm-up condition Output voltage varies with air fuel
N
0 - 4.8V
Intake air temperature sen-
67 W/L [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with intake
sor (bank 1) O
air temperature.
Sensor ground
[Engine is running]
[Mass air flow sensor
68 B • Warm-up condition 0V
(bank1), Intake air tempera- P
• Idle speed
ture sensor (bank 1)]
[Engine is running]
69 W Knock sensor (bank 2)
• Idle speed 2.5V*
0 - 4.8V
Engine coolant temperature
71 Y/B [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with engine
sensor
coolant temperature.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
72 — [Knock sensor (bank 1), • Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
Knock sensor (bank 2)] • Idle speed
[Engine is running]
73 W Knock sensor (bank 1)
• Idle speed 2.5V*
[Engine is running]
• Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quick-
ly after the following conditions are met.
Heated oxygen sensor 2
76 W/R - Engine: After warming up 0 - 1.0V
(bank 1)
and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1
minute under no load.
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition 0.8 - 1.1V
• Idle speed
77 L/W Mass air flow sensor (bank1)
[Engine is running]
0 - 4.8V
Engine oil temperature sen-
78 G/W [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with engine
sor
oil temperature.
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
79 GY/R Mass air flow sensor (bank2)
[Engine is running]
[Engine is running]
80 R/Y - Engine: After warming up 0 - 1.0V
(bank 2)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
NOTE:
81 R/B Fuel injector No. 3 idle.
82 L/R Fuel injector No. 6
PBIB3555E
85 BR Fuel injector No. 2
86 W/B Fuel injector No. 5 BATTERY VOLTAGE
89 G/Y Fuel injector No. 1
(11 - 14V)
90 Y/R Fuel injector No. 4
[Engine is running]
PBIB3556E
0 - 4.8V
Intake air temperature sen-
83 G [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with intake
sor (bank 2)
air temperature.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TER-
MI- WIRE A
NAL COLOR
NO.
Sensor ground EC
(Heated oxygen sensor 2, [Engine is running]
84 G Engine coolant temperature • Warm-up condition 0V
sensor, Engine oil tempera- • Idle speed
ture sensor) C
[Engine is running]
0.5 - 4.5V
Power steering pressure • Steering wheel: Being turned
87 Y
sensor [Engine is running] D
0.4 - 0.8V
• Steering wheel: Not being turned
Sensor ground
[Exhaust valve timing con- [Engine is running] E
88 LG/B trol position sensor (bank 1), • Warm-up condition 0V
Exhaust valve timing control • Idle speed
position sensor (bank 2)]
F
92 B/P [Camshaft position sensor • Warm-up condition 0V
(PHASE) (bank 2)] • Idle speed
Power supply for ECM BATTERY VOLTAGE G
93 P [Ignition switch: OFF]
(Back-up) (11 - 14V)
94 L/Y [Mass air flow sensor (bank • Warm-up condition 0V H
2)] • Idle speed
Sensor ground
[Engine is running]
96 P/L • Warm-up condition 0V I
(PHASE) (bank 1), Power
• Idle speed
• Engine stopped 0.5 - 1.0V J
Accelerator pedal position • Accelerator pedal: Fully released
97 R
sensor 1 [Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped 3.9 - 4.7V K
• Engine stopped 1.95 - 2.40V L
98 SB
• Engine stopped 2.0 - 2.5V
• Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed M
Sensor power supply
99 L (Accelerator pedal position [Ignition switch: ON] 5V
sensor 1) N
100 W (Accelerator pedal position • Warm-up condition 0V
sensor 1) • Idle speed O
4V
• ASCD steering switch: OFF
[Ignition switch: ON] P
0V
• MAIN switch: Pressed
101 G/Y ASCD steering switch 1V
• CANCEL switch: Pressed
3V
• RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Pressed
2V
• SET/COAST switch: Pressed

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
EVAP control system pres-
102 LG [Ignition switch: ON] 1.8 - 4.8V
sure sensor
Sensor power supply
103 G (Accelerator pedal position [Ignition switch: ON] 5V
sensor 2)
104 GY (Accelerator pedal position • Warm-up condition 0V
sensor 2) • Idle speed
[Engine is running]
105 L Refrigerant pressure sensor 1.0 - 4.0V
• Both A/C switch and blower switch: ON
(Compressor operates.)
0 - 4.8V
Fuel tank temperature sen-
106 W [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with fuel
sor
tank temperature.
Sensor power supply
107 BR (EVAP control system pres- [Ignition switch: ON] 5V
sure sensor)
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
108 B/Y • Warm-up condition 0V
(ASCD steering switch)
• Idle speed
Transmission range BATTERY VOLTAGE
• Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) posi-
switch(A/T) (11 - 14V)
109 BR tion
Park/neutral position
switch(M/T) [Ignition switch: ON]
0V
• Shift lever: Except above position
1V
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm
at idle
PBIB3557E
110 Y Engine speed output signal
1V
[Engine is running]
PBIB3558E
Sensor power supply

111 OR (Refrigerant pressure sen- [Ignition switch: ON] 5V
sor)
112 PU (EVAP control system pres- • Warm-up condition 0V
sure sensor) • Idle speed
113 P CAN communication line — —
114 L CAN communication line — —
116 W (Refrigerant pressure sen- • Warm-up condition 0V
sor) • Idle speed

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TER-
MI- WIRE A
NAL COLOR
NO.
[Ignition switch: ON] EC
117 PU Data link connector 5V - Battery voltage (11 - 14V)
• GST: Disconnected
EVAP canister vent control BATTERY VOLTAGE
121 LG [Ignition switch: ON]
valve (11 - 14V)
C
0V
• Brake pedal: Fully released
122 P/L Stop lamp switch
[Ignition switch: OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE D
• Brake pedal: Slightly depressed (11 - 14V)
123 B/W [Engine is running]
ECM ground Body ground
124 B/R • Idle speed
E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
125 R Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch: ON]
(11 - 14V)
• Brake pedal: Slightly depressed (A/T)
F
0V
• Brake pedal and/or clutch pedal: Slightly de-
pressed (M/T)
126 L/OR ASCD brake switch
• Brake pedal: Fully released (A/T) BATTERY VOLTAGE
• Brake pedal and clutch pedal: Fully released (11 - 14V)
(M/T)
H
127 B [Engine is running]
128 B • Idle speed
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) I
*: This may vary depending on internal resistance of the tester.
CONSULT-III Function (ENGINE) INFOID:0000000004656204

J
FUNCTION
Diagnostic test mode Function K

This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following the in-
Work support
dications on the CONSULT-III unit.
L
Self-diagnostic results such as 1st trip DTC, DTCs and 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data
Self-diagnostic results
can be read and erased quickly.*
Data monitor Input/Output data in the ECM can be read.
M
Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-III drives some actuators apart from the ECMs and also shifts
Active test
some parameters in a specified range.
Function test This mode is used to inform customers when their vehicle condition requires periodic maintenance.
N
DTC & SRT confirmation The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/result can be confirmed.
ECU part number ECM part number can be read.
*: The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased. O
• Diagnostic trouble codes
• 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
• Freeze frame data P
• 1st trip freeze frame data
• System readiness test (SRT) codes
• Test values
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL SYSTEMS APPLICATION

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE

SELF-DIAGNOSTIC DTC & SRT
RESULTS CONFIRMATION
Item DATA
WORK ACTIVE DTC
FREEZE MONI-
SUPPORT TEST SRT STA- WORK
DTC*1 FRAME TOR
TUS SUP-
DATA*2 PORT
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) × × ×
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) × × ×
Mass air flow sensor × ×
Engine coolant temperature sensor × × × ×
Engine oil temperature sensor ×
Air Fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 × × × ×
Heated oxygen sensor 2 × × × ×
Vehicle speed sensor × × ×
Accelerator pedal position sensor × ×
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS
Throttle position sensor × × ×

Fuel tank temperature sensor × × ×
EVAP control system pressure sensor × ×
Intake air temperature sensor × × ×
Knock sensor ×
INPUT
Refrigerant pressure sensor ×

Closed throttle position switch (accel-
×
erator pedal position sensor signal)
Air conditioner switch ×
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch × ×
Stop lamp switch × ×
Power steering pressure sensor × ×
Battery voltage ×
Load signal ×
× ×
sensor
Fuel level sensor × ×
ASCD steering switch × ×
ASCD brake switch × ×
ASCD clutch switch × ×

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
A
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC DTC & SRT
RESULTS CONFIRMATION
Item DATA
WORK ACTIVE DTC
FREEZE MONI-
SUPPORT TEST SRT STA- WORK EC
DTC*1 FRAME TOR
TUS SUP-
DATA*2 PORT
Fuel injector × × C
Power transistor (Ignition timing) × ×
Throttle control motor relay × ×
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS
D
Throttle control motor ×
EVAP canister purge volume control
× × × ×
solenoid valve
E
Air conditioner relay ×
Fuel pump relay × × ×
OUTPUT
Cooling fan relay × × × F

Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater × × ×* 3
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater × × ×*3

G
EVAP canister vent control valve × × × ×
× × ×
valve H
× × × ×
retarder
Calculated load value × × I
X: Applicable
*1: This item includes 1st trip DTCs.
*2: This mode includes 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data. The items appear on CONSULT-III screen in freeze frame data J
mode only if a 1st trip DTC or DTC is detected. For details, refer to "Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data".
*3: Always “CMPLT” is displayed.
INSPECTION PROCEDURE K
Refer to GI-33.
WORK SUPPORT MODE L
Work Item
WORK ITEM CONDITION USAGE M

FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE • FUEL PUMP WILL STOP BY TOUCHING START DUR- When releasing fuel pressure from
ING IDLING. fuel line
CRANK A FEW TIMES AFTER ENGINE STALLS.
N
IDLE AIR VOL LEARN • THE IDLE AIR VOLUME THAT KEEPS THE ENGINE When learning the idle air volume
WITHIN THE SPECIFIED RANGE IS MEMORIZED IN
ECM.
O
SELF-LEARNING CONT • THE COEFFICIENT OF SELF-LEARNING CONTROL When clearing the coefficient of
MIXTURE RATIO RETURNS TO THE ORIGINAL COEF- self-learning control value
FICIENT.
P

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
WORK ITEM CONDITION USAGE
EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE CLOSE THE EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE IN When detecting EVAP vapor leak
ORDER TO MAKE EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE UNDER THE point of EVAP system
FOLLOWING CONDITIONS.
• IGN SW ON
• ENGINE NOT RUNNING
• AMBIENT TEMPERATURE IS ABOVE 0°C (32°F).
• NO VACUUM AND NO HIGH PRESSURE IN EVAP SYS-
TEM
• FUEL TANK TEMP. IS MORE THAN 0°C (32°F).
• WITHIN 10 MINUTES AFTER STARTING EVAP SYSTEM
CLOSE
• WHEN TRYING TO EXECUTE EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE
UNDER THE CONDITION EXCEPT ABOVE, CONSULT-
III WILL DISCONTINUE IT AND DISPLAY APPROPRI-
ATE INSTRUCTION.
NOTE:
WHEN STARTING ENGINE, CONSULT-III MAY DIS-
PLAY “BATTERY VOLTAGE IS LOW. CHARGE BAT-
TERY”, EVEN IN USING CHARGED BATTERY.
VIN REGISTRATION • IN THIS MODE, VIN IS REGISTERED IN ECM. When registering VIN in ECM
EXH V/T CONTROL LEARN • IN THIS MODE, OPERATION TO LEARN EXHAUST When learning the exhaust valve
VALVE TIMING CONTROL MAGNET RETARDER CHAR- timing control
ACTERISTIC.
TARGET IDLE RPM ADJ* • IDLE CONDITION When setting target idle speed
TARGET IGN TIM ADJ* • IDLE CONDITION When adjusting target ignition tim-
ing
*: This function is not necessary in the usual service procedure.
SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE

Self Diagnostic Item
Regarding items of DTC and 1st trip DTC, refer to EC-46, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information".)
Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
Freeze frame data

Description
item*
DIAG TROUBLE
• The engine control component part/control system has a trouble code, it is displayed as PXXXX. (Refer to
CODE
EC-9.)
[PXXXX]
FUEL SYS-B1 • “Fuel injection system status” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
• One mode in the following is displayed.
Mode2: Open loop due to detected system malfunction
FUEL SYS-B2 Mode3: Open loop due to driving conditions (power enrichment, deceleration enleanment)
Mode4: Closed loop - using oxygen sensor(s) as feedback for fuel control
Mode5: Open loop - has not yet satisfied condition to go to closed loop
CAL/LD VALUE [%] • The calculated load value at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
COOLANT TEMP
• The engine coolant temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[°C] or [°F]
L-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] • “Long-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
• The long-term fuel trim indicates much more gradual feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule than
L-FUEL TRM-B2 [%] short-term fuel trim.
S-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] • “Short-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
• The short-term fuel trim indicates dynamic or instantaneous feedback compensation to the base fuel sched-
S-FUEL TRM-B2 [%] ule.
ENGINE SPEED [rpm] • The engine speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
VEHICL SPEED
• The vehicle speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[km/h] or [mph]
ABSOL TH-P/S [%] • The throttle valve operating angle at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Freeze frame data
Description
item* A
B/FUEL SCHDL
• The base fuel schedule at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[msec]
INT/A TEMP SE EC
• The intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[°C] or [°F]
INT MANI PRES [°] • Always a certain value is displayed.
FTFMCH1 • These items are not efficient for Z33 models. C
*: This item is the same as that of 1st trip freeze frame data.
DATA MONITOR MODE D

Monitored Item
×: Applicable
Monitored item Unit Description Remarks E
• Accuracy becomes poor if engine speed
• Indicates the engine speed computed from the drops below the idle rpm.
ENG SPEED rpm signal of the crankshaft position sensor (POS) • If the signal is interrupted while the engine F
and camshaft position sensor (PHASE). is running, an abnormal value may be in-
dicated.
MAS A/F SE-B1 • The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor is • When the engine is stopped, a certain val- G
V
MAS A/F SE-B2 displayed. ue is indicated.
• Base fuel schedule indicates the fuel injection

B/FUEL SCHDL msec pulse width programmed into ECM, prior to any H
learned on board correction.
A/F ALPHA-B1 • When the engine is stopped, a certain val-
• The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feedback ue is indicated.
% I
A/F ALPHA-B2 correction factor per cycle is indicated. • This data also includes the data for the
air-fuel ratio learning control.
• When the engine coolant temperature
• The engine coolant temperature (determined by sensor is open or short-circuited, ECM J
COOLAN TEMP/S °C or °F the signal voltage of the engine coolant temper- enters fail-safe mode. The engine coolant
ature sensor) is displayed. temperature determined by the ECM is
displayed.
K
A/F SEN1 (B1) • The A/F signal computed from the input signal of
V
A/F SEN1 (B2) the A/F sensor 1 is displayed.
HO2S2 (B1) • The signal voltage of the heated oxygen sensor

L
V
HO2S2 (B2) 2 is displayed.
HO2S2 MNTR • Display of heated oxygen sensor 2 signal:

(B1) RICH: means the amount of oxygen after three M
• When the engine is stopped, a certain val-
RICH/LEAN way catalyst is relatively small.
HO2S2 MNTR ue is indicated.
LEAN: means the amount of oxygen after three
(B2) way catalyst is relatively large.
N
• The vehicle speed computed from the vehicle
VHCL SPEED SE km/h or mph speed signal sent from combination meter is dis-
played.
O
BATTERY VOLT V • The power supply voltage of ECM is displayed.
ACCEL SEN 1 • ACCEL SEN 2 signal is converted by
• The accelerator pedal position sensor signal
V ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM
ACCEL SEN 2 voltage is displayed. P
terminal voltage signal.
TP SEN 1-B1 • TP SEN 2-B1 signal is converted by ECM
• The throttle position sensor signal voltage is dis-
V internally. Thus, it differs from ECM termi-
TP SEN 2-B1 played.
nal voltage signal.
• The fuel temperature (determined by the signal
FUEL T/TMP SE °C or °F voltage of the fuel tank temperature sensor) is
displayed.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Monitored item Unit Description Remarks
• The intake air temperature (determined by the
INT/A TEMP SE °C or °F signal voltage of the intake air temperature sen-
sor) is indicated.
• The signal voltage of EVAP control system pres-
EVAP SYS PRES V
sure sensor is displayed.
• The signal voltage of the fuel level sensor is dis-
FUEL LEVEL SE V
played.
• Indicates start signal status [ON/OFF] computed
• After starting the engine, “OFF” is dis-
START SIGNAL ON/OFF by the ECM according to the signals of engine
played regardless of the starter signal.
speed and battery voltage.
• Indicates idle position [ON/OFF] computed by
CLSD THL POS ON/OFF ECM according to the accelerator pedal position
sensor signal.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the air condi-
AIR COND SIG ON/OFF tioner switch as determined by the air conditioner
signal.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the park/neu-
P/N POSI SW ON/OFF
tral position (PNP) switch signal.
• [ON/OFF] condition of the power steering sys-
tem (determined by the signal voltage of the
PW/ST SIGNAL ON/OFF
power steering pressure sensor signal) is indi-
cated.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the electrical
load signal.
ON: Rear window defogger switch is ON and/or
LOAD SIGNAL ON/OFF
lighting switch is in 2nd position.
OFF: Both rear window defogger switch and
lighting switch are OFF.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ignition
IGNITION SW ON/OFF
switch signal.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from heater fan
HEATER FAN SW ON/OFF
switch signal.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the stop lamp
BRAKE SW ON/OFF
switch signal.
INJ PULSE-B1 • Indicates the actual fuel injection pulse width
• When the engine is stopped, a certain
msec compensated by ECM according to the input sig-
INJ PULSE-B2 computed value is indicated.
nals.
• Indicates the ignition timing computed by ECM • When the engine is stopped, a certain val-
IGN TIMING BTDC
according to the input signals. ue is indicated.
• “Calculated load value” indicates the value of the
CAL/LD VALUE %
current air flow divided by peak air flow.
• Indicates the mass air flow computed by ECM
MASS AIRFLOW g·m/s according to the signal voltage of the mass air
flow sensor.
• Indicates the EVAP canister purge volume con-
trol solenoid valve control value computed by the
PURG VOL C/V % ECM according to the input signals.
• The opening becomes larger as the value in-
creases.
INT/V TIM (B1) • Indicates [°CA] of intake camshaft advanced an-
°CA
INT/V TIM (B2) gle.
EXH/V TIM B1 • Indicates [°CA] of exhaust camshaft retarded an-

°CA
EXH/V TIM B2 gle.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
INT/V SOL (B1) • The control value of the intake valve timing con-
trol solenoid valve (determined by ECM accord-
% ing to the input signals) is indicated.
INT/V SOL (B2) • The advance angle becomes larger as the value EC
increases.
VTC DTY EX B1 • The control value of the exhaust valve timing
control magnet retarder (determined by ECM ac-
% cording to the input signals) is indicated.
C
VTC DTY EX B2 • The retard angle becomes larger as the value in-
creases.
TP SEN 1-B2 • TP SEN 2-B2 signal is converted by ECM D
• The throttle position sensor signal voltage is dis-
V internally. Thus, it differs from ECM termi-
TP SEN 2-B2 played.
nal voltage signal.
• The air conditioner relay control condition (deter- E
AIR COND RLY ON/OFF mined by ECM according to the input signals) is
indicated.
• Indicates the fuel pump relay control condition
FUEL PUMP RLY ON/OFF determined by ECM according to the input sig-
F
nals.
• The control condition of the EVAP canister vent
control valve (determined by ECM according to G
VENT CONT/V ON/OFF the input signals) is indicated.
ON: Closed
OFF: Open
H
• Indicates the throttle control motor relay control
THRTL RELAY ON/OFF condition determined by the ECM according to
the input signals.
I
• The control condition of the cooling fan (deter-
mined by ECM according to the input signals) is
indicated.
COOLING FAN HI/LOW/OFF
HI: High speed operation J
LOW: Low speed operation
OFF: Stop
HO2S2 HTR (B1) • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of heated oxygen
ON/OFF sensor 2 heater determined by ECM according
K
HO2S2 HTR (B2) to the input signals.
• Indicates the engine speed computed from the
I/P PULLY SPD rpm L
Input speed sensor signal.
VEHICLE SPEED km/h or mph
speed signal sent from TCM is displayed.
• Display the condition of idle air volume learning M
YET: Idle Air Volume Learning has not been per-
IDL A/V LEARN YET/CMPLT formed yet.
CMPLT: Idle Air Volume Learning has already
N
been performed successfully.
TRVL AFTER MIL km or mile • Distance traveled while MIL is activated.
• The engine oil temperature (determined by the O
ENG OIL TEMP °C or °F signal voltage of the engine oil temperature sen-
sor) is displayed.
A/F S1 HTR (B1) • A/F sensor 1 heater control value computed by
ECM according to the input signals. P
%
A/F S1 HTR (B2) • The current flow to the heater becomes larger as
the value increases.
• The signal voltage from the refrigerant pressure
AC PRESS SEN V
sensor is displayed.
VHCL SPEED SE km/h or mph
speed signal sent from TCM is displayed.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SET VHCL SPD km/h or mph • The preset vehicle speed is displayed.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from MAIN switch
MAIN SW ON/OFF
signal.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from CANCEL
CANCEL SW ON/OFF
switch signal.
RESUME/ACC • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from RESUME/
ON/OFF
SW ACCELERATE switch signal.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from SET/COAST
SET SW ON/OFF
switch signal.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ASCD brake
BRAKE SW1 ON/OFF
switch signal.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of stop lamp
BRAKE SW2 ON/OFF
switch signal.
• Indicates the vehicle cruise condition.
NON: Vehicle speed is maintained at the ASCD
set speed.
VHCL SPD CUT NON/CUT
CUT: Vehicle speed increased to excessively
high compared with the ASCD set speed, and
ASCD operation is cut off.
• Indicates the vehicle cruise condition.
NON: Vehicle speed is maintained at the ASCD
set speed.
LO SPEED CUT NON/CUT
CUT: Vehicle speed decreased to excessively
low compared with the ASCD set speed, and
ASCD operation is cut off.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D accord- • For M/T models, always “OFF” is dis-
AT OD MONITOR ON/OFF
ing to the input signal from the TCM. played.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D cancel • For M/T models, always “OFF” is dis-
AT OD CANCEL ON/OFF
signal sent from the TCM. played.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of CRUISE lamp
CRUISE LAMP ON/OFF determined by the ECM according to the input
signals.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of SET lamp deter-
SET LAMP ON/OFF
mined by the ECM according to the input signals.
• Display the condition of Exhaust Valve Timing
Control Learning.
YET: Exhaust Valve Timing Control Learning has
EXH V/T LEARN YET/CMPLT
not been performed yet.
CMPLT: Exhaust Valve Timing Control Learning
has already been performed successfully.
A/F ADJ-B1 • Indicates the correction factor stored in ECM.
The factor is calculated from the difference be-
— tween the target air-fuel ratio stored in ECM and
A/F ADJ-B2 the air-fuel ratio calculated from A/F sensor 1
signal.
NOTE:
Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.
ACTIVE TEST MODE

Test Item

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TEST ITEM CONDITION JUDGEMENT CHECK ITEM (REMEDY) A

• Engine: Return to the original
• Harness and connectors
FUEL INJEC- trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see
• Fuel injector
TION • Change the amount of fuel injec- CHECK ITEM.
• Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 EC
tion using CONSULT-III.
trouble condition
IGNITION TIM- If trouble symptom disappears, see C
• Timing light: Set • Perform Idle Air Volume Learning.
ING CHECK ITEM.
• Retard the ignition timing using
CONSULT-III.
• Engine: After warming up, idle the D
engine.
• Compression
• A/C switch OFF
POWER BAL- • Fuel injector
• Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral Engine runs rough or dies.
ANCE • Power transistor E
(M/T)
• Spark plug
• Cut off each fuel injector signal
• Ignition coil
one at a time using CONSULT-III.
• Ignition switch: ON • Harness and connectors F
COOLING FAN* • Turn the cooling fan “HI”, “LOW” Cooling fan moves and stops. • Cooling fan motor
and “OFF” using CONSULT-III. • IPDM E/R
• Engine: Return to the original • Harness and connectors
ENG COOLANT trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see • Engine coolant temperature sen-
G
TEMP • Change the engine coolant tem- CHECK ITEM. sor
perature using CONSULT-III. • Fuel injector
• Ignition switch: ON H
(Engine stopped)
FUEL PUMP RE- Fuel pump relay makes the operat- • Harness and connectors
• Turn the fuel pump relay “ON”
LAY ing sound. • Fuel pump relay
and “OFF” using CONSULT-III
and listen to operating sound. I
• Engine: After warming up, run en-
gine at 1,500 rpm.
PURG VOL • Change the EVAP canister purge Engine speed changes according to • Harness and connectors J
CONT/V volume control solenoid valve the opening percent. • Solenoid valve
opening percent using CON-
SULT-III.
K
FUEL/T TEMP
• Change the fuel tank temperature using CONSULT-III.
SEN
• Ignition switch: ON
L
(Engine stopped)
VENT CON- Solenoid valve makes an operating • Harness and connectors
• Turn solenoid valve “ON” and
TROL/V sound. • Solenoid valve
“OFF” with the CONSULT-III and
listen to operating sound. M
INT V/T ASSIGN trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see
• Intake valve timing control sole-
ANGLE • Change intake valve timing using CHECK ITEM.
noid valve N
CONSULT-III.
EXH V/T ASSIGN trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see
• Exhaust valve timing control mag-
ANGLE • Change exhaust valve timing us- CHECK ITEM. O
net retarder
ing CONSULT-III.
*: Leaving cooling fan “OFF” with CONSULT-III while engine is running may cause the engine to overheat.
P
DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION MODE
SRT STATUS Mode
For details, refer to EC-46, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information".
SRT WORK SUPPORT Mode
This mode enables a technician to drive a vehicle to set the SRT while monitoring the SRT status.
DTC WORK SUPPORT Mode

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Test mode Test item Corresponding DTC No. Reference page

PURG FLOW P0441 P0441 EC-390
EVAPORATIVE SYS- EVP SML LEAK P0442/P1442* P0442 EC-395

TEM EVP V/S LEAK P0456/P1456* P0456 EC-452
PURG VOL CN/V P1444 P0443 EC-401
A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276 P0130 EC-239
A/F SEN1 (B1) P1278/P1279 P0133 EC-263
A/F SEN1
A/F SEN1 (B2) P1286 P0150 EC-239
A/F SEN1 (B2) P1288/P1289 P0153 EC-263
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 P0139 EC-296
HO2S2 (B1) P1146 P0138 EC-283
HO2S2 (B1) P1147 P0137 EC-273
HO2S2
HO2S2 (B2) P0159 P0159 EC-296
HO2S2 (B2) P1166 P0158 EC-283
HO2S2 (B2) P1167 P0157 EC-273
*: DTC P1442 and P1456 does not apply to Z33 models but appears in DTC WORK SUPPORT Mode screens.
Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function INFOID:0000000004656205
DESCRIPTION
Generic Scan Tool (OBDII scan tool) complying with SAE J1978 has
8 different functions explained below.
ISO15765-4 is used as the protocol.
The name GST or Generic Scan Tool is used in this service manual.
SEF139P
FUNCTION
Diagnostic test mode Function

This diagnostic service gains access to current emission-related data values, including an-
Service $01 READINESS TESTS
alog inputs and outputs, digital inputs and outputs, and system status information.
This diagnostic service gains access to emission-related data value which were stored by
Service $02 (FREEZE DATA) ECM during the freeze frame. For details, refer to EC-46, "Emission-related Diagnostic In-
formation".
This diagnostic service gains access to emission-related power train trouble codes which
Service $03 DTCs
were stored by ECM.
This diagnostic service can clear all emission-related diagnostic information. This in-
cludes:
• Clear number of diagnostic trouble codes (Service $01)
• Clear diagnostic trouble codes (Service $03)
Service $04 CLEAR DIAG INFO
• Clear trouble code for freeze frame data (Service $01)
• Clear freeze frame data (Service $02)
• Reset status of system monitoring test (Service $01)
• Clear on board monitoring test results (Service $06 and $07)
This diagnostic service accesses the results of on board diagnostic monitoring tests of
Service $06 (ON BOARD TESTS)
specific components/systems that are not continuously monitored.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Diagnostic test mode Function
A
This diagnostic service enables the off board test drive to obtain test results for emission-
Service $07 (ON BOARD TESTS) related powertrain components/systems that are continuously monitored during normal
driving conditions.
This diagnostic service can close EVAP system in ignition switch ON position (Engine EC
stopped). When this diagnostic service is performed, the EVAP canister vent control valve
can be closed.
In the following conditions, this diagnostic service cannot function.
• Low ambient temperature
C
Service $08 —
• Low battery voltage
• Engine running
• Ignition switch OFF D
• Low fuel temperature
• Too much pressure is applied to EVAP system
This diagnostic service enables the off-board test device to request specific vehicle infor-
Service $09 (CALIBRATION ID) E
mation such as Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and Calibration IDs.
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. F
2. Connect GST to data link connector (1), which is located under
LH dash panel near the hood opener handle.
G
2 : Hood opener handle
I
PBIB3500E
3. Turn ignition switch ON. J

4. Enter the program according to instruction on the screen or in
the operation manual.
(*: Regarding GST screens in this section, sample screens are K
shown.)
SEF398S M
5. Perform each diagnostic mode according to each service proce-

dure.
N
For further information, see the GST Operation Manual of
the tool maker.
SEF416S
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor INFOID:0000000004656206
Remarks:
z Specification data are reference values.
z Specification data are output/input values which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
* Specification data may not be directly related to their components signals/values/operations.
i.e. Adjust ignition timing with a timing light before monitoring IGN TIMING, because the monitor may show the specification data in spite of the
ignition timing not being adjusted to the specification data. This IGN TIMING monitors the data calculated by the ECM according to the signals
input from the camshaft position sensor and other ignition timing related sensors.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
Almost the same speed as the
ENG SPEED • Run engine and compare CONSULT-III value with the tachometer indication.
tachometer indication
MAS A/F SE-B1 See EC-126.
MAS A/F SE-B2 See EC-126.
B/FUEL SCHDL See EC-126.
A/F ALPHA-B1
See EC-126.
A/F ALPHA-B2
COOLAN TEMP/S • Engine: After warming up More than 70°C (158°F)
A/F SEN1 (B1)
• Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm Fluctuates around 2.2V
A/F SEN1 (B2)
• Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions
are met
HO2S2 (B1) 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 -
HO2S2 (B2) 1.0V
- Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at
idle for 1 minute under no load
are met
HO2S2 MNTR(B1)
- Engine: After warming up LEAN ←→ RICH
HO2S2 MNTR(B2)
• Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-III value with the speedometer in- Almost the same speed as the
VHCL SPEED SE
dication. speedometer indication
BATTERY VOLT • Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) 11 - 14V
• Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.5 - 1.0V

ACCEL SEN 1
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 4.0 - 4.8V

ACCEL SEN 2*1 (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 3.9 - 4.8V
• Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V
TP SEN 1-B1 (Engine stopped)
TP SEN 2-B1*1 • Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
position
FUEL T/TMP SE • Ignition switch: ON Indicates fuel tank temperature
Indicates intake air tempera-
INT/A TEMP SE • Ignition switch: ON
ture
EVAP SYS PRES • Ignition switch: ON Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V
Depending on fuel level of fuel
FUEL LEVEL SE • Ignition switch: ON
tank
START SIGNAL • Ignition switch: ON → START → ON OFF → ON → OFF
• Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON

CLSD THL POS
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF
• Engine: After warming up, idle the
AIR COND SIG Air conditioner switch: ON
engine ON
Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
ON
P/N POSI SW • Ignition switch: ON position
Shift lever: Except above position OFF
• Engine: After warming up, idle the Steering wheel: Not being turned OFF
PW/ST SIGNAL
engine Steering wheel: Being turned ON

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
Rear window defogger switch: ON and/
ON
or lighting switch: 2nd position
LOAD SIGNAL • Ignition switch: ON
Rear window defogger switch and light-
OFF EC
ing switch: OFF
IGNITION SW • Ignition switch: ON → OFF → ON ON → OFF → ON
• Engine: After warming up, idle the Heater fan switch: ON ON

HEATER FAN SW C
engine Heater fan switch: OFF OFF
Brake pedal: Fully released OFF
BRAKE SW • Ignition switch: ON
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON D
• Engine: After warming up Idle 2.0 - 3.0 msec
• Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral
INJ PULSE-B1
(M/T) position E
INJ PULSE-B2 2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.9 msec
• Air conditioner switch: OFF
• No load
• Engine: After warming up Idle 6° - 16° BTDC
• Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral F
IGN TIMING (M/T) position
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm 25° - 45° BTDC
• No load
G
• Engine: After warming up Idle 5% - 35%
CAL/LD VALUE (M/T) position
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,500 rpm 5% - 35% H
• No load
• Engine: After warming up Idle 2.0 - 6.0 g·m/s
• Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral I
MASS AIRFLOW (M/T) position
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,500 rpm 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/s
• No load
J
• Engine: After warming up Idle
• Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (Accelerator pedal is not depressed 0%
PURG VOL C/V (M/T) position even slightly, after engine starting)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF K
• No load 2,000 rpm —
• Engine: After warming up Idle −5° - 5°CA

• Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral L
INT/V TIM(B1)
(M/T) position
INT/V TIM(B2) 2,000 rpm Approx. 0° - 30°CA
• No load
• Engine: After warming up Idle −5° - 5°CA M
EXH/V TIM B1
(M/T) position Around 2,500 rpm while the engine
EXH/V TIM B2 Approx. 0° - 30°CA
• Air conditioner switch: OFF speed is rising N
• No load
INT/V SOL(B1) O
(M/T) position
INT/V SOL(B2) 2,000 rpm Approx. 0% - 50%
• No load
• Engine: After warming up Idle 0% - 2% P
VTC DTY EX B1
(M/T) position Around 2,500 rpm while the engine
VTC DTY EX B2 Approx. 0% - 70%
• Air conditioner switch: OFF speed is rising
• No load
• Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V
TP SEN 1-B2 (Engine stopped)
TP SEN 2-B2*1 • Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
position

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
AIR COND RLY Air conditioner switch: ON
engine ON
(Compressor operates)
• For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON
ON
FUEL PUMP RLY • Engine running or cranking
• Except above conditions OFF
VENT CONT/V • Ignition switch: ON OFF
THRTL RELAY • Ignition switch: ON ON
Engine coolant temperature is 97°C
OFF
(206°F) or less
Engine coolant temperature is between
COOLING FAN engine LOW
98°C (208°F) and 99°C (210°F)
HI
(212°F) or more
• Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met.
HO2S2 HTR (B1) ON
HO2S2 HTR (B2) idle for 1 minute under no load
• Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm OFF
I/P PULLY SPD • Vehicle speed: More than 20 km/h (12 MPH)
VEHICLE SPEED
Idle air volume learning has not been
YET
performed yet.
IDL A/V LEARN • Engine: Running
Idle air volume learning has already
CMPLT
been performed successfully.
ENG OIL TEMP • Engine: After warming up More than 70°C (158°F)
Vehicle has traveled after MIL has 0 - 65,535 km
TRVL AFTER MIL • Ignition switch: ON
turned ON. (0 - 40,723 mile)
A/F S1 HTR(B1) • Engine: After warming up, idle the engine
4 - 100%
A/F S1 HTR(B2) (More than 140 seconds after starting engine)
• Engine: Idle
AC PRESS SEN • Both A/C switch and blower switch are ON. 1.0 - 4.0V
VHCL SPEED SE
The preset vehicle speed is
SET VHCL SPD • Engine: Running ASCD: Operating
displayed.
MAIN switch: Pressed ON
MAIN SW • Ignition switch: ON
MAIN switch: Released OFF
CANCEL switch: Pressed ON
CANCEL SW • Ignition switch: ON
CANCEL switch: Released OFF
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch:
ON
Pressed
RESUME/ACC SW • Ignition switch: ON
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Re-
OFF
leased
SET/COAST switch: Pressed ON
SET SW • Ignition switch: ON
SET/COAST switch: Released OFF

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
• Brake pedal: Fully released (A/T)
• Brake pedal and clutch pedal: Fully ON
BRAKE SW1 released (M/T)
(ASCD brake switch) • Brake pedal: Slightly depressed (A/T) EC
• Brake pedal and/or clutch pedal: OFF
Slightly depressed (M/T)
BRAKE SW2 Brake pedal: Fully released OFF C

(Stop lamp switch) Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON
VHCL SPD CUT • Ignition switch: ON NON
D
LO SPEED CUT • Ignition switch: ON NON
AT OD MONITOR • Ignition switch: ON OFF
AT OD CANSEL • Ignition switch: ON OFF E
MAIN switch: Pressed at the 1st time →
CRUISE LAMP • Ignition switch: ON ON → OFF
at the 2nd time
• MAIN switch: ON ASCD: Operating ON F
• When vehicle speed is between
SET LAMP
40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h ASCD: Not operating OFF
(89MPH)
G
Exhaust Valve Timing Control Learning
YET
has not been performed yet.
EXH V/T LEARN • Engine: Running
Exhaust Valve Timing Control Learning
CMPLT H
has not been performed yet.
A/F ADJ-B1 • Engine: Running –0.330 - 0.330
A/F ADJ-B2 • Engine: Running –0.330 - 0.330
I
*1: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal and throttle position sensor 2 signal are converted by ECM internally. Thus, they differ
from ECM terminals voltage signal.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
The specification (SP) value indicates the tolerance of the value that is displayed in “SPEC” in “DATA MONI-
TOR” mode of CONSULT-III during normal operation of the Engine Control System. When the value in “SPEC”
in “DATA MONITOR” mode is within the SP value, the Engine Control System is confirmed OK. When the
value in “SPEC” in “DATA MONITOR” mode is NOT within the SP value, the Engine Control System may have
one or more malfunctions.
The SP value is used to detect malfunctions that may affect the Engine Control System, but will not light the
MIL.
The SP value will be displayed for the following three items:
• B/FUEL SCHDL (The fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM prior to any learned on board correc-
tion)
• A/F ALPHA-B1/B2 (The mean value of air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle)
• MAS A/F SE-B1/B2 (The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor)
Testing Condition INFOID:0000000004656208
• Vehicle driven distance: More than 5,000 km (3,107 miles)

• Barometric pressure: 98.3 - 104.3 kPa (1.003 - 1.064 kg/cm2, 14.25 - 15.12 psi)
• Atmospheric temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
• Engine coolant temperature: 75 - 95°C (167 - 203°F)
• Transmission: Warmed-up
- For A/T models: After the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle until “ATF
TEMP 1” (A/T fluid temperature sensor signal) indicates more than 60°C (140°F).
- For M/T models: After the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle for 5 minutes.
• Electrical load: Not applied
- Rear window defogger switch, air conditioner switch, lighting switch are OFF. Steering wheel is straight
ahead.
• Engine speed: Idle
Inspection Procedure INFOID:0000000004656209
NOTE:
Perform “SPEC” in “DATA MONITOR” mode in maximum scale display.
1. Perform EC-71, "Basic Inspection".
2. Confirm that the testing conditions indicated above are met.
3. Select “B/FUEL SCHDL”, “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”, “MAS A/F SE-B1” and “MAS A/F SE-B2” in
“SPEC” of ”DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
4. Make sure that monitor items are within the SP value.
5. If NG, go to EC-127, "Diagnosis Procedure".

A
OVERALL SEQUENCE
EC
P
PBIB2268E

PBIB3531E
DETAILED PROCEDURE
1.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”
1. Start engine.
2. Confirm that the testing conditions are met. Refer to EC-126, "Testing Condition".
3. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “SPEC” in mode, and make sure that the each indication is
within the SP value.
NOTE:

Check “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” for approximately 1 minute because they may fluctuate. It is NG
if the indication is out of the SP value even a little. A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 2. EC
NG (More than the SP value)>>GO TO 3.
2.CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL”
C
Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of "DATA MONITOR" mode, and make sure that the indication is within the
SP value.
OK or NG
D
OK >> GO TO 4.
3.CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL” E
SP value.
OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 25. G
1. Stop the engine.
2. Disconnect PCV hose, and then plug it. H
3. Start engine.
4. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “SPEC” of "DATA MONITOR" mode, and make sure that the
each indication is within the SP value. I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 6. J
5.CHANGE ENGINE OIL
1. Stop the engine.
2. Change engine oil. K
NOTE:
This symptom may occur when a large amount of gasoline is mixed with engine oil because of driving
conditions (such as when engine oil temperature does not rise enough since a journey distance is too L
short during winter). The symptom will not be detected after changing engine oil or changing driving con-
dition.
M
>> INSPECTION END
6.CHECK FUEL PRESSURE
N
Check fuel pressure. (Refer to EC-78, "Fuel Pressure Check".)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. O
NG (Fuel pressure is too high)>>Replace fuel pressure regulator, refer to EC-78, "Fuel Pressure Check". GO
TO 8.
NG (Fuel pressure is too low)>>GO TO 7.
P
1. Check the following.
- Clogged and bent fuel hose and fuel tube
- Clogged fuel filter
- Fuel pump and its circuit (Refer to EC-639.)
2. If NG, repair or replace the malfunctioning part. (Refer to EC-78, "Fuel Pressure Check".)
If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator.

>> GO TO 8.
1. Start engine.
each indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 9.
9.PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST
1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
2. Make sure that the each cylinder produces a momentary engine speed drop.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 10.
- Ignition coil and its circuit (Refer to EC-645.)
- Fuel injector and its circuit (Refer to EC-634.)
- Intake air leakage
- Low compression pressure (Refer to EM-89, "On-Vehicle Service".)
2. If NG, repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
If OK, replace fuel injector. (It may be caused by leakage from fuel injector or clogging.)
>> GO TO 11.
1. Start engine.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 12.
12.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 FUNCTION
Perform all DTC Confirmation Procedure related with A/F sensor 1.
• For DTC P0130, P0150, refer to EC-239, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
• For DTC P2A00, P2A03, refer to EC-609, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 13.
13.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT
Perform Diagnostic Procedure according to corresponding DTC.
>> GO TO 14.
1. Start engine.
OK or NG

NG >> GO TO 15. A
15.DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT ECM HARNESS CONNECTOR
1. Stop the engine.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check pin terminal and connector for damage, and then reconnect it. EC
>> GO TO 16.
C
1. Start engine.
2. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “SPEC” of "DATA MONITOR" mode, and make sure that the D
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END E
NG >> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-87, "Symptom Matrix Chart".
F
SP value.
OK or NG
G
NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 25.
H
1. Check for the cause of large engine friction. Refer to the following.
- Engine oil level is too high I
- Engine oil viscosity
- Belt tension of power steering, alternator, A/C compressor, etc. is excessive
- Noise from engine
- Noise from transmission, etc. J
2. Check for the cause of insufficient combustion. Refer to the following.
- Valve clearance malfunction
- Intake valve timing control function malfunction K
- Camshaft sprocket installation malfunction, etc.
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 30. L

19.CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following.
M
• Crushed air ducts
• Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
• Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
• Improper specification of intake air system N
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 21.
NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 20. O
20.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”, AND “B/FUEL SCHDL”
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”, and “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of "DATA MONITOR" mode, and P
make sure that the each indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
NG (“B/FUEL SCHDL” is more, “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” are less than the SP value)>>GO TO 21.
21.DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR
1. Stop the engine.

2. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Check pin terminal and connector for damage and
then reconnect it again.
>> GO TO 22.
1. Start engine.
OK or NG
OK >> 1. Detect malfunctioning part of mass air flow sensor circuit and repair it.
Refer to EC-186.
2. GO TO 29.
NG >> GO TO 23.
23.CHECK “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “MAS A/F SE-B2”
Select “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “MAS A/F SE-B2” in “SPEC” of "DATA MONITOR" mode, and make sure that the
indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 24.
NG (More than the SP value)>>Replace mass air flow sensor, and then GO TO 29.
24.REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
2. Perform initialization of NVIS(NATS) system and registration of all NVIS(NATS) ignition key IDs.
Refer to BL-135, "ECM Re-communicating Function".
>> GO TO 29.
Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following.
• Improper specification of intake air system
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 27.
NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 26.
SP value.
OK or NG
NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 27.
27.CHECK “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “MAS A/F SE-B2”
Select “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “MAS A/F SE-B2” in “SPEC” of "DATA MONITOR" mode, and make sure that the
indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 28.
NG (Less than the SP value)>>Replace mass air flow sensor, and then GO TO 30.

28.CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM A
Check for the cause of air leak after the mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following.
• Disconnection, looseness, and cracks in air duct
• Looseness of oil filler cap
EC
• Disconnection of oil level gauge
• Open stuck, breakage, hose disconnection, or cracks of PCV valve
• Disconnection or cracks of EVAP purge hose, open stuck of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve C
• Malfunctioning seal of rocker cover gasket
• Disconnection, looseness, or cracks of hoses, such as vacuum hose, connecting to intake air system parts
• Malfunctioning seal of intake air system, etc.
D
>> GO TO 30.
29.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”, AND “B/FUEL SCHDL” E
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”, and “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of "DATA MONITOR" mode, and
make sure that the each indication is within the SP value.
OK or NG F
NG >> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-87, "Symptom Matrix Chart".
G
Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of "DATA MONITOR" mode, and then make sure that the indication is
within the SP value. H
OK or NG
NG >> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-87, "Symptom Matrix Chart". I

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Intermittent incidents may occur. In many cases, the malfunction resolves itself (the part or circuit function
returns to normal without intervention). It is important to realize that the symptoms described in the customer's
complaint often do not recur on (1st trip) DTC visits. Realize also that the most frequent cause of intermittent
incidents occurrences is poor electrical connections. Because of this, the conditions under which the incident
occurred may not be clear. Therefore, circuit checks made as part of the standard diagnostic procedure may
not indicate the specific malfunctioning area.
Common intermittent incidents Report Situations
STEP in Work Flow Situation

2 The CONSULT-III is used. The SELF-DIAG RESULTS screen shows time data other than [0] or [1t].
3 or 4 The symptom described by the customer does not recur.
5 (1st trip) DTC does not appear during the DTC Confirmation Procedure.
10 The Diagnostic Procedure for PXXXX does not indicate the malfunctioning area.
1.INSPECTION START
Erase (1st trip) DTCs.
Refer to EC-46, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information".
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK GROUND TERMINALS
Check ground terminals for corroding or loose connection.
Refer to EC-142, "Ground Inspection".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace.
3.SEARCH FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Perform GI-24, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident", “INCIDENT SIMULATION
TESTS”.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK CONNECTOR TERMINALS
Refer to GI-21, "How to Check Terminal", “HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS”, “How to Check Enlarged Con-
tact Spring of Terminal”.
OK or NG
NG >> Repair or replace connector.

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
A
Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000004656213
EC
TBWT1614E
CAUTION:

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
ECM relay switch OFF
24 BR/Y
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
tion switch OFF
[Ignition switch: OFF] 0V
53 P/L Ignition switch BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)

EC
TBWT1615E
CAUTION:

TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
8 B/P ECM ground Body ground
• Idle speed
123 B/W [Engine is running]
124 B/R • Idle speed
127 B [Engine is running]
128 B • Idle speed
1.INSPECTION START
Start engine.
Is engine running?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 8.
No >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and then ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 53 and ground with CON-
SULT-III or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0070E

• Harness connectors M72, F102
• Fuse block (J/B) connector M4
• 10A fuse
• Harness for open or short between ECM and fuse
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
Models with VDC system, navigation system or telephone
2. Loosen and retighten ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-142, "Ground Inspection".

EC
PBIB3560E
D
1. Body ground E17 2. Body ground E43 3. Body ground B102
: Vehicle front
E
Models without VDC system, navigation system and telephone
F
PBIB3561E I
1. Body ground E17 2. Body ground E43 3. Body ground F152

(Passenger side view with dash side
finisher removed) J
: Vehicle front
OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
5.CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I L
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 8, 123, 124, 127, 128 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. M
Continuity should exist.

3. Also check harness for short to power. N
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6. O

Check the following. P
• Harness connectors F103, B113 (Models with VDC system, navigation system or telephone) or F151 (Mod-
els without VDC system, navigation system and telephone)
• Harness connectors F3, E12
• Harness for open or short between ECM and ground
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.

7.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1. Reconnect ECM harness connector disconnected.
3. Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 17 and ground with
CONSULT-III or tester.

OK or NG
OK >> Go to EC-645.
NG >> GO TO 8.
PBIB1915E
8.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

2. Turn ignition switch ON and then OFF.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 125 and ground with
Voltage: After turning ignition switch OFF, battery

voltage will exist for a few seconds, then drop
approximately 0V.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG (Battery voltage does not exist.)>>GO TO 9.
NG (Battery voltage exists for more than a few seconds.)>>GO TO PBIB3587E
12.
9.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV
Check voltage between ECM terminal 24 and ground with CON-
SULT-III or tester.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 12.
PBIB3467E
10.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V

2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E7.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 125 and IPDM E/R terminal 18.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.
NG >> GO TO 11.

• Harness or connectors E108, M15
• Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R A
12.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-VI EC

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 24 and IPDM E/R terminal 46.
C

D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14. E
NG >> GO TO 13.
Check the following. F
• Harness or connectors E10, F1
• Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R
G
14.CHECK 15A FUSE H
1. Disconnect 15A fuse from IPDM E/R.
2. Check 15A fuse.
OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 18.
NG >> Replace 15A fuse.
15.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS J

1. Loosen and retighten ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-142, "Ground Inspection". K
N
PBIB3560E

O
: Vehicle front

1. Loosen and retighten ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-142, "Ground Inspection". P

PBIB3561E

finisher removed)
: Vehicle front
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
16.CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 8, 123, 124, 127, 128 and ground.

3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.
NG >> GO TO 17.
els without VDC system, navigation system and telephone)
• Harness or connectors F3, E12
• Harness or connectors M72, F102
• Harness for open or short between ECM and ground.

18.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-134.
OK or NG
OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-16.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Ground Inspection INFOID:0000000004656215
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground
connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can
become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drasti-
cally affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even
when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
• Remove the ground bolt or screw.
• Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.

• Clean as required to assure good contact.
• Reinstall bolt or screw securely. A
• Inspect for “add-on” accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
• If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the
wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eye-
EC
let make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to PG-25, "Ground Distribution".
PBIB1870E

DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000004656217
Trouble diagnosis
DTC No. DTC detecting condition Possible cause
name
• When ECM is not transmitting or receiving
U1000*1
CAN communication signal of OBD (emission-
1000*1 related diagnosis) for 2 seconds or more. • Harness or connectors
CAN communication
• When ECM is not transmitting or receiving (CAN communication line is open or
line
U1001*2 CAN communication signal other than OBD shorted)
1001*2 (emission-related diagnosis) for 2 seconds or
more.
*1: This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
*2: The MIL will not light up for this self-diagnosis.
DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000004656218

2. Check 1st trip DTC.
3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-145, "Diagnosis Procedure".

EC
P
TBWT1616E
Go to LAN-41, "CAN System Specification Chart".

DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION
DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION
• This self-diagnosis has one trip detection logic (A/T models).

• The MIL will not light up for this self-diagnosis (M/T models).
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
U1010 When detecting error during the initial diagno-
CAN communication bus • ECM
1010 sis of CAN controller of ECM.

2. Check DTC.
3. If DTC is detected, go to EC-146, "Diagnosis Procedure".
1.INSPECTION START
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Touch “ERASE”.
4. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.
See EC-146, "DTC Confirmation Procedure".
5. Is the DTC U1010 displayed again?
With GST
2. Select Service $04 with GST.
4. Is the DTC U1010 displayed again?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> INSPECTION END
2.REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
2. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-135, "ECM Re-communicating Function".
4. Perform EC-76, "Exhaust Valve Timing Control Learning"
>> INSPECTION END

DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL
A

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) C
Engine speed and piston position
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Intake valve Intake valve timing control
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature timing control solenoid valve
D
*: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN Communication line
E
J
PBIB3535E
This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of the intake
valve.
The ECM receives signals such as crankshaft position, camshaft position, engine speed, and engine coolant K
temperature. Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the intake valve timing control solenoid
valve depending on driving status. This makes it possible to control the shut/open timing of the intake valve to
increase engine torque in low/mid speed range and output in high-speed range. L
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000004656226
Specification data are reference values. M

• Engine: After warming up Idle −5° - 5°CA N
• Shift lever: P or N (A/T),
INT/V TIM(B1)
Neutral (M/T)
INT/V TIM(B2) 2,000 rpm Approx. 0° - 30°CA
• No load O
• Shift lever: P or N (A/T),
INT/V SOL(B1)
Neutral (M/T) P
• No load

Trouble diagnosis
DTC No. Detecting condition Possible cause
name
P0011 • Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
0011 • Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
(Bank 1) • Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
Intake valve timing There is a gap between angle of target and • Accumulation of debris to the signal pick-up
P0021 control performance phase-control angle degree. portion of the camshaft
0021 • Timing chain installation
(Bank 2) • Foreign matter caught in the oil groove for in-
take valve timing control
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode.
Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode

Intake valve timing control The signal is not energized to the solenoid valve and the valve control does not function.
CAUTION:
Always drive at a safe speed.
NOTE:
• If DTC P0011 or P0021 is displayed with DTC P0075 or P0081, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC
P0075 or P0081. Refer to EC-172.
• If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10V and 16V at
idle.
WITH CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
3. Maintain the following conditions for at least 6 consecutive seconds.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
ENG SPEED 500 - 2,000 rpm (A constant rotation is maintained.)

COOLANT TEMP/S More than 60°C (140°F)
B/FUEL SCHDL More than 3.5 msec
Shift lever P or N (A/T), neutral (M/T) position
4. Let engine idle for 10 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step.
ENG SPEED 1,700 - 3,175 rpm (A constant rotation is maintained.)

COOLANT TEMP/S More than 70°C (158°F)
Shift lever 1st or 2nd position
Driving vehicle uphill
Driving location uphill (Increased engine load will help maintain the driving
conditions required for this test.)

A
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-III” above.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004656229 EC
1.CHECK OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP

1. Start engine. C
2. Check oil pressure warning lamp and confirm it is not illumi-
nated.
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Go to LU-5, "Inspection".
E
F
PBIA8559J
2.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. H
NG >> Replace malfunctioning intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
3.CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
Refer to EC-373, "Component Inspection". I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
J
NG >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
4.CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)
Refer to EC-383, "Component Inspection". K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning camshaft position sensor (PHASE). L
5.CHECK CAMSHAFT (INT)
Check the following. M
• Accumulation of debris to the signal plate of camshaft rear end
• Chipping signal plate of camshaft rear end
OK or NG
N
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft
rear end or replace camshaft.
O
P
PBIB3533E

Check service records for any recent repairs that may cause timing chain misaligned.
Are there any service records that may cause timing chain misaligned?
Yes or No
Yes >> Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-53.

No >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK LUBRICATION CIRCUIT
Refer to EM-72, "Removal and Installation".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Clean lubrication line.
Refer to EC-134.
For Wiring Diagram, refer to EC-369 for crankshaft position sensor (POS) and EC-377 for camshaft position
sensor (PHASE).
>> INSPECTION END

INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

1. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector.
2. Check resistance between intake valve timing control solenoid
valve as follows.
Terminal Resistance
1 and 2 7.0 - 7.5Ω [at 20°C (68°F)]
∞Ω
1 or 2 and ground
(Continuity should not exist.)
If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
If OK, go to next step.
3. Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve. PBIB0193E
4. Provide 12V DC between intake valve timing control solenoid

valve terminals and then interrupt it. Make sure that the plunger
moves as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Do not apply 12V DC continuously for 5 seconds or more.
Doing so may result in damage to the coil in intake valve
timing control solenoid valve.
NOTE:
Always replace O-ring when intake valve timing control
solenoid valve is removed.
PBIB2275E

Refer to EM-53.

DTC P0014 P0024 EVT CONTROL
A

Engine speed and piston position
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Exhaust valve Exhaust valve timing con-
timing control trol magnet retarder D
Exhaust valve timing control position sensor Exhaust valve timing signal
*: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN Communication line E
J
PBIB2765E
This mechanism magnetically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of the exhaust
valve.
K
The ECM receives signals such as crankshaft position, camshaft position, engine speed, and engine coolant
temperature. Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the exhaust valve timing control magnet
retarder depending on driving status. This makes it possible to control the shut/open timing of the exhaust
valve to increase engine torque and output in a range of high engine speed. L

• Engine: After warming up Idle −5° - 5°CA N
EXH/V TIM B1 • Shift lever: Neutral
EXH/V TIM B2 • Air conditioner switch: OFF Around 2,500 rpm while the engine
Approx. 0° - 30°CA
• No load speed is rising
O
VTC DTY EX B1 • Shift lever: Neutral
VTC DTY EX B2 • Air conditioner switch: OFF Around 2,500 rpm while the engine
Approx. 0% - 70%
• No load speed is rising P

Trouble diagnosis
DTC No. Detecting condition Possible cause
name
P0014 • Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
(Bank 1) • Exhaust valve timing control position sensor
Exhaust valve timing There is a gap between angle of target and • Exhaust valve timing control magnet retarder
P0024 control performance phase-control angle degree. • Accumulation of debris to the signal pick-up
0024 portion of the camshaft
(Bank 2) • Timing chain installation
• Exhaust valve timing control pulley assembly
FAIL-SAFE MODE

The signal is not energized to the Exhaust valve timing control magnet retarder and the mag-
net retarder control does not function.
CAUTION:
Always drive at a safe speed.
NOTE:
• If DTC P0014 or P0024 is displayed with DTC P0078, P0084, P1078 or P1084, first perform trouble
diagnosis for DTC P0078, P0084 or P1078, P1084. Refer to EC-179 or EC-496.
TESTING CONDITION:
idle.
WITH CONSULT-III
ENG SPEED 500 - 2,000 rpm (A constant rotation is maintained.)

COOLAN TEMP/S More than 60°C (140°F)
B/FUEL SCHDL More than 3.5 msec
Shift lever P or N (A/T), neutral (M/T) position
4. Let engine idle for 10 seconds.
ENG SPEED 1,700 - 2,950 rpm (A constant rotation is maintained.)

Shift lever 1st or 2nd position
Driving vehicle uphill
Driving location uphill (Increased engine load will help maintain the driving
conditions required for this test.)

9. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-153, "Diagnosis Procedure". A
WITH GST
EC
1.INSPECTION START C
Do you have CONSULT-III?
Yes or No
D
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 3.
2.CHECK FUNCTION OF EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL-I E
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “EXH V/T ANGLE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III. F
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed at 2,500 rpm, then touch “START”.
4. Make sure that the values of “EXH/V TIM B1” and “EXH/V TIM B2” change when touching “UP” or
“DOWN”.
G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 4.
H
3.CHECK FUNCTION OF EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL-II
Without CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and keep the engine speed at 2,500 rpm, then touch “START”. I
2. Read the voltage signal between ECM terminal 6 (bank 1), 7 (bank 2) and ground with oscilloscope.
3. Verify that the oscilloscope screen shows the signal wave as shown below.
J
PBIB3542E
OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL MAGNET RETARDER M
OK or NG
N
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
5.REPLACE EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL MAGNET RETARDER O
1. Replace exhaust valve timing control magnet retarder.
P
>> INSPECTION END
6.CHECK EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning exhaust valve timing control position sensor.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
9.CHECK CAMSHAFT (EXH)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
rear end or malfunctioning replace camshaft.
PBIB3534E

Check service records for any recent repairs that may cause timing chain misaligned.
Are there any service records that may cause timing chain misaligned?
Yes or No
Yes >> Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-53.
No >> GO TO 11.
11.REPLACE EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL PULLEY ASSEMBLY
1. Replace exhaust valve timing control pulley assembly and exhaust valve timing control magnet retarder.
Refer to EM-72 and EM-44.
>> INSPECTION END

Refer to EC-134.
For Wiring Diagram, refer to EC-369 for crankshaft position sensor (POS) and EC-377 for camshaft position
sensor (PHASE).
>> INSPECTION END

EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL MAGNET RETARDER

1. Disconnect exhaust valve timing control magnet retarder harness connector.

2. Check resistance between exhaust valve timing control magnet
retarder terminals 1 and 2. A
Resistance: 9.0 - 11.0Ω [at 20°C (68°F)]

3. If NG, replace exhaust valve timing control magnet retarder and EC
go to the next step.
C
PBIB3469E
D
EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL MAGNET RETARDER E

Refer to EM-44.

DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Air fuel ratio (A/F)
Engine speed
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) sensor 1 heater con- Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air trol
The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the A/F sensor 1 heater corresponding to the engine operating
condition to keep the temperature of A/F sensor 1 element at the specified range.
Specification data are reference values.

A/F S1 HTR(B1) • Engine: After warming up, idle the engine
4 - 100%
A/F S1 HTR(B2) (More than 140 seconds after starting engine)
P0031
0031 The current amperage in the air fuel ratio (A/F) sen- • Harness or connectors
(Bank 1) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor
sor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (The A/F sensor 1 heater circuit is
1 heater control circuit low
P0051 (An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM open or shorted.)
input
0051 through the A/F sensor 1 heater.) • Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
(Bank 2)
P0032
0032 The current amperage in the air fuel ratio (A/F) sen- • Harness or connectors
(Bank 1) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor
sor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (The A/F sensor 1 heater circuit is
1 heater control circuit
P0052 (An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM shorted.)
high input
0052 through the A/F sensor 1 heater.) • Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
(Bank 2)
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10.5V and 16V at
idle.
1. Start engine and let it idle for at least 10 seconds.


A
BANK 1
EC
P
TBWT1617E
CAUTION:

TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
2.9 - 8.8V
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
(bank 1)
gine)
PBIB3538E

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

BANK 2
A
EC
TBWT1618E
P
CAUTION:

TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
2.9 - 8.8
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
5 GY/L • Idle speed
(bank 2)
gine)
PBIB3538E


PBIB3560E

: Vehicle front

PBIB3561E

1. Body ground E17 2. Body ground E43 3. Body ground F152 A

finisher removed)
: Vehicle front
EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. C
2.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector.
D
PBIB3516E
G
nector nector H
: Vehicle fornt

I
3. Check voltage between air fuel ratio sensor (A/F) sensor 1 ter-
minal 4 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage J

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
K
NG >> GO TO 3.
L
PBIB3308E

• Harness connectors E12, F3
• 15A fuse
• Harness for open or short between air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 and fuse N
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

4.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT O
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 1 (bank 1) or 5 (bank 2) and air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 P
terminal 3.

4. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power.
OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
Perform EC-134.
>> INSPECTION END

AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER

Check resistance between terminals 3 and 4.

Check continuity between terminals 3 and 1, 2, terminals 4 and 1, 2.
Continuity should not exist.

If NG, replace the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
CAUTION:
• Discard any A/F sensor which has been dropped from a
height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such
as a concrete floor; use a new one.
• Before installing new A/F sensor, clean exhaust system
threads using Heated Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-
43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
PBIB3309E
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1

Refer to EM-23.

DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
A

Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) C
Engine speed
Heated oxygen sensor 2 Heated oxygen sensor 2
Engine coolant tempera- (HO2S2) heater control (HO2S2) heater
Engine coolant temperature sensor D
ture
The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 (HO2S2) heater corresponding to the E
engine speed, amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature.
OPERATION
F
Engine speed rpm Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
Above 3,600 OFF
Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met. G
• Engine: After warming up
ON
• Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1
minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load
H
Specification data are reference values. I

• Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met. J
HO2S2 HTR (B1) ON
- Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and
HO2S2 HTR (B2) at idle for 1 minute under no load
• Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm OFF
K
Trouble diagnosis
name
M
P0037
0037 The current amperage in the HO2S2 heater circuit • Harness or connectors
(Bank 1) HO2S2 heater con- is out of the normal range. (The HO2S2 heater circuit is open or short-
trol circuit low (An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM ed.) N
P0057
0057 through the HO2S2 heater.) • HO2S2 heater
(Bank 2)
P0038 O
0038 The current amperage in the HO2S2 heater circuit
(Bank 1) • Harness or connectors
HO2S2 heater con- is out of the normal range.
(The HO2S2 heater circuit is shorted.)
P0058 trol circuit high (An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM P
• HO2S2 heater
0058 through the HO2S2 heater.)
(Bank 2)
NOTE:

TESTING CONDITION:
idle.

3. Start the engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 rpm and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under
no load.
4. Let engine idle for 1 minute.

A
BANK 1
EC
P
TBWT1619E
CAUTION:

TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
0 - 14V
[Engine is running]
17 P
PBIB3545E

[Engine is running]
(bank 1)
Sensor ground
ture sensor)

BANK 2
A
EC
TBWT1620E
P
CAUTION:

TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
0 - 14V
[Engine is running]
33 PU/W
PBIB3545E

[Engine is running]
(bank 2)
Sensor ground
Heated oxygen sensor 2, [Engine is running]
ture sensor)

PBIB3560E

: Vehicle front


EC
PBIB3561E
D
finisher removed)
E
: Vehicle front
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. F
2.CHECK HO2S2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
G
1. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
J
PBIB3502E
1. Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2) 2. Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2) 3. Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1) K
harness connector
harness connector
L
: Vehicle front

3. Check voltage between HO2S2 terminal 2 and ground with M
Voltage: Battery voltage N

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3. O
MBIB0186E P
• 15A fuse
• Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 and fuse

4.CHECK HO2S2 HEATER OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows.
Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P0037, P0038 17 3 1
P0057, P0058 33 3 2

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2.
Refer to EC-134.
>> INSPECTION END

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER

1. Check resistance between HO2S2 terminals as follows.
Terminal No. Resistance

2 and 3 3.4 - 4.4 Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
1 and 2, 3, 4 ∞Ω
4 and 1, 2, 3 (Continuity should not exist)
2. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.

CAUTION:
• Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped
from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface
such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
• Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system
threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18
or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
PBIB3310E

A
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
Refer to EM-23.
EC

DTC P0075, P0081 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve is activated by ON/OFF

pulse duty (ratio) signals from the ECM.
The intake valve timing control solenoid valve changes the oil
amount and direction of flow through intake valve timing control unit
or stops oil flow.
The longer pulse width advances valve angle.
The shorter pulse width retards valve angle.
When ON and OFF pulse widths become equal, the solenoid valve
stops oil pressure flow to fix the intake valve angle at the control
position.
PBIB1842E

INT/V SOL(B1)
(M/T)
• No load
P0075
0075 • Harness or connectors
(Bank 1) An improper voltage is sent to the ECM
Intake valve timing control (The intake valve timing control solenoid
through intake valve timing control solenoid
P0081 solenoid valve circuit valve circuit is open or shorted.)
valve.
0081 • Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
(Bank 2)
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
1. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.


A
BANK 1
EC
P
TBWT1621E
CAUTION:

TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
• Idle speed
7 - 12V
18 W/G
PBIB3546E
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
24 BR/Y
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
tion switch OFF
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)

BANK 2
A
EC
TBWT1622E
P
CAUTION:

TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
24 BR/Y
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
tion switch OFF
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
• Idle speed
7 - 12V
29 G/W
PBIB3546E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
1.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector.
PBIB3508E
1. Exhaust valve timing control magnet 2. Intake valve timing control solenoid 3. Intake valve timing control solenoid
retarder (bank 2) harness connector

4. Check voltage between intake valve timing control solenoid
valve terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. A

OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
C
PBIB0192E
2.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART D

E
• Harness for open or short between intake valve timing control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
F
3.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. G
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 18 (bank 1) or 29 (bank 2) and intake valve timing con-
trol solenoid valve terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. H

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. J
4.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning intake valve timing control solenoid valve. L
Refer to EC-134.
M
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000004656261 N

1. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector. O

2. Check resistance between intake valve timing control solenoid
valve as follows.
Terminal Resistance
1 and 2 7.0 - 7.5Ω [at 20°C (68°F)]
∞Ω
1 or 2 and ground
(Continuity should not exist.)
3. Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve. PBIB0193E
4. Provide 12V DC between intake valve timing control solenoid

valve terminals and then interrupt it. Make sure that the plunger
moves as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Do not apply 12V DC continuously for 5 seconds or more.
Doing so may result in damage to the coil in intake valve
timing control solenoid valve.
NOTE:
Always replace O-ring when intake valve timing control
solenoid valve is removed.
PBIB2275E

Refer to EM-53.

DTC P0078 P0084 EVT CONTROL MAGNET RETARDER
A
Exhaust valve timing control magnet retarder (1) controls the shut/ EC
open timing of the exhaust valve by ON/OFF pulse duty signals sent
from the ECM.
The longer pulse width retards valve angle.
The shorter pulse width advances valve angle. C
PBIB3525E E
Specification data are reference values. F

• Engine: After warming up Idle 0% - 2% G
VTC DTY EX B1 • Shift lever: Neutral
VTC DTY EX B2 • Air conditioner switch: OFF Around 2,500 rpm while the engine
Approx. 0% - 70%
• No load speed is rising
H
I
P0078
0078 • Harness or connectors J
(Bank 1) An improper voltage is sent to the ECM (Exhaust valve timing control magnet re-
Exhaust valve timing con-
through exhaust valve timing control magnet tarder circuit is open or shorted.)
P0084 trol magnet retarder circuit
retarder. • Exhaust valve timing control magnet re-
0084 tarder K
(Bank 2)
L
NOTE:
M

2. Check 1st trip DTC. N

BANK 1
TBWT1623E
CAUTION:

age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. A
TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) EC
NO.
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
• Warm-up condition C
(11 - 14V)
• Idle speed
7 - 12V
D
6 L/OR [Engine is running]
rising
E
PBIB3542E
F
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
24 BR/Y
(Self shut-off)
G
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
tion switch OFF
H
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) I

BANK 2
TBWT1624E
CAUTION:

TER- A
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
EC
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
• Idle speed
7 - 12V
C
7 Y/R [Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition D
rising
E
PBIB3542E
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V F
24 BR/Y
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
• More than a few seconds after turning igni- G
(11 - 14V)
tion switch OFF
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
H

I
1.CHECK EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL MAGNET RETARDER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. J
M
PBIB3508E
1. Exhaust valve timing control magnet 2. Intake valve timing control solenoid 3. Intake valve timing control solenoid N
retarder (bank 2) harness connector O

4. Check voltage between exhaust valve timing control magnet
retarder terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB3468E

• Harness for open or short between exhaust valve timing control magnet retarder and IPDM E/R
3.CHECK EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROLMAGNET RETARDER OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR
OPEN AND SHORT
3. Checking harness continuity between exhaust valve timing control magnet retarder terminal 2 and ECM
terminal 6 (bank 1), 7 (bank 2).
Refer to Wiring Diagram

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL MAGNET RETARDER
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
5.REPLACE EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL MAGNET RETARDER
1. Replace malfunctioning exhaust valve timing control magnet retarder.
>> INSPECTION END

Refer to EC-134.
>> INSPECTION END

EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL MAGNET RETARDER


2. Check resistance between exhaust valve timing control magnet
retarder terminals 1and 2. A

3. If NG, replace exhaust valve timing control magnet retarder and EC
go to the next step.
C
PBIB3468E
D
EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL MAGNET RETARDER E

Refer to EM-44.

DTC P0101, P010B MAF SENSOR
The mass air flow sensor (1) is placed in the stream of intake air. It
measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire
intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the
hot wire is to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is
reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater
the heat loss.
Therefore, the electric current supplied to hot wire is changed to
maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The
ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change.
PBIA9559J

MAS A/F SE-B1
See EC-126.
MAS A/F SE-B2
CAL/LD VALUE (M/T)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,500 rpm 5% - 35%
• No load
MASS AIRFLOW (M/T)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,500 rpm 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/s
• No load

• Harness or connectors
EC
(The sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
A high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM
A) • Mass air flow sensor C
under light load driving condition.
• EVAP control system pressure
sensor
P0101 • Intake air temperature sensor
0101 • Harness or connectors D
(Bank 1) (The sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
A low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM un- • Intake air leaks
B) E
der heavy load driving condition. • Mass air flow sensor
sensor
Mass air flow sensor cir- • Intake air temperature sensor
cuit range/performance
F
problem • Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
A high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM G
A) • Mass air flow sensor
under light load driving condition.
sensor
P010B • Intake air temperature sensor H
010B • Harness or connectors
(Bank 2) (The sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
A low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM un- • Intake air leaks I
B)
der heavy load driving condition. • Mass air flow sensor
sensor
J
• Intake air temperature sensor
K
Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first.
If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at L
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
M
NOTE:
If engine will not start or stops soon, wait at least 10 seconds with engine stopped (Ignition switch ON) instead
of running engine at idle speed.
N
2. Run engine for at least 10 seconds at idle speed.
3. Check 1st trip DTC. O
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
P
NOTE:
Check vehicle specifications and VIN, then select the procedure to be performed. (Refer to the table below.)
Coupe model

Vehicle specification
Vehicle serial number Procedure
SRS side air bags
Up to 705587 B-a
—
From 705588 B-b
Up to 752588 B-a
×
From 752589 B-b
Roadster model
Procedure
Model year SRS side air bags
09MY × B-b
Procedure for Malfunction B-a

WITH CONSULT-III
If engine cannot be started, go to EC-194, "Diagnosis Procedure".
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Check the voltage of “MAS A/F SE-B1” and “MAS A/F SE-B2”
with “DATA MONITOR”.
4. Increases engine speed to about 4,000 rpm.
5. Monitor the linear voltage rise in response to engine speed
increases.
If NG, go to EC-194, "Diagnosis Procedure".
If OK, go to following step.
PBIB3457E
ENG SPEED More than 2,000 rpm

TP SEN 1-B1 More than 3 V
Shift lever Suitable position
Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine load) will help
Driving location
maintain the driving conditions required for this test.
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.

Procedure for Malfunction B-b A
WITH CONSULT-III
If engine cannot be started, go to EC-194, "Diagnosis Procedure". EC
3. Check the voltage of “MAS A/F SE-B1” and “MAS A/F SE-B2”
with “DATA MONITOR”. C
4. Increases engine speed to about 4,000 rpm.
5. Monitor the linear voltage rise in response to engine speed
increases.
If NG, go to EC-194, "Diagnosis Procedure". D
PBIB3457E
I

J
ENG SPEED More than 2,000 rpm
TP SEN 2-B1 More than 1 V K
L
Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine load) will help
Driving location
maintain the driving conditions required for this test.
M
CAUTION:
N
Overall Function Check INFOID:0000000004656275
O
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the mass air flow sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st trip
DTC might not be confirmed. P
With GST

3. Check the mass air flow sensor signal with Service $01.
4. Check for linear mass air flow sensor signal value rise in
response to increases to about 4,000 rpm in engine speed.
SEF534P

A
BANK 1
EC
P
TBWT1625E
CAUTION:

TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
ECM relay [Ignition switch: OFF]
24 BR/Y 0 - 1.5V
(Self shut-off) • For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF
Sensor ground
[Engine is running]
(bank1), Intake air tempera-
• Idle speed
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)

BANK 2
A
EC
TBWT1626E
P
CAUTION:

TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
24 BR/Y 0 - 1.5V
switch OFF
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
[Engine is running]
94 L/Y [Mass air flow sensor (bank • Warm-up condition 0V
2)] • Idle speed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
1.INSPECTION START
Which malfunction (A or B) is duplicated?
A or B
A >> GO TO 3.
B >> GO TO 2.
Check the following for connection.
• Air duct
• Vacuum hoses
• Intake air passage between air duct and intake manifold
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Reconnect the parts.
PBIB3560E

: Vehicle front

2. Loosen and retighten ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-142, "Ground Inspection". A
EC
D
PBIB3561E

(Passenger side view with dash side E
finisher removed)
: Vehicle front
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
G
4.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
H
PBIB3501E K
L
3. Check voltage between mass air flow sensor terminal 2 and
ground with CONSULT-III or tester. M

OK or NG N
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
O
PBIB1168E
5.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART P

• Harness connectors E108, M15
• Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and mass air flow sensor
• Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM

6.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between mass air flow sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 68 (bank 1), 94
(bank 2).

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
(bank 2).

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Check mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor) (bank 1).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor) (bank 1).
9.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
10.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning mass air flow sensor.
Refer to EC-134.
>> INSPECTION END

MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR

With CONSULT-III
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.

3. Connect CONSULT-III and select “DATA MONITOR” mode.
4. Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” and “MAS A/F SE-B2”, and check indication under the following conditions. A
Monitor item Condition Indication

EC
Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.) Approx. 0.4V
MAS A/F SE-B1 Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 0.8 - 1.1V
MAS A/F SE-B2 2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 1.4 - 1.7V C
Idle to about 4,000 rpm 0.8 - 1.1V to Approx. 2.4V*
*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about 4,000 rpm.
5. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following. D
a. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following.
• Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element E
• Improper specification of intake air system parts
b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 4 again. F
7. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again. G
8. Perform step 2 to 4 again.
9. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
H
Without CONSULT-III
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. I
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 77 [Mass air flow sensor
(bank 1) signal], 79 [Mass air flow sensor (bank 2) signal] and
ground. J
Condition Voltage V
Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.) Approx. 0.4 K
Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating
0.8 - 1.1
temperature.)
2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to normal oper- L
1.4 - 1.7
ating temperature.) PBIB3470E
Idle to about 4,000 rpm 0.8 - 1.1 to Approx. 2.4*

*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about 4,000 rpm. M
4. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following.
N
• Improper specification of intake air system parts O
b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 and 3 again.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF. P
6. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again.
7. Perform step 2 and 3 again.


Refer to EM-16.

DTC P0102, P0103, P010C, P010D MAF SENSOR
A
The mass air flow sensor (1) is placed in the stream of intake air. It EC
measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire
intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the
hot wire is to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is
reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater C
the heat loss.
Therefore, the electric current supplied to hot wire is changed to
maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The D
ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change.
PBIA9559J E

MAS A/F SE-B1 G
See EC-126.
MAS A/F SE-B2
• Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral H
CAL/LD VALUE (M/T)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,500 rpm 5% - 35%
• No load
I
MASS AIRFLOW (M/T)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,500 rpm 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/s J
• No load

K
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
Trouble diagnosis L
name
P0102
0102 • Harness or connectors M
(Bank 1) Mass air flow sensor An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
P010C circuit low input to ECM. • Intake air leaks
010C • Mass air flow sensor
(Bank 2)
N
P0103
0103
(Bank 1) • Harness or connectors O
Mass air flow sensor An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
P010D circuit high input sent to ECM.
• Mass air flow sensor
010D
(Bank 2) P
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.

Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.

NOTE:
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0102, P010C
1. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds.

2. Check DTC.
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0103, P010D

2. Check DTC.
If DTC is not detected, go to next step.
5. Check DTC.

A
BANK 1
EC
P
TBWT1625E
CAUTION:

TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
24 BR/Y 0 - 1.5V
switch OFF
Sensor ground
[Engine is running]
(bank1), Intake air tempera-
• Idle speed
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)

BANK 2
A
EC
TBWT1626E
P
CAUTION:

TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
24 BR/Y 0 - 1.5V
switch OFF
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
[Engine is running]
94 L/Y [Mass air flow sensor (bank • Warm-up condition 0V
2)] • Idle speed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
1.INSPECTION START
Confirm the detected DTC.
Which DTC is detected?
P0102, P010C>>GO TO 2.
P0103, P010D>>GO TO 3.
Check the following for connection.
• Air duct
• Vacuum hoses
• Intake air passage between air duct and intake manifold
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Reconnect the parts.
PBIB3560E

: Vehicle front

2. Loosen and retighten ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-142, "Ground Inspection". A
EC
D
PBIB3561E

(Passenger side view with dash side E
finisher removed)
: Vehicle front
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
G
4.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
H
PBIB3501E K
L
3. Check voltage between mass air flow sensor terminal 2 and
ground with CONSULT-III or tester. M

OK or NG N
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
O
PBIB1168E

• Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and mass air flow sensor
• Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM

6.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
(bank 2).

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
(bank 2).

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
Refer to EC-134.
>> INSPECTION END


With CONSULT-III
4. Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” and “MAS A/F SE-B2”, and check indication under the following conditions.
Monitor item Condition Indication

Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.) Approx. 0.4V
MAS A/F SE-B1 Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 0.8 - 1.1V
MAS A/F SE-B2 2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 1.4 - 1.7V
Idle to about 4,000 rpm 0.8 - 1.1V to Approx. 2.4V*

• Crushed air ducts A
EC
b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 4 again.
C
8. Perform step 2 to 4 again.
9. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor. D
Without CONSULT-III
E
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 77 [Mass air flow sensor
(bank 1) signal], 79 [Mass air flow sensor (bank 2) signal] and
ground. F
Condition Voltage V
G
Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.) Approx. 0.4
Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating
0.8 - 1.1
temperature.) H
2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to normal oper-
1.4 - 1.7
ating temperature.) PBIB3470E
Idle to about 4,000 rpm 0.8 - 1.1 to Approx. 2.4* I

a. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following. J
• Uneven dirt of air cleaner element K
b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 and 3 again.
If OK, go to next step. L
7. Perform step 2 and 3 again. M
N
Refer to EM-16.
O

DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
The intake air temperature sensor is built-into mass air flow sensor
(1). The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal
to the ECM.
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases in response to the temperature rise.
NOTE:
ECM uses only the intake air temperature sensor (bank 1) for engine
control and self-diagnosis.
It does not use the intake air temperature sensor (bank 2)
PBIA9559J
<Reference data>
Intake air temperature

Voltage* V Resistance kΩ
°C (°F)
25 (77) 3.3 1.800 - 2.200
80 (176) 1.2 0.283 - 0.359
*: This data is reference values and is measured between ECM terminal 67 (Intake
air temperature sensor) (bank 1) and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output SEF012P
voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor.

Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Trouble diagnosis
name
P0112 Intake air tempera-
An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
0112 ture sensor circuit
sent to ECM. • Harness or connectors
(Bank 1) low input
P0113 Intake air tempera- • Intake air temperature sensor
An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
0113 ture sensor circuit
sent to ECM.
(Bank 1) high input
NOTE:


EC
TBWT1627E
P


PBIB3560E

: Vehicle front

PBIB3561E

finisher removed)
: Vehicle front
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor) (bank 1) harness connector.
PBIB3501E

3. Check voltage between mass air flow sensor (with intake air
temperature sensor) (bank 1) terminal 5 and ground with CON- A
SULT-III or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power C
in harness or connectors.
PBIB1169E
3.CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT D

E
3. Check harness continuity between mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor) (bank 1) ter-
minal 6 and ECM terminal 68.
F
G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
H
OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT J
Refer to EC-134.
K
>> INSPECTION END
L
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Check resistance between mass air flow sensor (with intake air
M
temperature sensor) (bank 1) (1) terminals 5 and 6 under the fol-
lowing conditions.
Intake air temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ

N
25 (77) 1.800 - 2.200

2. If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature O
sensor) (bank 1).
PBIA9559J
P

SEF012P

Refer to EM-16.

DTC P0116 ECT SENSOR
A
The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor is used to detect the EC

engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal
from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine
coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is
sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of C
the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.
SEF594K E
<Reference data>
F
°C (°F)
–10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4 G
20 (68) 3.5 2.37 - 2.63
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
H
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 71 (Engine
SEF012P
coolant temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION: I
J
NOTE:
If DTC P0116 is displayed with P0117 or P0118, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0117, K
P0118. Refer to EC-216.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause L
Engine coolant temperature signal from engine
Engine coolant tempera- • Harness or connectors
P0116 coolant temperature sensor does not fluctuate,
ture sensor circuit range/ (High or low resistance in the circuit)
0116
performance
even when some time has passed after starting
• Engine coolant temperature sensor
M
the engine with pre-warming up condition.

N
NOTE:
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. O
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, do not add fuel.
P
2. Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm for more than10 minutes.
3. Move the vehicle to a cool place, then stop engine and turn ignition switch OFF.
4. Check resistance between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminals 4 and 5.
5. Soak the vehicle until the resistance between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminals 4 and 5
becomes 0.5 kΩ higher than the value measured before soaking.
CAUTION:
Never turn ignition switch ON during soaking time.

NOTE:
Soak time changes depending on ambient air temperature. It may take several hours.
6. Start engine and let it idle for 5 minutes.

PBIB3560E

: Vehicle front

PBIB3561E

finisher removed)
: Vehicle front
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
Refer to EC-138.
Refer to EC-218, "Wiring Diagram". A
>> INSPECTION END

EC
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

C
1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor
terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.
D
F
PBIB2005E
<Reference data> G
Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ

20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 H
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
I
2. If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
SEF012P J
K
Refer to EC-221.
L

DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor is used to detect the

engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal
from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine
coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is
sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of
the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.
SEF594K
<Reference data>

°C (°F)
−10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4
20 (68) 3.5 2.37 - 2.63
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
*: This data is reference values and is measured between ECM terminal 71 (Engine
SEF012P
CAUTION:
Trouble Diagnosis
DTC No. DTC Detecting Condition Possible Cause
Name
Engine coolant tem-
P0117 An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
perature sensor cir-
0117 sent to ECM. • Harness or connectors
cuit low input
Engine coolant tem- • Engine coolant temperature sensor
P0118 An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
perature sensor cir-
0118 sent to ECM.
cuit high input
FAIL-SAFE MODE

Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode A

Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the following condition.
CONSULT-III displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.
Engine coolant temperature decided EC
Condition
(CONSULT-III display)
Engine coolant temper- Just as ignition switch is turned ON or START 40°C (104°F)
ature sensor circuit Approx 4 minutes or more after engine starting 80°C (176°F) C
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
Except as shown above
(Depends on the time)
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates while D
engine is running.
DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000004656297 E
NOTE:
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. F

G
2. Check DTC.

TBWT1629E


A
EC
PBIB3560E D

: Vehicle front E
2. Loosen and retighten ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-142, "Ground Inspection". F
I
PBIB3561E

(Passenger side view with dash side J
finisher removed)
: Vehicle front
K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. L
2.CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connec-
tor (1). M
: Vehicle front
N
PBIB3503E
P

3. Check voltage between engine coolant temperature sensor ter-
minal 1 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
PBIB0080E
3.CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE sensor terminal 2 and ECM ter-
minal 84.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
Refer to EC-134.
>> INSPECTION END


PBIB2005E

<Reference data>
A
Engine coolant
Resistance kΩ
temperature °C (°F)
20 (68) 2.37 - 2.63 EC
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
C
SEF012P
D
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR E

Refer to CO-27.

DTC P0122, P0123, P0227, P0228 TP SENSOR
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor,

throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a
kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into
output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition,
these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle
valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the
current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the
ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve
opening angle properly in response to driving condition.
PBIB0145E

TP SEN 1-B1 Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V
TP SEN 1-B2
(Engine stopped)
TP SEN 2-B1* Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
• Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
TP SEN 2-B2*
*: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal.

NOTE:
If DTC P0122, P0123, P0227 or P0228 is displayed with DTC P0643, first perform the trouble diagnosis
for DTC P0643.
Refer to EC-482.
P0122
0122
(Bank 1) Throttle position sensor An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor
P0227 2 circuit low input 2 is sent to ECM.
(Bank 2) (TP sensor 2 circuit is open or shorted.)
P0123 • Electric throttle control actuator
0123 (TP sensor 2)
(Bank 1) Throttle position sensor An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor
P0228 2 circuit high input 2 is sent to ECM.
0228
(Bank 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode

The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.

A
NOTE:
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8V at idle.
C
1. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
2. Check DTC.
3. If DTC is detected, go to EC-227, "Diagnosis Procedure". D
E
Bank 1

TBWT1630E
CAUTION:

TER- A
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
EC
• Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
Throttle position sensor 1 • Accelerator pedal: Fully released C
30 Y
• Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
D
• Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V E
34 L
• Engine stopped F
More than 0.36V
G
Sensor power supply
44 B [Throttle position sensor [Ignition switch: ON] 5V H
(bank 1)]
Bank 2
I

TBWT1631E
CAUTION:

TER- A
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
EC
• Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
31 L/G
• Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
D
• Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V E
35 L/Y
More than 0.36V
Sensor power supply
G
(bank 2)]
48 W/L [Throttle position sensor • Warm-up condition 0V H

I

J
K
PBIB3560E N

: Vehicle front O

PBIB3561E

finisher removed)
: Vehicle front
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
PBIB3504E

(bank 1) (bank 2)

3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal 6 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
PBIB3471E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness connectors.
3.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

3. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 3 and ECM terminal 40 (bank
1) or 48 (bank 2). A
Continuity should exist. EC

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. C
4.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
D
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 34 (bank 1) or 35 (bank 2) and electric throttle control
actuator terminal 5.
E
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
G
5.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
I
6.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1. Replace malfunctioning electric throttle control actuator.
2. Perform EC-76, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". J
>> INSPECTION END K

Refer to EC-134.
L
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection INFOID:0000000004656308 M
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. N
O
4. Set shift lever to D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) position.

5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 30 [TP sensor 1 (bank 1) signal], 31 [TP sensor 1 (bank 2) signal],
34 [TP sensor 2 (bank 1) signal], 35 [TP sensor 2 (bank 2) signal] and ground under the following condi-
tions.
PBIB3472E
Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage
30 [TP sensor 1 (bank 1)] Fully released More than 0.36V

31 [TP sensor 1 (bank 2)] Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
34 [TP sensor 2 (bank 1)] Fully released Less than 4.75V

35 [TP sensor 2 (bank 2)] Fully depressed More than 0.36V
6. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next step.
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

Refer to EM-18.

A
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine EC

coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the
ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the ther- C
mistor decreases as temperature increases.
SEF594K E
<Reference data>
F
Engine coolant
−10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4 G
20 (68) 3.5 2.37 - 2.63
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
H
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
SEF012P
CAUTION: I
J
NOTE:
If DTC P0125 is displayed with P0117 or P0118, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0117 or K
P0118.
Refer to EC-216.
L
• Voltage sent to ECM from the sensor is not
Insufficient engine cool- practical, even when some time has passed M
P0125 (High resistance in the circuit)
ant temperature for after starting the engine.
0125 • Engine coolant temperature sensor
closed loop fuel control • Engine coolant temperature is insufficient for
• Thermostat
closed loop fuel control.
N
CAUTION: O
Be careful not to overheat engine.
NOTE:
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. P
WITH CONSULT-III
3. Check that “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 10°C (50°F).
If it is above 10°C (50°F), the test result will be OK.
If it is below 10°C (50°F), go to following step.

4. Start engine and run it for 65 minutes at idle speed.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” increases to more than 10°C (50°F) within 65 minutes, stop engine because
the test result will be OK.
WITH GST

PBIB3560E

: Vehicle front

PBIB3561E

finisher removed)
: Vehicle front
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

3.CHECK THERMOSTAT OPERATION A
When the engine is cold [lower than 70°C (158°F)] condition, grasp lower radiator hose and confirm the engine
coolant does not flow.
OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace thermostat. Refer to CO-25.
4.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT C
Refer to EC-134.
Refer to EC-218, "Wiring Diagram".
D
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000004656314 E

1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor F
PBIB2005E I
<Reference data>
J
Engine coolant
Resistance kΩ
20 (68) 2.37 - 2.63 K
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
L
SEF012P
M
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR N

Refer to CO-27.

DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR
The intake air temperature sensor (1) is built into mass air flow sen-
sor. The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal
to the ECM.
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases in response to the temperature rise.
PBIA9559J
<Reference data>
Intake air temperature

°C (°F)
25 (77) 3.3 1.800 - 2.200
80 (176) 1.2 0.283 - 0.359
*: This data is reference values and is measured between ECM terminal 67 [Intake
air temperature sensor (bank 1)] and ground.
CAUTION:

Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is • Harness or connectors
P0127 Intake air temperature
sent to ECM, compared with the voltage signal (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
0127 too high
from engine coolant temperature sensor. • Intake air temperature sensor
NOTE:
CAUTION:
TESTING CONDITION:
This test may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road
test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-III
1. Wait until engine coolant temperature is less than 90°C (194°F)
a. Turn ignition switch ON.
b. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
c. Check the engine coolant temperature.
d. If the engine coolant temperature is not less than 90°C (194°F), turn ignition switch OFF and cool down
engine.
NOTE:
Perform the following steps before engine coolant temperature is above 90°C (194°F).

3. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. A
4. Start engine.
5. Hold vehicle speed at more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 100 consecutive seconds.
EC
WITH GST C
D
Models with VDC system, navigation system or telephone E
F
PBIB3560E
I
: Vehicle front J
2. Loosen and retighten ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-142, "Ground Inspection". K
N
PBIB3561E

(Passenger side view with dash side O
finisher removed)
: Vehicle front
P
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 3.
Refer to EC-134.
>> INSPECTION END

INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

1. Check resistance between mass air flow sensor (with intake air
temperature sensor) (bank 1) (1) terminals 5 and 6 under the fol-
lowing conditions.
Intake air temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ

25 (77) 1.800 - 2.200
2. If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature
sensor) (bank 1).
PBIA9559J
SEF012P

Refer to EM-16.

DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION
A
Engine coolant temperature has not risen enough to open the thermostat even though the engine has run long EC
enough.
This is due to a leak in the seal or the thermostat stuck open.
C
• Thermostat
The engine coolant temperature does not reach
P0128 • Leakage from sealing portion of thermo-
0128
Thermostat function to specified temperature even though the en-
stat
D
gine has run long enough.
• Engine coolant temperature sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000004656323 E
NOTE:
CAUTION:
TESTING CONDITION: G
• For best results, perform at ambient temperature of –10°C (14°F) or higher.
• For best results, perform at engine coolant temperature of –10°C (14°F) to 68°C (154°F).
WITH CONSULT-III H
1. Replace thermostat with new one. Refer to CO-25. Use only a genuine NISSAN thermostat as a replace-
ment. If an incorrect thermostat is used, the MIL may come on.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. I
3. Select “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
4. Check the indication of “COOLAN TEMP/S”.
If it is below 68°C (154°F), go to following step. J
If it is above 68°C (154°F), cool down the engine to less than 60°C (140°F), then go to next step.
5. Drive vehicle for 10 consecutive minutes under the following conditions.
K
VHCL SPEED SE 80 - 120 km/h (50 - 75 MPH)
7. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-237, "Diagnosis Procedure". L
WITH GST
M
1.CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR N

OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END O
P

PBIB2005E
<Reference data>
Engine coolant
Resistance kΩ
20 (68) 2.37 - 2.63
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
SEF012P

Refer to CO-27.

DTC P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1
A
The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar one-cell limit current sen- EC
sor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is composed an elec-
trode layer, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element.
The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor C
outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range.
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion layer at
the sensor cell. An electrode layer is applied voltage, and this current D
relative oxygen density in lean. Also this current relative hydrocar-
bon density in rich.
Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to indicate air fuel ratio by this PBIB3559E E
electrode layer of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the
sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of about 800°C
(1,472°F).
F
PBIB3354E
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000004656328 I

J
A/F SEN1 (B1) Maintaining engine speed at
• Engine: After warming up Fluctuates around 2.2V
A/F SEN1 (B2) 2,000 rpm
K
To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 L
signal fluctuates according to fuel feedback control.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible Cause
M
The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sen-
P0130 A) sor 1 signal is constantly in the range other than ap-
0130 prox. 2.2V.
(Bank 1) The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sen-
N
B) • Harness or connectors
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 sor 1 signal is constantly approx. 2.2V. (The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open
circuit The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sen- or shorted.)
A) sor 1 signal is constantly in the range other than ap- • Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 O
P0150
0150 prox. 2.2V.
(Bank 2) The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sen-
B)
sor 1 signal is constantly approx. 2.2V. P

If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.
NOTE:

TESTING CONDITION:

2. Let engine idle for 2 minutes.
CAUTION:
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Check “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” indication.
If the indication is constantly approx. 2.2V and does not fluctuates, go to EC-244, "Diagnosis Procedure".
If the indication fluctuates around 2.2V, go to next step.
4. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276” (for DTC P0130) or “A/F SEN1 (B2) P1286” (for DTC P0150) of “A/F
SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
5. Touch “START”.
6. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-III screen.
ENG SPEED 1,100 - 3,200 rpm

VHCL SPEED SE More than 64 km/h (40 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL 1.0 - 8.0 msec
Shift lever D position (A/T)
5th position (M/T)
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 20 seconds, retry from step 2.
7. Release accelerator pedal fully.
NOTE:
Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal.
8. Make sure that “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”.
If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, retry from step 6.
9. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULT”.
If “NG” is displayed, go to EC-244, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the A/F sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC
might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
2. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in the suitable gear position.
3. Set shift lever to D position (A/T) or 5th position (M/T), then release the accelerator pedal fully until the
vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH).
NOTE:
Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for five times.
5. Stop the vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF.
6. Wait at least 10 seconds and restart engine.
7. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for five times.
8. Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle.
9. Make sure that no 1st trip DTC is displayed.
If the 1st trip DTC is displayed, go to EC-244, "Diagnosis Procedure".

A
BANK 1
EC
P
TBWT1632E
CAUTION:

TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
2.9 - 8.8V
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
(bank 1)
gine)
PBIB3538E


BANK 2
A
EC
TBWT1633E
P
CAUTION:

TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
2.9 - 8.8
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
(bank 2)
gine)
PBIB3538E


PBIB3560E

: Vehicle front

PBIB3561E


finisher removed)
: Vehicle front
EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
D
PBIB3516E
G
nector nector H
: Vehicle front

I
3. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 4 and ground with

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
K
NG >> GO TO 3.
L
PBIB3308E

• 15A fuse
• Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse N

4.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT O
3. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. P
A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal

1 57
Bank1
2 61

1 65
Bank 2
2 66

4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Bank 1 Bank 2
A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal
1 57 1 65
2 61 2 66

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
Perform EC-134.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
6.REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
Replace malfunctioning A/F sensor 1.
CAUTION:
• Discard any A/F sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
• Before installing new A/F sensor, clean exhaust system threads (using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12) and approved anti-seize lubricant.
>> INSPECTION END


Refer to EM-23.

A
(1,472°F).
F
PBIB3354E

J
A/F SEN1 (B2) 2,000 rpm
K
M
P0131
(Bank 1) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 • The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F (The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or
P0151 circuit low voltage sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 0V. shorted.) N
0151 • Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
(Bank 2)
O
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at P
CAUTION:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-III

If the indication is constantly approx. 0V, go to EC-252, "Diagnosis Procedure".
If the indication is not constantly approx. 0V, go to next step.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then restart engine.
5. Drive and accelerate vehicle to more than 40 km/h (25 MPH) within 20 seconds after restarting engine.
6. Maintain the following conditions for about 20 consecutive seconds.

NOTE:
• Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising.
• If this procedure is not completed within 1 minute after restarting engine at step 4, return to step
4.
8. If 1st trip DTC is displayed, go to EC-252, "Diagnosis Procedure".
WITH GST

A
BANK 1
EC
P
TBWT1632E
CAUTION:

TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
2.9 - 8.8V
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
(bank 1)
gine)
PBIB3538E


BANK 2
A
EC
TBWT1633E
P
CAUTION:

TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
2.9 - 8.8
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
(bank 2)
gine)
PBIB3538E


2. Loosen and retighten ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-142, "Ground Inspection" .
PBIB3560E

: Vehicle front

PBIB3561E


finisher removed)
: Vehicle front
EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
D
PBIB3516E
G
nector nector H
: Vehicle front

I

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
K
NG >> GO TO 3.
L
PBIB3308E

• 15A fuse


1 57
Bank1
2 61

1 65
Bank 2
2 66

Bank 1 Bank 2
1 57 1 65
2 61 2 66

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
Perform EC-134 .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
CAUTION:
>> INSPECTION END


Refer to EM-23 .

A
(1,472°F).
F
PBIB3354E

J
A/F SEN1 (B2) 2,000 rpm
K
M
P0132
(Bank 1) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 • The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F (The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or
P0152 circuit high voltage sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 5V. shorted.) N
(Bank 2)
O
NOTE:
CAUTION:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-III

If the indication is constantly approx. 5V, go to EC-260, "Diagnosis Procedure".
If the indication is not constantly approx. 5V, go to next step.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then restart engine.
5. Drive and accelerate vehicle to more than 40 km/h (25 MPH) within 20 seconds after restarting engine.
6. Maintain the following conditions for about 20 consecutive seconds.

NOTE:
• Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising.
• If this procedure is not completed within 1 minute after restarting engine at step 4, return to step
4.
8. If 1st trip DTC is displayed, go to EC-260, "Diagnosis Procedure".
WITH GST

A
BANK 1
EC
P
TBWT1632E
CAUTION:

TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
2.9 - 8.8V
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
(bank 1)
gine)
PBIB3538E


BANK 2
A
EC
TBWT1633E
P
CAUTION:

TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
2.9 - 8.8
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
(bank 2)
gine)
PBIB3538E


PBIB3560E

: Vehicle front

PBIB3561E


finisher removed)
: Vehicle front
EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
D
PBIB3516E
G
nector nector H
: Vehicle front

I

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
K
NG >> GO TO 3.
L
PBIB3308E

• 15A fuse


1 57
Bank1
2 61

1 65
Bank 2
2 66

Bank 1 Bank 2
1 57 1 65
2 61 2 66

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
Perform EC-134 .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
CAUTION:
>> INSPECTION END


Refer to EM-23 .

A
(1,472°F).
F
PBIB3354E

J
A/F SEN1 (B2) 2,000 rpm
K
To judge the malfunction of A/F sensor 1, this diagnosis measures response time of the A/F signal computed L
by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal. The time is compensated by engine operating (speed and load), fuel
feedback control constant, and the A/F sensor 1 temperature index. Judgment is based on whether the com-
pensated time (the A/F signal cycling time index) is inordinately long or not.
M
P0133 • Harness or connectors
0133 (The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or N
(Bank 1) shorted.)
• Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
• The response of the A/F signal computed by • Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 O
ECM from A/F sensor 1 signal takes more than • Fuel pressure
P0153 circuit slow response
the specified time. • Fuel injector
0153 • Intake air leaks
(Bank 2) • Exhaust gas leaks
P
• PCV valve
NOTE:

TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-III
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no load.
5. Select “A/F SEN1(B1) P1278/P1279” (for DTC P0133) or “A/F SEN1(B2) P1288/P1289” (for DTC P0153)
of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
If “COMPLETED” appears on CONSULT-III screen, go to step 10.
If “COMPLETED” does not appear on CONSULT-III screen, go to the following step.
7. After perform the following procedure, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-III screen.
a. Increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 5,000 rpm and keep it for 10 seconds.
b. Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about 10 seconds.
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 10 seconds, refer to EC-126.
8. Wait for about 20 seconds at idle at under the condition that “TESTING” is displayed on the CONSULT-III
screen.
9. Make sure that “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”.
If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, refer to EC-126.
10. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULT”.
If “NG” is displayed, go to EC-268, "Diagnosis Procedure".
WITH GST
3. Calculate the total value of “Short term fuel trim” and “Long term fuel trim” indications.
Make sure that the total percentage should be within ±15%.
If OK, go to the following step.
If NG, check the following.
• Intake air leaks
• Exhaust gas leaks
• Incorrect fuel pressure
• Lack of fuel
• Fuel injector
• Incorrect PCV hose connection
• PCV valve
5. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no load.
7. Increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 5,000 rpm and keep it for 10 seconds.
8. Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about 1 minute.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-268, "Diagnosis Procedure".

A
BANK 1
EC
P
TBWT1632E
CAUTION:

TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
2.9 - 8.8V
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
(bank 1)
gine)
PBIB3538E


BANK 2
A
EC
TBWT1633E
P
CAUTION:

TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
2.9 - 8.8
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
(bank 2)
gine)
PBIB3538E


PBIB3560E

: Vehicle front

PBIB3561E


finisher removed)
: Vehicle front
EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.RETIGHTEN AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
Loosen and retighten the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. Refer to EM-23, "Removal and Installation"
D
PBIB3517E
G
1. A/F sensor 1 (bank 1) 2. A/F sensor 1 (bank 2)
: Vehicle front
H
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK I
1. Start engine and run it at idle.

2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst 1.
J
PBIB1922E
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
N
4.CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG O
OK >> GO TO 5.
5.CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA P
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR” or “START”.
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172 or P0175 detected? Is it difficult to start engine?

Without CONSULT-III
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor (bank 1) harness connector.
PBIB3501E
4. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.

5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
6. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.
7. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-46, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information".
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172 or P0175 detected? Is it difficult to start engine?
Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-306 or EC-317.
No >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
PBIB3516E
1. A/F sensor 1 harness connector 2. A/F sensor 1 harness connector

(bank 1) (bank 2)
: Vehicle front

CONSULT-III or tester. A

OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
C
PBIB3308E

E
• 15A fuse
• Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse
F
8.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. H

1 57 I
Bank1
2 61
1 65
Bank 2 J
2 66
Continuity should exist. K

L
Bank 1 Bank 2
1 57 1 65 M
2 61 2 66
N
OK or NG O
OK >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER P
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning A/F sensor 1.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
11.CHECK PCV VALVE
Refer to EC-42.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Repair or replace PCV valve.
Perform EC-134.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
CAUTION:
>> INSPECTION END


Refer to EM-23.

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
A
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst 1, monitors the EC
oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the sig-
nal from the heated oxygen sensor 2. C
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates volt-
age from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner condi-
tions. D
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for
engine control operation.
SEF327R E

• Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions G
are met
HO2S2 (B1)
- Engine: After warming up 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
HO2S2 (B2)
at idle for 1 minute under no load H
are met
HO2S2 MNTR(B1)
- Engine: After warming up LEAN ←→ RICH I
HO2S2 MNTR(B2)
at idle for 1 minute under no load

J
The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time

between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. The oxy- K
gen storage capacity before the three way catalyst 1 causes the
longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen
sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the maximum voltage of the sensor
is sufficiently high during the various driving condition such as fuel- L
cut.
SEF259VA
P0137 O
0137 (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
(Bank 1) Heated oxygen sensor 2 The maximum voltage from the sensor is not • Heated oxygen sensor 2
P0157 circuit low voltage reached to the specified voltage. • Fuel pressure P
0157 • Fuel injector
(Bank 2) • Intake air leaks
NOTE:

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
If DTC confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
WITH CONSULT-III
TESTING CONDITION:
For better results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30 °C (32 to 86 °F).
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
6. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C (158°F).
If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F).
7. Open engine hood.
8. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P1147” (for DTC P0137) or “HO2S2 (B2) P1167” (for DTC P0157) of “HO2S2” in
“DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
9. Start engine and following the instruction of CONSULT-III.
NOTE:
It will take at most 10 minutes until “COMPLETED” is displayed.
10. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-278, "Diagnosis Procedure".
If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following.
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle).
b. Return to step 1.
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a 1st
trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 76 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 80 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and
ground.
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be above 0.68V at least once during this
procedure.
If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not nec-
essary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or
check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D
position (A/T), 4th gear position (M/T).
The voltage should be above 0.68V at least once during this PBIB3473E
procedure.

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
A
BANK 1
EC
P
TBWT1634E
CAUTION:

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
0 - 14V
[Engine is running]
17 P
PBIB3545E

[Engine is running]
(bank 1)
Sensor ground
ture sensor)

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
BANK 2
A
EC
TBWT1635E
P
CAUTION:

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
0 - 14V
[Engine is running]
33 PU/W
PBIB3545E

[Engine is running]
(bank 2)
Sensor ground
ture sensor)

PBIB3560E

: Vehicle front


DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
EC
PBIB3561E
D
finisher removed)
E
: Vehicle front
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. F
2.CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
G
With CONSULT-III
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. H
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine? I
Without CONSULT-III
J
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor (bank 1) harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 sec-
onds at idle speed.
PBIB3501E
N
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor (bank 1) harness connector. O
P
Is it difficult to start engine?
Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171or P0174. Refer to EC-306.
No >> GO TO 3.

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
3.CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
PBIB3502E
harness connector
harness connector
: Vehicle front
4. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 1 and ECM terminal 84.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P0137 76 4 1
P0157 80 4 2

Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P0137 76 4 1
P0157 80 4 2

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
5.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 A

OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT C
Refer to EC-134.
D
>> INSPECTION END
E
With CONSULT-III
F
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. G
6. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item H
with CONSULT-III.
7. Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
I
PBIB3458E
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.68V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%. L
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.18V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION:
• Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 M
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
• Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
N
Without CONSULT-III
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. O
5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 76 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 80 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and P
ground.

DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2
at least 10 times.
procedure.
If the voltage is above 0.68V at step 6, step 7 is not neces-
sary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or
The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this PBIB3473E
procedure.
CAUTION:
• Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7

Refer to EM-23.

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
A
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst 1, monitors the EC
nal from the heated oxygen sensor 2. C
tions. D
SEF327R E

• Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions G
are met
HO2S2 (B1) 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 -
HO2S2 (B2) 1.0V
idle for 1 minute under no load H
are met
HO2S2 MNTR(B1)
- Engine: After warming up LEAN ←→ RICH I
HO2S2 MNTR(B2)
On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000004656367 J
The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/
F) sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity of the three way catalyst 1 causes the longer switching time.
K
MALFUNCTION A
To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors
whether the voltage is unusually high during the various driving con-
dition such as fuel-cut. L
N
PBIB1848E
O
MALFUNCTION B

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors
whether the minimum voltage of sensor is sufficiently low during the
various driving condition such as fuel-cut.
PBIB2376E
An excessively high voltage from the sen-
0138 A) (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
sor is sent to ECM.
(Bank 1) • Heated oxygen sensor 2
Heated oxygen sensor 2 • Harness or connectors
P0158 circuit high voltage (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
The minimum voltage from the sensor is
0158 B) • Heated oxygen sensor 2
not reached to the specified voltage.
(Bank 2) • Fuel pressure
• Fuel injector

If DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.
NOTE:

4. Let engine idle for 2 minutes.
With CONSULT-III
TESTING CONDITION:
For better results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30 °C (32 to 86 °F).
5. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C (158°F).
7. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P1146” (for DTC P0138) or “HO2S2 (B2) P1166” (for DTC P0158) of “HO2S2” in
“DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
NOTE:

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle). A
EC

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a 1st C
With GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. D
E
ground.
F
at least 10 times.
The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this G
procedure.
essary. H
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or
position.
I
procedure.
J

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
BANK 1
TBWT1634E
CAUTION:

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
TER- A
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
EC
0 - 14V
[Engine is running]
lowing conditions are met. C
17 P
heater (bank 1) minute under no load. D
PBIB3545E

E
[Engine is running]
• Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quick- F
(bank 1)
and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 G
Sensor ground
(Heated oxygen sensor 2, [Engine is running] H
ture sensor)
I

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
BANK 2
TBWT1635E
CAUTION:

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
TER- A
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
EC
0 - 14V
[Engine is running]
33 PU/W
PBIB3545E

E
[Engine is running]
(bank 2)
Sensor ground
ture sensor)
I
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A J

K
L
PBIB3560E O

: Vehicle front P

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
PBIB3561E

finisher removed)
: Vehicle front
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
PBIB3502E
harness connector
harness connector
: Vehicle front


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
Terminals A
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P0138 76 4 1
EC
P0158 80 4 2
Continuity should exist. C

D
Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
E
P0138 76 4 1
P0158 80 4 2
F
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK HO2S2 CONNECTOR FOR WATER H
Check connectors for water.

I
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. J
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
5.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. L
Refer to EC-134. M
>> INSPECTION END

N
O
P

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
PBIB3560E

: Vehicle front

PBIB3561E

finisher removed)
: Vehicle front
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
Without CONSULT-III
onds at idle speed.

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
EC
PBIB3501E
D
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor (bank 1) harness connector. E
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. F
Yes or No G
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-317.
No >> GO TO 3.
H
2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. I
L
PBIB3502E
harness connector M
harness connector
: Vehicle front N
Refer to Wiring Diagram. O

5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. P
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P0138 76 4 1
P0158 80 4 2

Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P0138 76 4 1
P0158 80 4 2

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
Refer to EC-134.
>> INSPECTION END


With CONSULT-III
6. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item
with CONSULT-III.

DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
A
EC
PBIB3458E
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.68V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%. D
CAUTION:
• Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 E
F
Without CONSULT-III
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. G
5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 76 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 80 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and H
ground.
at least 10 times. I
procedure. J
sary.
check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D K
procedure. L
CAUTION:
• Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 M
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. N
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 O

Refer to EM-23.

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst 1, monitors the
nal from the heated oxygen sensor 2.
tions.
SEF327R

are met
HO2S2 (B1)
- Engine: After warming up 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
HO2S2 (B2)
are met
HO2S2 MNTR(B1)
- Engine: After warming up LEAN ←→ RICH
HO2S2 MNTR(B2)
The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time

between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. The oxy-
gen storage capacity before the three way catalyst 1 causes the
longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen
sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the switching response of the sen-
sor's voltage is faster than specified during the various driving condi-
tion such as fuel-cut.
SEF302U
0139 (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
(Bank 1) Heated oxygen sensor 2 It takes more time for the sensor to respond be- • Heated oxygen sensor 2
P0159 circuit slow response tween rich and lean than the specified time. • Fuel pressure
0159 • Fuel injector
(Bank 2) • Intake air leaks
NOTE:

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. A
WITH CONSULT-III
TESTING CONDITION:
For better results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30 °C (32 to 86 °F). EC
C
5. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C (158°F). D
6. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P0139” or “HO2S2 (B2) P0159” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with
CONSULT-III.
E
NOTE:
F
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle). G
Overall Function Check INFOID:0000000004656378 H
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a 1st
I
WITH GST
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. J
K
ground.
at least 10 times. L
A change of voltage should be more than 0.24V for 1 sec-
ond during this procedure. M
essary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or N
A change of voltage should be more than 0.24V for 1 sec- PBIB3473E
ond during this procedure. O

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
BANK 1
TBWT1634E
CAUTION:

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
TER- A
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
EC
0 - 14V
[Engine is running]
17 P
PBIB3545E

E
[Engine is running]
(bank 1)
Sensor ground
ture sensor)
I

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
BANK 2
TBWT1635E
CAUTION:

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
TER- A
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
EC
0 - 14V
[Engine is running]
33 PU/W
PBIB3545E

E
[Engine is running]
(bank 2)
Sensor ground
ture sensor)
I
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS J

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. K
N
PBIB3560E
1. Body ground E17 2. Body ground E43 3. Body ground B102 O

: Vehicle front
Models without VDC system, navigation system and telephone P


DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
PBIB3561E

finisher removed)
: Vehicle front
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected?
Without CONSULT-III
onds at idle speed.
PBIB3501E
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor (bank 1) harness connector.
Yes or No
No >> GO TO 3.

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
3.CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
EC
PBIB3502E
E
harness connector
4. Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1) F
harness connector
: Vehicle front
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector. G

H
I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
J
Refer to Wiring Diagram. K
Terminals
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor L
P0139 76 4 1
P0159 80 4 2
M

2. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. N
Terminals O
DTC Bank
ECM Sensor
P0139 76 4 1
P0159 80 4 2
P

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
Refer to EC-134.
>> INSPECTION END


With CONSULT-III
6. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item
with CONSULT-III.
PBIB3458E
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.68V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
CAUTION:
• Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
Without CONSULT-III
ground.

DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
at least 10 times. A
procedure.
EC
sary.
check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D C
procedure. D
CAUTION:
• Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 E
F
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 G

Refer to EM-23.

DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensors 1. The
ECM calculates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical
ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too lean.), the
ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic).

Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 Fuel injection control Fuel injector
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
P0171 • Intake air leaks
(Bank 1) • Fuel injector
• Fuel injection system does not operate properly.
Fuel injection system too • Exhaust gas leaks
• The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too
P0174 lean • Incorrect fuel pressure
large. (The mixture ratio is too lean.)
0174 • Lack of fuel
(Bank 2) • Mass air flow sensor
• Incorrect PCV hose connection
NOTE:
Coupe model
Vehicle serial number Procedure
SRS side air bags
Up to 705587 A
—
From 705588 B
Up to 752588 A
×
From 752589 B
Roadster model
×: Applicable
Procedure
09MY × B
PROCEDURE A
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-III
3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CON-
SULT-III.
5. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.

The 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC- A
313, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NOTE:
If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing the following procedure is advised.
EC
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
b. Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
c. Drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 minutes. C
Refer to the table below.
The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following con-
ditions should be satisfied at the same time. D
Engine speed Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm
E
Vehicle speed Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH)
When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F),
Engine coolant temperature (T) T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F).
F
condition When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F),
T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F).
7. If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system has a malfunction, too. G
8. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-313, "Diagnosis Procedure".
If engine does not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually.
WITH GST H
I
L
PBIB3501E
1. Mass air flow sensor (with intake air 2. Mass air flow sensor (with intake air M

N
6. Select Service $03 with GST. Make sure DTC P0102 is detected.
7. Select Service $04 with GST and erase the DTC P0102. O
9. Select Service $07 with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 should be detected at this stage, if a mal-
function exists. If so, go to EC-313, "Diagnosis Procedure". P
NOTE:
b. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 min-
utes. Refer to the table below.

ditions should be satisfied at the same time.
10. If it is difficult to start engine at step 8, the fuel injection system has a malfunction.
PROCEDURE B
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-III
SULT-III.
5. Start engine again and le it idle for at least 5 minutes.
The 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-
NOTE:
c. Drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 minutes.
7. If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system has a malfunction, too.
WITH GST

EC
PBIB3501E
D
4. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds. E

7. Select Service $04 with GST and erase the DTC P0102. F
G
function exists. If so, go to EC-313, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NOTE:
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. H
b. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 min-
utes. Refer to the table below.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible. I
J
K
T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F). L
If engine does not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually. M

BANK 1
TBWT1636E
CAUTION:

TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
2.9 - 8.8V
C
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
(bank 1) D
gine)
PBIB3538E
E
F
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running] G
• Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at H
idle.
81 R/B Fuel injector No. 3 PBIB3555E

86 W/B Fuel injector No. 5 I
89 G/Y Fuel injector No. 1 BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
J
[Engine is running]
K
PBIB3556E

BANK 2
TBWT1638E
CAUTION:

TER- A
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
EC
2.9 - 8.8
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition C
A/F sensor 1 heater
(bank 2)
gine)
D
PBIB3538E

[Ignition switch: ON] 1.8V E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
F
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed G
NOTE:
idle.
H
82 L/R Fuel injector No. 6 PBIB3555E
90 Y/R Fuel injector No. 4 BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V) I
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: 2,000 rpm J
PBIB3556E K
L
1.CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK
2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst 1. M
PBIB1922E
P
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
1. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
2. Check PCV hose connection.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect corresponding A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
PBIB3516E
1. A/F sensor 1 harness connector 2. A/F sensor 1 harness connector

(bank 1) (bank 2)
: Vehicle front


1 57
Bank 1
2 61
1 65
Bank 2
2 66

Bank 1 Bank 2
1 57 1 65
2 61 2 66

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-78, "Fuel Pressure Check".
2. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-78, "Fuel Pressure Check".

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5. A
EC
• Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-639.)
• Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-78, "Fuel Pressure Check")
• Fuel lines (Refer to FL-3, "Checking Fuel Line".)
• Fuel filter for clogging C
>> Repair or replace.

6.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR D
With CONSULT-III
1. Install all removed parts. E
2. Start engine and warm it up normal temperature.
3. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling F

7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
With GST G
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Start engine and warm it up normal temperature.
3. Check mass air flow sensor signal in Service $01 with GST. H
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or J
ground. Refer to EC-186.
7.CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR
K
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop. L
Without CONSULT-III
2. Listen to each fuel injector operating sound. M
Clicking sound should be heard.

OK or NG N
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for FUEL INJECTOR, refer to
EC-634. O
PBIB3332E P
8.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR
2. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle.
3. Disconnect all fuel injector harness connectors.
4. Remove fuel injector gallery assembly. Refer to EM-35.
Keep fuel hose and all fuel injectors connected to fuel injector gallery.
5. For DTC P0171, reconnect fuel injector harness connectors on bank 1.

For DTC P0174, reconnect fuel injector harness connectors on bank 2.
6. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
7. Prepare pans or saucers under each fuel injector.
8. Crank engine for about 3 seconds.
For DTC P0171, make sure that fuel sprays out from fuel injec-
tors on bank 1.
For DTC P0174, make sure that fuel sprays out from fuel injec-
tors on bank 2.
Fuel should be sprayed evenly for each fuel injector.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace fuel injectors from which fuel does not spray
PBIB1726E
out. Always replace O-ring with new ones.
Refer to EC-134.
>> INSPECTION END

A
With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the EC
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensors 1. The
ECM calculates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical
ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too rich.), the C
ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic).
Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator D

Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 Fuel injection control Fuel injector
E
P0172
0172 • Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 F
(Bank 1) • Fuel injection system does not operate properly. • Fuel injector
Fuel injection system too
• The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too • Exhaust gas leaks
P0175 rich
large. (The mixture ratio is too rich.) • Incorrect fuel pressure
0175 • Mass air flow sensor G
(Bank 2)

H
NOTE:
Coupe model I
Vehicle serial number Procedure J
SRS side air bags
Up to 705587 A
—
From 705588 B K
Up to 752588 A
×
From 752589 B
L
Roadster model
×: Applicable
Vehicle specification M
Procedure
09MY × B
N
PROCEDURE A
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at O
WITH CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. P
SULT-III.

The 1st trip DTC P0172, P0175 should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists.
If so, go to EC-324, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NOTE:
c. Drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for a certain time.
8. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal.
If engine starts, go to EC-324, "Diagnosis Procedure". If engine does not start, remove ignition plugs and
check for fouling, etc.
WITH GST
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor (bank 1) harness connector. Then restart and run engine for at least 5
seconds at idle speed.
PBIB3501E
6. Select Service $04 with GST and erase the DTC P0102.
NOTE:
b. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for a certain
time. Refer to the table below.

ditions should be satisfied at the same time. A
Vehicle speed Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH) EC
C
D
E
PROCEDURE B
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. G
SULT-III. H
6. Check 1st trip DTC. I
The 1st trip DTC P0172, P0175 should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists.
If so, go to EC-324, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NOTE: J
b. Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. K
c. Drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for a certain time.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible. L
M
When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F), N
T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F). O
If engine starts, go to EC-324, "Diagnosis Procedure". If engine does not start, remove ignition plugs and P
WITH GST
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor (bank 1) harness connector. Then restart and run engine for at least 5
seconds at idle speed.

PBIB3501E
NOTE:
b. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for a certain

A
BANK 1
EC
P
TBWT1636E
CAUTION:

TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
2.9 - 8.8V
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
(bank 1)
gine)
PBIB3538E

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
NOTE:
idle.
81 R/B Fuel injector No. 3 PBIB3555E

86 W/B Fuel injector No. 5
89 G/Y Fuel injector No. 1 BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
PBIB3556E

BANK 2
A
EC
TBWT1638E
P
CAUTION:

TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
2.9 - 8.8
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
(bank 2)
gine)
PBIB3538E

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
NOTE:
idle.
82 L/R Fuel injector No. 6 PBIB3555E

90 Y/R Fuel injector No. 4 BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
PBIB3556E

2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst 1.
PBIB1922E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace. A
3.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
EC
2. Disconnect corresponding A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
E
PBIB3516E
1. A/F sensor 1 harness connector 2. A/F sensor 1 harness connector F

(bank 1) (bank 2)
: Vehicle front
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector. G

H
Bank 1 1 57
I
2 61
1 65
Bank 2
2 66 J

5. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. K
Bank 1 Bank 2
L
1 57 1 65
M
2 61 2 66
Continuity should not exist. N

OK or NG
O
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK FUEL PRESSURE P

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

NG >> GO TO 5.
• Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-78, "Fuel Pressure Check".)

With CONSULT-III
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal temperature.
3. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.

7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
With GST
3. Check mass air flow sensor signal in Service $01 with GST.

7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.
3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop.
Without CONSULT-III
2. Listen to each fuel injector operating sound.
Clickng sound should be heard.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
EC-634 .
PBIB3332E

1. Remove fuel injector assembly. Refer to EM-35.
2. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle.
3. Disconnect all fuel injector harness connectors.
5. Prepare pans or saucers under each fuel injectors.
6. Crank engine for about 3 seconds.
Make sure fuel does not drip from fuel injector.

OK or NG
OK (Does not drip.)>>GO TO 9. A
NG (Drips.)>>Replace the fuel injectors from which fuel is dripping. Always replace O-ring with new one.
EC
Refer to EC-134.
>> INSPECTION END C

DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR
The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel tempera-
ture inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from
the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temper-
ature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the
change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases as temperature increases.
PBIB1665E
<Reference data>
Fluid temperature Voltage* Resistance

°C (°F) V kΩ
20 (68) 3.5 2.3 - 2.7
50 (122) 2.2 0.79 - 0.90
*: This data is reference values and is measured between ECM terminal 106 (Fuel
tank temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:

Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is
Fuel tank temperature • Harness or connectors
P0181 sent to ECM, compared with the voltage signals
sensor circuit range/per- (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
0181 from engine coolant temperature sensor and in-
formance • Fuel tank temperature sensor
take air temperature sensor.
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-III
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to following step.
4. Check “COOLAN TEMP/S” value.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” is less than 60°C (140°F), the result will be OK.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 60°C (140°F), go to the following step.
5. Cool engine down until “COOLAN TEMP/S” is less than 60°C (140°F).
6. Wait at least 10 seconds.

WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-III” above. A
EC
TBWT1640E
1.CHECK DTC WITH “UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP.”

Refer to DI-44, "CONSULT-III Function (METER/M&A)".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Go to DI-19, "Fuel Level Sensor Signal Inspection".
2.CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness con-
nector.
PBIB1665E
3. Check voltage between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0932E

• Harness connectors B1, M12
• Harness for open or short between ECM and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connector.
4.CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Disconnect “unified meter and A/C amp.” harness connector M49.
3. Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 5 and “unified meter and
A/C amp.” terminal 36. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
• Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and “unified meter and A/C amp.”
6.CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR

OK or NG A
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit.
7.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT EC
Refer to EC-134.
C
>> INSPECTION END
D
1. Remove fuel level sensor unit.
E
2. Check resistance between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
terminals 4 and 5 by heating with hot water as shown in the fig-
ure.
F
20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7
G
50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90
3. If NG, replace fuel level sensor unit.
H
PBIB0931E
I
Refer to FL-4.
J

DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR
The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel tempera-
ture inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from
the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temper-
ature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the
PBIB1665E
<Reference data>
Fluid temperature Voltage* Resistance

°C (°F) V kΩ
20 (68) 3.5 2.3 - 2.7
50 (122) 2.2 0.79 - 0.90
*: This data is reference values and is measured between ECM terminal 106 (Fuel
tank temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:

P0182 Fuel tank temperature An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
0182 sensor circuit low input sent to ECM. • Harness or connectors
P0183 Fuel tank temperature An excessively high voltage from the sensor is • Fuel tank temperature sensor
0183 sensor circuit high input sent to ECM.
NOTE:


EC
TBWT1640E
P

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Go to DI-19, "Fuel Level Sensor Signal Inspection".
2.CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness con-
nector.
PBIB1665E
3. Check voltage between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0932E

• Harness for open or short between ECM and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
4.CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Disconnect “unified meter and A/C amp.” harness connector M49.
3. Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 5 and “unified meter and
A/C amp.” terminal 36. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
• Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and “unified meter and A/C amp.”
>> Repair open circuit short to ground or short to power in harness or connector.
OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit. A
Refer to EC-134.
EC
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection INFOID:0000000004656403 C

1. Remove fuel level sensor unit. D
terminals 4 and 5 by heating with hot water as shown in the fig-
ure. E

F
20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7
50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90
3. If NG, replace fuel level sensor unit. G
PBIB0931E
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004656404 H

Refer to FL-4. I

DTC P0196 EOT SENSOR
The engine oil temperature sensor is used to detect the engine oil
temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM.
The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine oil tempera-
ture input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the
SEF594K
<Reference data>
Engine coolant
−10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
110 (230) 0.6 0.143 - 0.153
SEF012P
oil temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
NOTE:
If DTC P0196 is displayed with P0197 or P0198, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0197 or
P0198. Refer to EC-340.
Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is
Engine oil temperature • Harness or connectors
P0196 sent to ECM, compared with the voltage signals
sensor range/perfor- (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
0196 from engine coolant temperature sensor and in-
mance • Engine oil temperature sensor
take air temperature sensor.
FAIL-SAFE MODE

Engine oil temperature
Exhaust valve timing control does not function.
sensor
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:

WITH CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. A
3. Start engine and let it idle for 5 minutes and 10 seconds.
EC
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to following steps.
C
6. Check that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates above 80°C (176°F).
If it is above 80°C (176°F), go to the following steps.
If it is below 80°C (176°F), warm engine up until “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 80°C D
(176°F). Then go to the following steps.
7. Turn ignition switch OFF and soak the vehicle at cool place.
E
NOTE:
Do not turn ignition switch OFF until step 12
9. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. F
G
COOLAN TEMP/S Below 40°C (104°F)
INT/A TEMP SE Below 40°C (104°F)
Difference between “COOLAN TEMP/S” and “INT/A TEMP SE” Within 6°C (11°F) H
If they are within the specified range, go to following steps.
If they are out of the specified range, soak the vehicle to met the above conditions. Then go to following
steps. I
NOTE:
• Do not turn ignition switch OFF.
• If it is supposed to need a long period of time, do not deplete the battery.
J
13. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-337, "Diagnosis Procedure". K
WITH GST
L
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS M

2. Loosen and retighten ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-142, "Ground Inspection". N
PBIB3560E


: Vehicle front

PBIB3561E

finisher removed)
: Vehicle front
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Replace engine oil temperature sensor.
Refer to EC-134.
>> INSPECTION END

ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR

1. Check resistance between engine oil temperature sensor termi-
nals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.
PBIB2005E

<Reference data>
A
Engine coolant temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ
20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
EC
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
2. If NG, replace engine oil temperature sensor. C
SEF012P
D
ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR E

Refer to EM-27.

DTC P0197, P0198 EOT SENSOR
The engine oil temperature sensor is used to detect the engine oil
temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM.
The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine oil tempera-
ture input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the
SEF594K
<Reference data>

°C (°F)
–10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
110 (230) 0.6 0.143 - 0.153
SEF012P
*: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 78 (Engine oil
temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
Trouble Diagnosis
Name
Engine oil tempera-
ture sensor circuit low • Harness or connectors
0197 sent to ECM.
input (Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit is
Engine oil tempera- open or shorted.)
P0198 An excessively high voltage from the sensor is • Engine oil temperature sensor
ture sensor circuit
0198 sent to ECM.
high input
FAIL-SAFE MODE

Engine oil temperature
Exhaust valve timing control does not function.
sensor
NOTE:

EC
TBWT1684E

PBIB3560E

: Vehicle front

PBIB3561E

finisher removed)
: Vehicle front
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK EOT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect engine oil temperature (EOT) sensor (1) harness
connector.
: Vehicle front
PBIB3562E

3. Check voltage between EOT sensor terminal 1 and ground with
OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 3.
in harness or connectors. C
PBIB0080E
3.CHECK EOT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT D

E
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 84 and ECT sensor terminal 2.
Continuity should exist. F

OK or NG
G
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. I
NG >> Replace engine oil temperature sensor.
Refer to EC-134.
>> INSPECTION END K

L
1. Check resistance between engine oil temperature sensor termi-
nals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.
M
PBIB2005E

<Reference data>

20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
2. If NG, replace engine oil temperature sensor.
SEF012P

Refer to EM-27.

A
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, EC

kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into C
valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the D
PBIB0145E E

TP SEN 1-B1 Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V G
TP SEN 1-B2
(Engine stopped)
TP SEN 2-B1* Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
• Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
TP SEN 2-B2*
H
I
NOTE:
If DTC P0222, P0223, P2132 or P2133 is displayed with DTC P0643, first perform the trouble diagnosis
for DTC P0643. Refer to EC-482. J
K
P0222
0222
(Bank 1) Throttle position sensor An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor
1 circuit low input 1 is sent to ECM. L
P2132
(Bank 2) (TP sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.)
P0223 • Electric throttle control actuator M
0223 (TP sensor 1)
(Bank 1) Throttle position sensor An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor
P2133 1 circuit high input 1 is sent to ECM. N
2133
(Bank 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE O
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode an the MIL lights up.
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode P

degrees.

NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:

2. Check DTC.
Bank 1

EC
TBWT1641E
P
CAUTION:

TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
• Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
30 Y
• Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
• Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
34 L
• Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
Sensor power supply
(bank 1)]
Bank 2

EC
TBWT1642E
CAUTION:

TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
• Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
31 L/G
• Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
• Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
35 L/Y
• Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
Sensor power supply
(bank 2)]
48 W/L [Throttle position sensor • Warm-up condition 0V

PBIB3560E

: Vehicle front


EC
PBIB3561E
D
finisher removed)
E
: Vehicle front
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. F
2.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
G
J
PBIB3504E
1. Electric throttle control actuator 2. Electric throttle control actuator K

(bank 1) (bank 2)

3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal 6 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. L
PBIB3471E O
OK or NG P
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness.
3.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

1) or 43 (bank 2).

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit.
4.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1) or 48 (bank 2). Refer to Wiring Diagram.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 30 (bank 1) or 31 (bank 2) and electric throttle control
actuator terminal 4. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
>> INSPECTION END

Refer to EC-134.
>> INSPECTION END

THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

2. Perform EC-76, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .

5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 30 [TP sensor 1 (bank 1) signal], 31 [TP sensor 1 (bank 2) signal], A
34 [TP sensor 2 (bank 1) signal], 35 [TP sensor 2 (bank 2) signal] and ground under the following condi-
tions.
EC
PBIB3472E
E

31 [TP sensor 1 (bank 2)] Fully depressed Less than 4.75V F

G
8. Perform EC-77, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . H
I
Refer to EM-18 .
J

DTC P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER
MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE
DTC P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, P0306 MULTIPLE CYL-
INDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE
When a misfire occurs, engine speed will fluctuate. If the engine speed fluctuates enough to cause the crank-
shaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) signal to vary, ECM can determine that a misfire is occurring.
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed On board diagnosis of misfire
The misfire detection logic consists of the following two conditions.
1. One Trip Detection Logic (Three Way Catalyst Damage)
On the 1st trip that a misfire condition occurs that can damage the three way catalyst (TWC) due to over-
heating, the MIL will blink.
When a misfire condition occurs, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor signal every 200 engine revolutions
for a change.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will turn off.
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC on a 2nd trip, the MIL will blink.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will remain on.
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC, the MIL will begin to blink again.
2. Two Trip Detection Logic (Exhaust quality deterioration)
For misfire conditions that will not damage the TWC (but will affect vehicle emissions), the MIL will only
light when the misfire is detected on a 2nd trip. During this condition, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor
signal every 1,000 engine revolutions.
A misfire malfunction can be detected on any one cylinder or on multiple cylinders.
P0300 Multiple cylinder misfire
Multiple cylinder misfire.
0300 detected
P0301 No.1 cylinder misfire de- • Improper spark plug
No. 1 cylinder misfires.
0301 tected • Insufficient compression
• Incorrect fuel pressure
P0302 No. 2 cylinder misfire
No. 2 cylinder misfires. • The fuel injector circuit is open or shorted
0302 detected
• Fuel injector
P0303 No. 3 cylinder misfire • Intake air leak
0303 detected • The ignition signal circuit is open or short-
ed
No. 4 cylinder misfires. • Lack of fuel
0304 detected
• Signal plate
P0305 No. 5 cylinder misfire • Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
0305 detected • Incorrect PCV hose connection
0306 detected
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws when driv-
ing.
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-III
3. Restart engine and let it idle for about 15 minutes.

NOTE: A
b. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for a certain EC
C
D
Engine coolant temperature (T) T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F). E
The time to driving varies according to the engine speed in the freeze frame data. F
Engine speed Time

Around 1,000 rpm Approximately 10 minutes G
Around 2,000 rpm Approximately 5 minutes
More than 3,000 rpm Approximately 3.5 minutes
H
WITH GST
I
1.CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK AND PCV HOSE J

1. Start engine and run it at idle speed.
2. Listen for the sound of the intake air leak.
3. Check PCV hose connection. K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Discover air leak location and repair. L
2.CHECK FOR EXHAUST SYSTEM CLOGGING
Stop engine and visually check exhaust tube, three way catalyst and muffler for dents.
M
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 3.
OK (Without CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace it. N
3.PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST
With CONSULT-III O
1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
2. Is there any cylinder which does not produce a momentary engine speed drop?
Yes or No P
Yes >> GO TO 4.
No >> GO TO 9.
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.

Without CONSULT-III

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
EC-634 .
PBIB3332E
5.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-I

CAUTION:
Do the following procedure in the place where ventilation is good without the combustible.
3. Remove fuel pump fuse in IPDM E/R to release fuel pressure.
NOTE:
Do not use CONSULT-III to release fuel pressure, or fuel pres-
sure applies again during the following procedure.
4. Start engine.
pressure.
7. Remove all ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electri-
cal discharge from the ignition coils.
8. Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be
PBIB2206E
checked.
9. Crank engine for 5 seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder.
10. Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil.
11. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm
between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal portion
as shown in the figure.
12. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and check whether spark is
generated between the spark plug and the grounded metal por-
tion.
Spark should be generated.

CAUTION:
• Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil
within 50cm. Be careful not to get an electrical shock PBIB2325E
while checking, because the electrical discharge voltage

becomes 20kV or more.
• It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of more than 17 mm is taken.
NOTE:
When the gap is less than 13 mm, the spark might be generated even if the coil is malfunctioning.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-II
2. Disconnect spark plug and connect a known-good spark plug.
3. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug and
the grounded metal portion.

Spark should be generated. A

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-645. EC
7.CHECK SPARK PLUG
Check the initial spark plug for fouling, etc. C
OK or NG
OK >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For
spark plug type, refer to MA-17, "Changing Spark Plugs D
(Iridium-Tipped Type)".
NG >> 1. Repair or clean spark plug.
2. GO TO 8.
E
SEF156I F
8.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-III
1. Reconnect the initial spark plugs.
2. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug and G
the grounded portion.
Spark should be generated. H

OK or NG
NG >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to MA-17, "Changing I
Spark Plugs (Iridium-Tipped Type)".
9.CHECK COMPRESSION PRESSURE J
Check compression pressure. Refer to EM-89, "On-Vehicle Service".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. K
NG >> Check pistons, piston rings, valves, valve seats and cylinder head gaskets.
L
M
2
At idle: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm , 51 psi)
OK or NG
N
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 11.
11.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART O
• Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-78, "Fuel Pressure Check".) P
• Fuel lines (Refer tor FL-3, "Checking Fuel Line".)
• Fuel filter for clogging

12.CHECK IGNITION TIMING
Check the following items. Refer to EC-71, "Basic Inspection".

Items Specifications
Target idle speed
M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position)
Ignition timing
M/T: 16 ± 5° BTDC (in neutral position)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Follow the EC-71, "Basic Inspection".
13.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL
PBIB3516E
nector nector
: Vehicle front


1 57
Bank 1
2 61
1 65
Bank 2
2 66

Bank 1 Bank 2
1 57 1 65
2 61 2 66

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.

14.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15. EC
NG >> Replace malfunctioning A/F sensor 1.
C
With CONSULT-III
2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
D
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
E
With GST
2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in Service $01 with GST.
F
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or H
16.CHECK SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART
Check items on the rough idle symptom in EC-87, "Symptom Matrix Chart". I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> Repair or replace. J
17.ERASE THE 1ST TRIP DTC

Some tests may cause a 1st trip DTC to be set. K
Erase the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory after performing the tests.
Refer to EC-46, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information".
L
>> GO TO 18.
M
Refer to EC-134.
>> INSPECTION END N

DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS
DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS
The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine

knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from
the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is
converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
1 : Knock sensor (bank 1)

PBIB3505E
The MIL will not light up for these self-diagnoses.
Trouble diagnosis
DTC No. DTC detected condition Possible cause
name
P0327
0327
(Bank 1) Knock sensor circuit An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
P0332 low input sent to ECM.
0332
(Bank 2) • Harness or connectors
P0328 • Knock sensor
0328
(Bank 1) Knock sensor circuit An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
P0333 high input sent to ECM.
0333
(Bank 2)
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
1. Start engine and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.

BANK 1

DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS
EC
TBWT1643E
P
CAUTION:

DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS
TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
73 W Knock sensor (bank 1) Approximately 2.5V
• Idle speed
BANK 2

DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS
EC
TBWT1644E
CAUTION:

DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS
TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
69 W Knock sensor (bank 2) Approximately 2.5V
• Idle speed
1.CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
3. Check resistance between ECM terminal 73 (bank 1), 69 (bank 2) and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ.
Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588 kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)]

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
1. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector.

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 73 (bank 1),
69 (bank 2) and knock sensor terminal 1.

3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. PBIB3505E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
• Harness connectors F48, F251
• Harness for open or short between ECM and knock sensor
4.CHECK KNOCK SENSOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace knock sensor.

DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS
2. Loosen and retighten ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-142, "Ground Inspection" . A
EC
D
PBIB3560E

E
: Vehicle front

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. F
PBIB3561E

J
finisher removed)
: Vehicle front K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. L
6.CHECK KNOCK SENSOR SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector. M
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 72 and knock sensor terminal 2.
N
OK or NG O
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.

• Harness connectors F48, F251
• Harness for open or short between ECM and knock sensor

DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS
Refer to EC-134.
>> INSPECTION END

KNOCK SENSOR
Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 1 and ground.
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more
than 10 MΩ.
Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588 kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)]

CAUTION:
Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or phys-
ically damaged. Use only new ones.
SEF111Y
KNOCK SENSOR
Refer to EM-106.

DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
A
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the oil pan facing EC
the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of
the engine revolution.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth C
cause the gap with the sensor to change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to
change. D
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor
changes.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of
the engine revolution.
PBIB3563E E
ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure.
H
PBIB3572E

I
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION J

• Run engine and compare CONSULT-III value with the tachometer indica- Almost the same speed as the ta-
ENG SPEED
tion. chometer indication.
K
L
[CKP sensor (POS) circuit is open or M
shorted.]
[CMP sensor (PHASE) (bank 2) circuit is
shorted.]
[EVT control position sensor (bank 2) cir- N
• The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal cuit is shorted.]
is not detected by the ECM during the first (APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.)
few seconds of engine cranking. (EVAP control system pressure sensor
• The proper pulse signal from the crankshaft circuit is shorted.) O
P0335 Crankshaft position sen-
position sensor (POS) is not sent to ECM (Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is
0335 sor (POS) circuit
while the engine is running. shorted.)
• The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal • Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
is not in the normal pattern during engine run- • Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) P
ning. (bank 2)
• Exhaust valve timing control position sen-
sor (bank 2)
• Accelerator pedal position sensor
• EVAP control system pressure sensor
• Refrigerant pressure sensor
• Signal plate

NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V with igni-
tion switch ON.
1. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.

EC
P
TBWT1645E
CAUTION:

TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
4.0 - 5.0V
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
NOTE:
idle.
Crankshaft position sensor PBIB3549E

37 LG/B
(POS)
4.0 - 5.0V
[Engine is running]
PBIB3550E
Sensor power supply

46 R/B [Crankshaft position sensor [Ignition switch: ON] 5V
(POS)]
47 Y/G [Crankshaft position sensor • Warm-up condition 0V
(POS)] • Idle speed
Sensor power supply
sensor (bank 2)]
Sensor power supply
sensor 2)
Sensor power supply
sure sensor)
Sensor power supply
sor)


EC
PBIB3560E
D
: Vehicle front
E
F
PBIB3561E I

finisher removed) J
: Vehicle front
OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I L
1. Disconnect crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) (2) harness
connector.
M
1 : A/F sensor 1 (bank 1)
: Vehicle front
N
O
PBIB3506E

3. Check voltage between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 1 and
ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB3312E
3.CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

3. Check harness continuity between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 1 and ECM terminal 46.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.
ECM terminal Sensor terminal Reference Wiring Diagram

46 CKP sensor (POS) terminal 1 EC-369
CMP sensor (PHASE) (bank 2) terminal 1 EC-377
64
EVT control position sensor (bank 2) terminal 1 EC-498
103 APP sensor terminal 4 EC-595
107 EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 3 EC-432
111 Refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1 EC-658
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5.CHECK COMPONENTS
• Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) (bank 2) (Refer to EC-383, "Component Inspection".)
• Exhaust valve timing control position sensor (bank 2) (Refer to EC-505, "Component Inspection".)
• EVAP control system pressure sensor (Refer to EC-436, "Component Inspection".)
• Refrigerant pressure sensor (Refer to ATC-63, "Magnet Clutch Circuit".)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning component.
6.CHECK APP SENSOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 7.
7.REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
1. Replace accelerator pedal assembly.

4. Perform EC-77, "Idle Air Volume Learning". A
>> INSPECTION END

8.CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT EC

C
3. Check the continuity between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 2 and ECM terminal 47.
Continuity should exist. D

4. Also check harness for short to ground short to power.
OK or NG E
OK >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT F
1. Check the continuity between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 3 and ECM terminal 37.
G
OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 10.
I
OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Replace CKP sensor (POS).
11.CHECK GEAR TOOTH K
Visually check for chipping signal plate gear tooth.
OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Replace the signal plate.
12.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT M
Refer to EC-134.
>> INSPECTION END N
O
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
2. Disconnect CKP sensor (POS) harness connector. P
3. Remove the sensor.

4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.
PBIB3564E
5. Check resistance as shown in the figure.
Terminal No. (Polarity) Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]

1 (+) - 2 (-)
1 (+) - 3 (-) Except 0 or ∞
2 (+) - 3 (-)
PBIA9584J
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)

Refer to EM-27.

DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
A
The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the retraction of EC

camshaft (INT) to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft position
sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position.
When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoper-
ative, the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) provides various con- C
trols of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification
signals.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. D
When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause
the gap with the sensor to change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to
change.
PBIB3565E E
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure.
F
PBIB3572E
I

J
• Run engine and compare CONSULT-III value with the tachometer indica- Almost the same speed as the ta-
ENG SPEED
tion. chometer indication. K
L
NOTE:
If DTC P0340 is displayed with DTC P0643, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0643.
Refer to EC-482.
M

open or shorted.]
P0340 • Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
0340 (bank 1)
(Bank 1) • Camshaft (INT)
• Starter motor (Refer to SC-8.)
• Starting system circuit (Refer to SC-8.)
• Dead (Weak) battery
open or shorted.]
[CKP sensor (POS) circuit is shorted.]
• The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM for [EVT control position sensor (bank 2) cir-
the first few seconds during engine cranking. cuit is shorted.]
Camshaft position sen- • The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM (APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.)
sor (PHASE) circuit during engine running. (EVAP control system pressure sensor
• The cylinder No. signal is not in the normal circuit is shorted.)
pattern during engine running. (Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is
P0345 shorted.)
(Bank 2) (bank 2)
• Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
sor (bank 2)
• Camshaft (INT)
• Starter motor (Refer to SC-8.)
• Starting system circuit (Refer to SC-8.)
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V with igni-
tion switch ON.
1. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4. Maintaining engine speed at more than 800 rpm for at least 5 seconds.

A
BANK 1
EC
P
TBWT1646E
CAUTION:

TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
3.0 - 5.0V
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
NOTE:
idle.
Camshaft position sensor PBIB3553E

59 BR/Y
(PHASE) (bank 1)
3.0 - 5.0V
[Engine is running]
PBIB3554E
Sensor power supply

Sensor ground
[Engine is running]
96 P/L • Warm-up condition 0V
• Idle speed

BANK 2
A
EC
TBWT1647E
P
CAUTION:

TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply
(POS)]
3.0 - 5.0V
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
NOTE:
idle.
PBIB3553E
Camshaft position sensor
63 SB
(PHASE) (bank 2)
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
PBIB3554E
Sensor power supply

sensor (bank 2)]
92 B/P [Camshaft position sensor • Warm-up condition 0V
(PHASE) (bank 2)] • Idle speed
Sensor power supply
sensor 2)
Sensor power supply
sure sensor)
Sensor power supply
sor)
1.CHECK STARTING SYSTEM

Turn ignition switch to START position.
Does the engine turn over?

Does the starter motor operate?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> Check starting system. (Refer to SC-8.)

A
EC
PBIB3560E D

: Vehicle front E
2. Loosen and retighten ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-142, "Ground Inspection" . F
I
PBIB3561E

(Passenger side view with dash side J
finisher removed)
: Vehicle front
K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. L
3.CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR (PHASE) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Disconnect camshaft position (CMP) sensor (PHASE) harness connector.
M
PBIB3518E P
1. Exhaust valve timing control position 2. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) 3. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
sensor (bank 2)

3. Check voltage between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 1 and
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG-1 >> P0340: Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to
power in harness or connectors.
NG-2 >> P0345: GO TO 4.
PBIB3312E
4.CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

3. Check harness continuity between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 1 and ECM terminal 64.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

64
111 Refrigerant pressure sensor 1 EC-658
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK COMPONENTS
• Crankshaft position sensor (POS) (Refer to EC-373, "Component Inspection".)
• EVAP control system pressure sensor (Refer to EC-436, "Component Inspection".)
• Refrigerant pressure sensor (Refer to ATC-63, "Magnet Clutch Circuit" .)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK APP SENSOR
Refer to EC-600, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.
2. Perform EC-76, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .

4. Perform EC-77, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . A
>> INSPECTION END

9.CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT EC

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 92 (bank 2) or 96 (bank 1) and CMP sensor (PHASE)
C
terminal 2.
Continuity should exist. D

3. Also check harness for short to ground short to power.
OK or NG E
OK >> GO TO 10.
10.CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT F
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 59 (bank 1) or 63 (bank 2) and CMP sensor (PHASE)
terminal 2. G
Continuity should exist. H

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11. I
J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12. K
NG >> Replace malfunctioning CMP sensor (PHASE).
12.CHECK CAMSHAFT (INT)
Check the following. L
OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 13.
rear end or replace camshaft. N
O
PBIB3533E
13.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT P

Refer to EC-134.
>> INSPECTION END

CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)

2. Disconnect CMP sensor (PHASE) harness connector.
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.
PBIB3566E
5. Check resistance as shown in the figure.

1 (+) - 2 (-)
1 (+) - 3 (-) Except 0 or ∞
2 (+) - 3 (-)
PBIA9584J
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)

Refer to EM-72.

DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
A
The ECM monitors the switching frequency ratio of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2. EC
A three way catalyst 1 with high oxygen storage capacity will indicate a low switching frequency of heated oxy-
gen sensor 2. As oxygen storage capacity decreases, the heated oxygen sensor 2 switching frequency will
increase.
When the frequency ratio of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2 approaches a specified C
limit value, the three way catalyst 1 malfunction is diagnosed.
F
PBIB1923E
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause G
P0420 • Three way catalyst 1
0420 • Exhaust tube
• Three way catalyst 1 does not operate prop-
(Bank 1) • Intake air leaks H
Catalyst system efficien- erly.
• Fuel injector
P0430 cy below threshold • Three way catalyst 1 does not have enough
• Fuel injector leaks
0430 oxygen storage capacity.
• Spark plug
(Bank 2) • Improper ignition timing I
J
NOTE:
K
WITH CONSULT-III
TESTING CONDITION:
Do not hold engine speed for more than the specified minutes below.
L
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. M
6. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C (158°F). N
8. Select “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” then “SRT WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III. O
9. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and hold it for 3 consecutive minutes then release the accelerator
pedal completely.
If “INCMP” of “CATALYST” changed to “CMPLT”, go to step 12. P
10. Wait 5 seconds at idle.
11. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and maintain it until “INCMP” of “CATALYST” changes to “CMPLT” (It
will take approximately 5 minutes).
If not “CMPLT”, stop engine and cool it down to less than 70°C (158°F) and then retest from step 1.
13. Confirm that the 1st trip DTC is not detected.

If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-386, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the three way catalyst 1. During this check, a 1st trip DTC
might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
4. Let engine idle for 1minute.
6. Set voltmeters probes between ECM terminal 76 [HO2S2 (bank
1) signal], 80 [HO2S2 (bank 2) signal] and ground.
7. Keep engine speed at 2,500 rpm constant under no load.
8. Make sure that the voltage does not vary for more than 5 sec-
onds. It the voltage fluctuation cycle take less than 5 seconds.
Go to EC-386, "Diagnosis Procedure".
• 1cycle: 0.6 - 1.0 → 0 - 0.3 → 0.6 - 1.0
PBIB3473E
1.CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM

Visually check exhaust tubes and muffler for dent.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before the three way catalyst 1.
PBIB1922E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK IGNITION TIMING
Check the following items. Refer to EC-71, "Basic Inspection".

Items Specifications A
A/T 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
Target idle speed
M/T 650 ± 50 rpm (in Neutral position)
EC
A/T 16 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
Ignition timing
M/T 16 ± 5° BTDC (in Neutral position)
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Follow the EC-71, "Basic Inspection".
5.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR D
1. Stop engine and turn ignition switch OFF.

E
4. Check voltage between ECM terminals 81, 82, 85, 86, 89, 90
and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
Refer to Wiring Diagram for fuel injectors, EC-635, "Wiring Dia- F
gram".
Voltage: Battery voltage G

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Perform EC-636, "Diagnosis Procedure". H
PBIB3569E
6.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-I I

CAUTION:
2. Reconnect ECM harness connector disconnected.
NOTE:
Do not use CONSULT-III to release fuel pressure, or fuel pres- K
sure applies again during the following procedure.
4. Start engine.
5. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel L
pressure.
7. Remove all ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electri-
cal discharge from the ignition coils. M
8. Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be
PBIB2206E
checked.
9. Crank engine for 5 seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder. N
10. Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil.
as shown in the figure. O
12. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and check whether spark is
generated between the spark plug and the grounded metal por-
tion. P

CAUTION:
within 50cm. Be careful not to get an electrical shock PBIB2325E
while checking, because the electrical discharge voltage


• It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of more than 17 mm is taken.
NOTE:
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-II
2. Disconnect spark plug and connect a known-good spark plug.
the grounded metal portion.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-645.
8.CHECK SPARK PLUG
2. Check the spark plugs and check for fouling, etc.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair or replace spark plug (s) with standard type one
(s). For spark plug type ignition coil. Refer to MA-17,
"Changing Spark Plugs (Iridium-Tipped Type)".
SEF156I
9.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-III

1. Reconnect the initial spark plugs.
the grounded portion.

OK or NG
NG >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to MA-17, "Changing
Spark Plugs (Iridium-Tipped Type)".
2. Remove fuel injector assembly.
Refer to EM-35.
4. Reconnect all fuel injector harness connectors disconnected.
Make sure fuel does not drip from fuel injector.
OK or NG
OK (Does not drip.)>>GO TO 11.
NG (Drips.)>>Replace the fuel injector(s) from which fuel is dripping.
Refer to EC-134.

Trouble is fixed.>>INSPECTION END A

Trouble is not fixed.>>Replace three way catalyst assembly.
EC

DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
NOTE:
If DTC P0441 is displayed with other DTC such as P2122, P2123, P2127, P2128 or P2138, first perform
trouble diagnosis for other DTC.
PBIB1026E
In this evaporative emission (EVAP) control system, purge flow occurs during non-closed throttle conditions.
Purge volume is related to air intake volume. Under normal purge conditions (non-closed throttle), the EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve is open to admit purge flow. Purge flow exposes the EVAP con-
trol system pressure sensor to intake manifold vacuum.
Under normal conditions (non-closed throttle), sensor output voltage indicates if pressure drop and purge flow
are adequate. If not, a malfunction is determined.
• EVAP canister purge volume control so-
lenoid valve stuck closed
and the circuit
• Loose, disconnected or improper con-
EVAP control system does not operate proper-
nection of rubber tube
P0441 EVAP control system in- ly, EVAP control system has a leak between in-
• Blocked rubber tube
0441 correct purge flow take manifold and EVAP control system
• Cracked EVAP canister
pressure sensor.
lenoid valve circuit
• Blocked purge port
• EVAP canister vent control valve
CAUTION:
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more.
WITH CONSULT-III

3. Start engine and let it idle for at least 70 seconds. A
4. Select “PURG FLOW P0441” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” mode with
CONSULT-III.
EC
If “COMPLETED” is displayed, go to step 7.
6. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-III screen. Maintain
the conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take at least 35 seconds.)
C
VHCL SPEED SE 32 - 120 km/h (20 - 75 MPH)
D
ENG SPEED 500 - 3,000 rpm
COOLAN TEMP/S 70 - 100°C (158 - 212°F) E
If “TESTING” is not changed for a long time, retry from step 2.
7. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-
391, "Diagnosis Procedure". F
Use this procedure to check the overall monitoring function of the EVAP control system purge flow monitoring. G
During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
H
1. Lift up drive wheels.
2. Start engine (VDC switch or TCS switch OFF) and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start engine and wait at least 70 seconds. I
5. Set voltmeter probes to ECM terminals 102 (EVAP control sys-
tem pressure sensor signal) and ground.
6. Check EVAP control system pressure sensor value at idle speed J
and note it.
7. Establish and maintain the following conditions for at least 1
minute.
K
Air conditioner switch ON
Headlamp switch ON
L
Rear window defogger switch ON PBIB3570E
Engine speed Approx. 3,000 rpm

Shift lever Any position other than P, N or R M
8. Verify that EVAP control system pressure sensor value stays 0.1V less than the value at idle speed (mea-
sured at step 6) for at least 1 second.
9. If NG, go to EC-391, "Diagnosis Procedure". N
1.CHECK EVAP CANISTER O

2. Check EVAP canister for cracks.
P
OK or NG
NG >> Replace EVAP canister.
2.CHECK PURGE FLOW
With CONSULT-III

1. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP ser-
vice port and install vacuum gauge. For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-31, "Description".
3. Select “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
4. Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm.
5. Touch “Qd” and “Qu” on CONSULT-III screen to adjust “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening and check vacuum
existence.
PURG VOL CONT/V Vacuum

100% Should exist.
0% Should not exist.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 4.
3.CHECK PURGE FLOW
Without CONSULT-III
2. Stop engine.
3. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP ser-
vice port and install vacuum gauge. For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-31, "Description".
Do not depress accelerator pedal even slightly

5. Check vacuum gauge indication before 60 seconds passed after starting engine.
Vacuum should not exist.

6. Revving engine up to 2,000 rpm after 100 seconds passed after starting engine.
Vacuum should exist.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
2. Check EVAP purge line for improper connection or disconnection.
Refer to EC-31, "Description".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair it.
5.CHECK EVAP PURGE HOSE AND PURGE PORT
1. Disconnect purge hoses connected to EVAP service port A and
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve B.
2. Blow air into each hose and EVAP purge port C.
SEF367U

3. Check that air flows freely.
OK or NG A
NG >> Repair or clean hoses and/or purge port. EC
SEF368U
6.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE D
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine. E
2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III. Check that engine speed var-
ies according to the valve opening.
OK or NG
F
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. H
NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
8.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR I
1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
2. Check connectors for water.
J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. K
9.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR FUNCTION
L
Refer to EC-431, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" for DTC P0452 and EC-439, "DTC Confirmation Procedure"
for P0453.
OK or NG
M
OK >> GO TO 10.
10.CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING N
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
OK or NG O
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.
11.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE P
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.

Inspect EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube). Check for evidence of leaks.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Replace it.
13.CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE
Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.
>> GO TO 14.
Refer to EC-134.
>> INSPECTION END

A
This diagnosis detects leaks in the EVAP purge line using engine intake manifold vacuum. EC
If pressure does not increase, the ECM will check for leaks in the line between the fuel tank and EVAP canister
purge volume control solenoid valve, under the following Vacuum test conditions.
The EVAP canister vent control valve is closed to shut the EVAP purge line off. The EVAP canister purge vol-
ume control solenoid valve will then be opened to depressurize the EVAP purge line using intake manifold C
vacuum. After this occurs, the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve will be closed.
PBIB1026E
I
• Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve
• Incorrect fuel filler cap used J
• Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close.
• Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap.
• Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve. K
• Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent con-
trol valve.
• EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks
• EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks
L
EVAP control system EVAP control system has a leak, EVAP • EVAP purge line rubber tube bent
P0442
small leak detected control system does not operate prop- • Loose or disconnected rubber tube
0442
(negative pressure) erly. • EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit
M
• EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve and the circuit
• Fuel tank temperature sensor
• O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is N
missing or damaged
• EVAP canister is saturated with water
• Fuel level sensor and the circuit O
• Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve
• ORVR system leaks
CAUTION: P
• Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the
MIL may come on.
• If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on.
• Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement.
NOTE:

TESTING CONDITION:
• Perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” when the fuel level is between 1/4 and 3/4 full, and vehicle is placed
on flat level surface.
• Always perform test at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F).
WITH CONSULT-III
4. Make sure that the following conditions are met.
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F)
INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 30°C (32 - 86°F)
5. Select “EVAP SML LEAK P0442/P1442” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-III.
Follow the instruction displayed.
NOTE:
If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on the CONSULT-III screen, go to
EC-71, "Basic Inspection".
6. Make sure that “OK” is displayed.
NOTE:
Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
properly.
WITH GST
NOTE:
Be sure to read the explanation of EC-46, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information" before driving vehicle.
1. Start engine.
2. Drive vehicle according to EC-46, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information".
3. Stop vehicle.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON.
- If P0442 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-396, "Diagnosis Procedure".
- If P0441 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-391, "Diagnosis Procedure".
1.CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN

2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap.
SEF915U
2.CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION

Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> 1. Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower.
2. Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard.

3.CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION A
Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. EC
NG >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. D
NG >> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one.
5.INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP
To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pres- E
sure pump to EVAP service port securely. For the location of EVAP
service port, refer to EC-31, "Description".
NOTE: F
Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the
EVAP service port may cause leaking.
G
SEF916U
H
6.CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
With CONSULT-III I
2. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of
the bar graph. J
CAUTION:
• Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system. K
4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak
detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details.
Refer to EC-31, "Description". L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair or replace. M
N
SEF200U

O
Without CONSULT-III
P

2. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts
until the end of test.)
PBIB1086E
3. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg),
then remove pump and EVAP service port adapter.
CAUTION:
• Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer
to EC-31, "Description".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
SEF200U
8.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE

• EVAP canister vent control valve is installed properly.
Refer to EC-35, "Removal and Installation".
• EVAP canister vent control valve.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring.
attached.
2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 10.
No (With CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 12.
No (Without CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 13.
PBIB1031E

Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
OK or NG

OK (Without CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 13. A
NG >> GO TO 11.
EC
• EVAP canister for damage
• EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection
C
>> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.
12.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION D
With CONSULT-III
1. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
2. Start engine. E
3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
4. Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-III screen to increase “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening to 100%.
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
F
OK or NG
G
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 14.
13.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION H
Without CONSULT-III
2. Stop engine. I
J
OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 14.
14.CHECK VACUUM HOSE L
Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-97, "Vacuum Hose Drawing".
OK or NG
M
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose.
15.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE N
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16. O
P
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19.
>> GO TO 20.
20.CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE
Check EVAP/ORVR line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper con-
nection. For location, refer to EC-37.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 21.
21.CHECK RECIRCULATION LINE
Check recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and
improper connection.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 22.
NG >> Repair or replace hose, tube or filler neck tube.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 23.
23.CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Refer to DI-21, "Electrical Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 24.
Refer to EC-134.
>> INSPECTION END

DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
A
VALVE
EC
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator C

Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*1
D
Battery Battery voltage*1 E
EVAP canister EVAP canister purge vol-
purge flow control ume control solenoid valve
F
Fuel tank temperature sensor Fuel temperature in fuel tank
G
*2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. H
This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass pas-
sage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the
I
ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is
determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor
from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes.
J
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/
OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canis-
ter. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is K
moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse,
the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve.
L
PBIB3568E
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000004656465 N

O
P

lenoid valve
The canister purge flow is detected during the
EVAP canister purge (The valve is stuck open.)
P0443 specified driving conditions, even when EVAP
volume control solenoid • EVAP canister vent control valve
0443 canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
valve • EVAP canister
completely closed.
• Hoses
(Hoses are connected incorrectly or
clogged.)
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-III
4. Select “PURG VOL CN/V P1444” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with
CONSULT-III.
6. Start engine and let it idle until “TESTING” on CONSULT-III changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take
approximately 10 seconds.)
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2.
7. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-
WITH GST

EC
P
TBWT1648E
CAUTION:

TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
• Accelerator pedal: Not depressed even
PBIB3547E
21 GY/R
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
100 seconds after starting engine)
PBIB3548E
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
24 BR/Y
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
tion switch OFF
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
1.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
(2) harness connector.
1 : EVAP service port

PBIB3507E

4. Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-III or A
tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage EC

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2. C
PBIB0148E

E
• Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
• Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM
F
3.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT G
FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. H
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 21 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. I

OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR K
L
OK or NG
M
OK >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR N
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 6. O
6.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE P
With CONSULT-III
2. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
3. Start engine.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
attached.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 13.
PBIB1031E

attached.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> GO TO 12.

Refer to EC-134.
>> INSPECTION END

A
With CONSULT-III EC
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve under the following conditions.
C
Condition Air passage continuity
(PURG VOL CONT/V value) between A and B
100% Yes
D
0% No
E
PBIB3567E
Without CONSULT-III
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control F
Air passage continuity G

Condition
between A and B
12V direct current supply between
Yes
terminals 1 and 2 H
No supply No
PBIB3571E
I
J
Refer to EM-18.
K

DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLE-
NOID VALVE
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION


EVAP canister EVAP canister purge vol-
purge flow control ume control solenoid valve
Fuel tank temperature sensor Fuel temperature in fuel tank
This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass pas-
sage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the
ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is
determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor
from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes.
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/
OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canis-
ter. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse,
the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve.
PBIB3568E


VALVE
• Harness or connectors EC
EVAP canister purge volume (The solenoid valve circuit is open or
P0444 An excessively low voltage signal is sent
control solenoid valve circuit shorted.)
0444 to ECM through the valve
open • EVAP canister purge volume control so-
lenoid valve C
P0445 An excessively high voltage signal is sent (The solenoid valve circuit is shorted.)
control solenoid valve circuit
0445
shorted
to ECM through the valve • EVAP canister purge volume control so- D
lenoid valve

E
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
G
H

VALVE
TBWT1648E
CAUTION:

VALVE
TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V) C
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
• Accelerator pedal: Not depressed even D
PBIB3547E
E
21 GY/R
(11 - 14V)
F
[Engine is running]
100 seconds after starting engine) G
PBIB3548E
H
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
ECM relay switch OFF I
24 BR/Y
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
tion switch OFF J
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) K
L
1.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve M
(2) harness connector.
1 : EVAP service port

N
PBIB3507E
P

VALVE
4. Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-III or
tester.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB0148E

• Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
• Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM
3.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 21 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

OK or NG
4.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
With CONSULT-III
2. Start engine.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
Refer to EC-134.
>> INSPECTION END

VALVE
A
With CONSULT-III EC
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control
C
Condition Air passage continuity
(PURG VOL CONT/V value) between A and B
100% Yes
D
0% No
E
PBIB3567E
Without CONSULT-III
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control F
Air passage continuity G

Condition
between A and B
Yes
terminals 1 and 2 H
No supply No
PBIB3571E
I
J
Refer to EM-18.
K

DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canis-
ter and is used to seal the canister vent.
This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the
ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized.
A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal
the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evaporative
emission control system components.
This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains
opened.
When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the evapo-
rative emission control system is depressurized and allows “EVAP
PBIB1263E
Control System” diagnosis.
PBIB1086E

P0447 EVAP canister vent con- An improper voltage signal is sent to ECM
(The valve circuit is open or shorted.)
0447 trol valve circuit open through EVAP canister vent control valve.
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.

EC
TBWT1649E
P
CAUTION:

TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
24 BR/Y
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
tion switch OFF
valve (11 - 14V)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
1.INSPECTION START
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 3.
2.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Touch “ON/OFF” on CONSULT-III screen.
4. Check for operating sound of the valve.
Clicking noise should be heard.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect EVAP canister vent control valve harness connector.
PBIB1086E

4. Check voltage between EVAP canister vent control valve termi-
nal 1 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. A

OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
C
PBIB0152E

• Harness connectors E106, B2
E
• Harness connectors B43, T1 (Coupe models)
• Harness connectors B61, T23 (Roadster models)
• IPDM E/R harness connector E7
• Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and IPDM E/R F
G
5.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. H
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 121 and EVAP canister vent control valve terminal 2.

OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART K
• Harness connectors T2, B44
• Harness connectors B1, M12 L
• Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. M
7.CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. N
OK or NG
O
OK >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE P
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
Refer to EC-134.

>> INSPECTION END

EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE

With CONSULT-III
1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being
rusted.
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
5. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
6. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time.
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
PBIB1033E
Condition VENT CONTROL/V Air passage continuity between A and B

ON No
OFF Yes
Operation takes less than 1 second.
7. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
8. Perform step 6 again.
Without CONSULT-III
rusted.
PBIB1033E
3. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the
following conditions.
Condition Air passage continuity between A and B

No
terminals 1 and 2
OFF Yes
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. PBIB1034E


A
The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canis- EC
ter and is used to seal the canister vent.
This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the
ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized.
A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal C
the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evaporative
emission control system components.
This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains D
opened.
When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the evapo-
rative emission control system is depressurized and allows “EVAP
Control System” diagnosis.
PBIB1263E E
PBIB1086E
H
I

J
L
P0448 EVAP canister vent con- EVAP canister vent control valve remains and the circuit
0448 trol valve close closed under specified driving conditions. • Blocked rubber tube to EVAP canister M
vent control valve
DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000004656490 N
NOTE:
O
WITH CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 5 seconds. P
4. Start engine and let it idle for at least 1 minute.
5. Repeat next procedures for three times.
a. Increase the engine speed up to 3,000 to 3,500 rpm and keep it for 2 minutes and 50 seconds to 3 min-
utes.

Never exceed 3 minutes.
b. Fully released accelerator pedal and keep engine idle for about 5 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to the next step.
8. Repeat next procedure for 20 times.
a. Quickly increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 4,500 rpm or more and keep it for 25 to 30 seconds.
b. Fully released accelerator pedal and keep engine idle for at least 35 seconds.
PBIB0972E

WITH GST

EC
TBWT1649E
P
CAUTION:

TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
24 BR/Y
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
tion switch OFF
valve (11 - 14V)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
1.CHECK RUBBER TUBE

PBIB1086E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Clean rubber tube using an air blower.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
attached.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 6.
PBIB1031E

attached. A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. EC
NG >> GO TO 5.
C
D
6.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR E
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. G
H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. I
Refer to EC-134. J
>> INSPECTION END

K
EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE L

With CONSULT-III
M
rusted.
If OK, go to next step. N
O
5. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
6. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time.
P
PBIB1033E
Condition VENT CONTROL/V Air passage continuity between A and B

ON No
OFF Yes

Without CONSULT-III
rusted.
PBIB1033E
3. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the
Condition Air passage continuity between A and B

No
terminals 1 and 2
OFF Yes
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. PBIB1034E


DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
A
The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the EC
ECM increases as pressure increases.
E
PBIB1086E
PBIB1207E
I
Specification data are reference values. J

EVAP SYS PRES • Ignition switch: ON Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V K
• Harness or connectors M
(EVAP control system pressure sensor
circuit is shorted.)
[CMP sensor (PHASE) (bank 2) circuit is N
shorted.]
[EVT control position sensor (bank 2) cir-
cuit is shorted.]
EVAP control system (APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.) O
P0451 ECM detects a sloshing signal from the EVAP
pressure sensor perfor- (Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is
0451 control system pressure sensor
mance shorted.)
P
• Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
(bank 2)
sor (bank 2)

NOTE:
NOTE:
Do not depress accelerator pedal even slightly.

PBIB3560E

: Vehicle front

PBIB3561E

finisher removed)
: Vehicle front
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR FOR WATER

A
EC
PBIB1086E
2. Check sensor harness connector for water. D

OK or NG E
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace harness connector.
3.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I F
2. Check voltage between EVAP control system pressure sensor
terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. G
H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 4.
I
PBIB0138E
J
4.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. K
3. Check harness continuity between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal
107. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. M
NG >> GO TO 5.
N
1. Harness connectors T2, B44
2. Harness connectors B1, M12
3. Harness for open between ECM and EVAP control system pressure sensor. O
>> Repair open circuit.

6. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III P


64
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK COMPONENTS
• Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) (bank 2) (Refer to EC-383, "Component Inspection" .)
• Exhaust valve timing control position sensor (bank 2) (Refer to EC-505, "Component Inspection" .)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK APP SENSOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 9.
4. Perform EC-77, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
Refer to EC-134.
>> INSPECTION END


1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected from EVAP canister.
Always replace O-ring with a new one.
2. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor.

3. Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM
terminal 102 and ground under the following conditions. A
Applied vacuum kPa

Voltage V
(mmHg, inHg) EC
Not applied 1.8 - 4.8
-26.7 (-200, -7.87) 2.1 to 2.5V lower than above value
C
CAUTION:
• Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
• Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or PBIB3573E
pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg). D

4. If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.

The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the
PBIB1086E
PBIB1207E

shorted.]
cuit is shorted.]
EVAP control system (APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.)
pressure sensor low in- (Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is
0452 sent to ECM.
put shorted.)
(bank 2)
sor (bank 2)

A
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-III C
3. Turn ignition switch ON. D
5. Make sure that “FUEL T/TEMP SE” is more than 0°C (32°F).
E
8. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-433, "Diagnosis Procedure". F
WITH GST
G
2. Check that voltage between ECM terminal 106 (Fuel tank tem-
perature sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.2V.
H
I
J
PBIB3574E

TBWT1650E
CAUTION:

TER- A
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
EC
Sensor power supply
(POS)]
Sensor power supply C
sensor (bank 2)]
D
sure sensor
E
Sensor power supply
sensor 2)
Sensor power supply F
sure sensor)
Sensor power supply G
sor)
Sensor ground [Engine is running] H
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004656505 I

J
K
PBIB3560E
N

: Vehicle front O

P

PBIB3561E

finisher removed)
: Vehicle front
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK CONNECTOR
PBIB1086E
2. Check sensor harness connector for water.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0138E


Continuity should exist. A

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5. EC
Check the following. C
3. Harness for open between ECM and EVAP control system pressure sensor.
D

6. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III E
ECM terminal Sensor terminal Reference Wiring Diagram F

64 G
107 EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 3 EC-432 H
OK or NG
I
OK >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK COMPONENTS J
• Crankshaft position sensor (POS) (Refer to EC-373, "Component Inspection" .)
• Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) (bank 2) (Refer to EC-383, "Component Inspection" .) K
OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK APP SENSOR M
OK or NG
N
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 9.
9.REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY O
3. Perform EC-76, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . P
>> INSPECTION END

10.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 11.
• Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM
12.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 102 and EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> GO TO 13.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
Refer to EC-134.
>> INSPECTION END


Always replace O-ring with a new one.

terminal 102 and ground under the following conditions. A
Applied vacuum kPa

Voltage V
(mmHg, inHg) EC
C
CAUTION:
pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg). D


The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the
PBIB1086E
PBIB1207E


EC
[CKP sensor (POS) circuit is shorted.] C
shorted.]
cuit is shorted.] D
(APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.)
(Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is
EVAP control system shorted.)
P0453 An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
pressure sensor high in- • EVAP control system pressure sensor E
0453 sent to ECM.
put • Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
(bank 2)
• Exhaust valve timing control position sen- F
sor (bank 2)
G
• EVAP canister
• Rubber hose from EVAP canister vent
control valve to vehicle frame H
NOTE: I
TESTING CONDITION: J
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. K
L
5. Make sure that “FUEL T/TEMP SE” is more than 0°C (32°F).
6. Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds. M
N
With GST
2. Check that voltage between ECM terminal 106 (Fuel tank tem- O
perature sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.2V.
4. Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds. P
PBIB3574E

TBWT1650E
CAUTION:

TER- A
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
EC
Sensor power supply
(POS)]
Sensor power supply C
sensor (bank 2)]
D
sure sensor
E
Sensor power supply
sensor 2)
Sensor power supply F
sure sensor)
Sensor power supply G
sor)
Sensor ground [Engine is running] H
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004656512 I

J
K
PBIB3560E
N

: Vehicle front O

P

PBIB3561E

finisher removed)
: Vehicle front
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK CONNECTOR
PBIB1086E
2. Check sensor harness connector for water.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0138E



OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5. EC
Check the following. C
3. Harness for open between ECM and EVAP control system pressure sensor.
D

6. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III E
ECM terminal Sensor terminal Reference Wiring Diagram F

64 G
107 EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 3 EC-432 H
OK or NG
I
OK >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK COMPONENTS J
• Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) (bank 2) (Refer to EC-383, "Component Inspection".) K
• Refrigerant pressure sensor (Refer to ATC-63, "Magnet Clutch Circuit".
OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK APP SENSOR M
OK or NG
N
OK >> GO TO 20.
NG >> GO TO 9.
9.REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY O
3. Perform EC-76, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". P
>> INSPECTION END

10.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 11.
12.CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 102 and EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> GO TO 13.
14.CHECK RUBBER TUBE
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging, vent and kinked.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.

17.CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER A
attached.
EC
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 18.
No >> GO TO 20.
C
PBIB1031E
E
attached. F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 20. G
NG >> GO TO 19.
H
I
Refer to EC-134.
>> INSPECTION END K
L
Always replace O-ring with a new one. M
terminal 102 and ground under the following conditions. N
Applied vacuum kPa

Voltage V
(mmHg, inHg) O
CAUTION: P
pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg).


This diagnosis detects a very large leak (fuel filler cap fell off etc.) in EVAP system between the fuel tank and
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
PBIB1026E
• Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to
close.
• Incorrect fuel filler cap used
• Leak is in line between intake manifold
and EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve.
• Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister
vent control valve.
EVAP control system has a very large leak such • EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube)
P0455 EVAP control system
as fuel filler cap fell off, EVAP control system leaks
0455 gross leak detected
does not operate properly. • EVAP purge line rubber tube bent.
• Loose or disconnected rubber tube
• EVAP canister vent control valve and the
circuit
lenoid valve and the circuit
• O-ring of EVAP canister vent control
valve is missing or damaged.
CAUTION:
MIL may come on.
CAUTION:
Never remove fuel filler cap during the DTC Confirmation Procedure.
NOTE:

• Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
properly. A
TESTING CONDITION:
EC
• Perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” when the fuel level is between 1/4 and 3/4 full, and vehicle is placed
on flat level surface.
• Open engine hood before conducting the following procedures.
C
WITH CONSULT-III
1. Tighten fuel filler cap securely until ratcheting sound is heard.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. D
5. Make sure that the following conditions are met. E
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F)
INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 60°C (32 - 140°F)
6. Select “EVAP SML LEAK P0442/P1442” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode F
with CONSULT-III.
NOTE:
G
If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on the CONSULT-III screen, go to
EC-71, "Basic Inspection".
If “NG” is displayed, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode and make sure that “EVAP GROSS LEAK H
[P0455]” is displayed. If it is displayed, refer to EC-447, "Diagnosis Procedure".
If P0442 is displayed, perform EC-396, "Diagnosis Procedure" for DTC P0442.
I
WITH GST
NOTE:
Be sure to read the explanation of EC-46, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information" before driving vehicle.
J
1. Start engine.
2. Drive vehicle according to EC-46, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information".
3. Stop vehicle.
K
• If P0441 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-391, "Diagnosis Procedure", for DTC P0441. L
• If P0442 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-396, "Diagnosis Procedure", for DTC P0442.
• If P0455 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-447, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004656516 M

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. O
SEF915U


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks, improper connection or
disconnection.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
>> GO TO 7.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
8.INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP
To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pres-
NOTE:
SEF916U

With CONSULT-III

3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of
the bar graph. A
CAUTION:
• Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system. EC
detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details.
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
D
E
SEF200U

Without CONSULT-III F
2. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts
until the end of test.) G
PBIB1086E J
then remove pump and EVAP service port adapter.
CAUTION:
• Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. K
detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12. M
SEF200U
O
With CONSULT-III
1. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. P
2. Start engine.

OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> GO TO 13.
Without CONSULT-III
2. Stop engine.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 13.
13.CHECK VACUUM HOSE
OK or NG
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 15.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19.

19.CHECK RECIRCULATION LINE A
OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 20.
20.CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE C
OK or NG
D
OK >> GO TO 21.
21.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT E
Refer to EC-134.
>> INSPECTION END F

This diagnosis detects very small leaks in the EVAP line between fuel tank and EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve, using the intake manifold vacuum in the same way as conventional EVAP small leak
diagnosis.
If ECM judges a leak which corresponds to a very small leak, the very small leak P0456 will be detected.
If ECM judges a leak equivalent to a small leak, EVAP small leak P0442 will be detected.
If ECM judges there are no leaks, the diagnosis will be OK.
PBIB1026E
• Incorrect fuel filler cap used
• Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close.
• Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
• Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent con-
trol valve.
• EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks
• EVAP purge line rubber tube bent
Evaporative emission
• EVAP system has a very small leak. • Loose or disconnected rubber tube
P0456 control system very
• EVAP system does not operate prop- • EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit
0456 small leak (negative
erly. • EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
pressure check)
valve and the circuit
• O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is miss-
ing or damaged
• Fuel level sensor and the circuit
• Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister purge vol-
ume control solenoid valve
CAUTION:
MIL may come on.

A
NOTE:
• If DTC P0456 is displayed with P0442, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0456.
• After repair, make sure that the hoses and clips are installed properly. EC
TESTING CONDITION:
• Open engine hood before conducting following procedure. C
• If any of following conditions are met just before the DTC confirmation procedure, leave the vehicle
for more than 1 hour.
- Fuel filler cap is removed. D
- Refilled or drained the fuel.
- EVAP component parts is/are removed.
• Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
E
WITH CONSULT-III
2. Make sure the following conditions are met.
F
FUEL LEVEL SE: 0.25 - 1.4V
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 32°C (32 - 90°F)
FUEL T/TMP SE: 0 - 35°C (32 - 95°F)
INT/A TEMP SE: More than 0°C (32°F) G
If NG, turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle) or refilling/draining
fuel until the output voltage condition of the “FUEL LEVEL SE” meets within the range above and leave
the vehicle for more than 1 hour. Then start from step 1). H
5. Select “EVAP V/S LEAK P0456/P1456” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-III. I
If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-454, "Diagnosis Procedure". J
NOTE:
• If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on CONSULT-III screen, go
to EC-71, "Basic Inspection".
• Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid K
valve properly.
L
WITH GST
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the EVAP very small leak function. During this check, a 1st M
CAUTION:
• Never use compressed air, doing so may damage the EVAP system.
• Do not start engine. N
• Do not exceeded 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi).
1. Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP service port. For the location of EVAP service
port, refer to EC-31, "Description". O

2. Set the pressure pump and a hose.
3. Also set a vacuum gauge via 3-way connector and a hose.
5. Connect GST and select Service $08.
6. Using Service $08 control the EVAP canister vent control valve
(close).
7. Apply pressure and make sure the following conditions are sat-
isfied.
Pressure to be applied: 2.7 kPa (20 mmHg, 0.79 inHg)
Time to be waited after the pressure drawn in to the EVAP
system and the pressure to be dropped: 60 seconds and
SEF462UI
the pressure should not be dropped more than 0.4 kPa (3
mmHg, 0.12 inHg).
8. Disconnect GST.
11. Restart engine and let it idle for 90 seconds.
12. Keep engine speed at 2,000 rpm for 30 seconds.
NOTE:
For more information, refer to GST Instruction Manual.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
SEF915U

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

5.INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP A
To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pres-
EC
NOTE:
C
D
SEF916U

E
With CONSULT-III
3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of F
the bar graph.
CAUTION:
• Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. G
detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. I
SEF200U
7.CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK K

Without CONSULT-III
2. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts L
until the end of test.)
O
PBIB1086E
then remove pump and EVAP service port adapter. P
CAUTION:

detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
SEF200U

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
attached.
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 10.
No (With CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 12.
No (Without CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 13.
PBIB1031E

attached.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 11.

With CONSULT-III
2. Start engine.

A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15. EC
NG >> GO TO 14.
13.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION C
Without CONSULT-III
2. Stop engine. D
E
OK or NG
F
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 14.
14.CHECK VACUUM HOSE G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15. H
I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16. J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
L
Refer to EC-436, "Component Inspection". M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.
NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. N
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection.
O
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19. P
>> GO TO 20.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 21.
21.CHECK RECIRCULATION LINE
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 22.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 23.
23.CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Refer to DI-21, "Electrical Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 24.
Refer to EC-134.
>> INSPECTION END

DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
A
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The EC
sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to
the “unified meter and A/C amp.”. The “unified meter and A/C amp.”
sends the fuel level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN commu-
nication line. C

2 : Fuel pressure regulator D
It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is vari-
able resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on PBIB2707E E
the movement of the fuel mechanical float.
F
NOTE:
• If DTC P0460 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-144. G
• If DTC P0460 is displayed with DTC U1010, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer
to EC-146.
When the vehicle is parked, naturally the fuel level in the fuel tank is stable. It means that output signal of the
H
fuel level sensor does not change. If ECM senses sloshing signal from the sensor, fuel level sensor malfunc-
tion is detected.
I
(The CAN communication line is open or
Even though the vehicle is parked, a signal be- shorted) J
P0460 Fuel level sensor circuit
ing varied is sent from the fuel level sensor to • Harness or connectors
0460 noise
ECM. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
• Unified meter and A/C amp.
• Fuel level sensor K
L
NOTE:
M
WITH CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and wait maximum of 2 consecutive minutes.
2. Check 1st trip DTC. N
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-III” above. O
1.CHECK FUEL GAUGE OPERATION P
Refer to DI-14, "Self-Diagnosis Mode of Combination Meter".

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Follow the instruction of DI-14, "Self-Diagnosis Mode of Combination Meter".
2.CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR AND CIRCUIT
Refer to DI-19, "Fuel Level Sensor Signal Inspection".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
Refer to EC-134.
>> INSPECTION END

FUEL LEVEL SENSOR

Refer to FL-4.

A
nication line. C

F
NOTE:
U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-144. G
to EC-146.
Driving long distances naturally affect fuel gauge level.
H
This diagnosis detects the fuel gauge malfunction of the gauge not moving even after a long distance has
been driven.
I
(The CAN communication line is open or
The output signal of the fuel level sensor does J
shorted)
P0461 Fuel level sensor circuit not change within the specified range even
0461 range/performance though the vehicle has been driven a long dis-
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
tance.
• Fuel level sensor K
L
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the fuel level sensor function. During this check, a 1st trip
DTC might not be confirmed.
WARNING: M
When performing following procedure, be sure to observe the handling of the fuel. Refer to FL-10.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before starting overall function check, preparation of draining fuel and refilling fuel is required.
N
WITH CONSULT-III
NOTE:
Start from step 10, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/ O
8 Imp gal) in advance.
1. Prepare a fuel container and a spare hose.
2. Release fuel pressure from fuel line, refer to EC-78, "Fuel Pressure Check".
3. Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit. P
4. Connect a spare fuel hose where the fuel feed hose was removed.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds then turn ON.
6. Select “FUEL LEVEL SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
7. Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it.
8. Select “FUEL PUMP” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
9. Touch “ON” and drain fuel approximately 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) and stop it.

11. Fill fuel into the fuel tank for 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal).
13. Confirm whether the voltage changes more than 0.03V during step 7 to 10 and 10 to 12.
WITH GST
NOTE:
Start from step 8, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8
Imp gal) in advance.
1. Prepare a fuel container and a spare hose.
2. Release fuel pressure from fuel line. Refer to EC-78, "Fuel Pressure Check".
3. Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit.
4. Connect a spare fuel hose where the fuel feed hose was removed.
6. Drain fuel by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) from the fuel tank using proper equipment.
7. Confirm that the fuel gauge indication varies.
8. Fill fuel into the fuel tank for 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal).
9. Confirm that the fuel gauge indication varies.
1.CHECK FUEL GAUGE OPERATION

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
Refer to EC-134.
>> INSPECTION END

FUEL LEVEL SENSOR

Refer to FL-4

DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
A
nication line. C

F
NOTE:
• If DTC P0462 or P0463 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for
DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-144. G
to EC-146.
This diagnosis indicates the former, to detect open or short circuit malfunction.
H
P0462 Fuel level sensor circuit An excessively low voltage is sent from the sen- • Harness or connectors I
0462 low input sor is sent to ECM. (The CAN communication line is open or
shorted)
P0463 Fuel level sensor circuit An excessively high voltage is sent from the (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) J
0463 high input sensor is sent to ECM. • Unified meter and A/C amp.
• Fuel level sensor

K
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at L
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at ignition
switch ON. M
WITH CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 5 seconds. N
WITH GST O
P
1.CHECK FUEL GAUGE OPERATION
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
Refer to EC-134.
>> INSPECTION END

FUEL LEVEL SENSOR

Refer to FL-4.

DTC P0500 VSS
DTC P0500 VSS
A
NOTE: EC
U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-144.
to EC-146. C
The vehicle speed signal is sent to the “unified meter and A/C amp”. from the VDC/TCS/ABS control unit (with
VDC models) or “ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)” (without VDC models) by CAN communication
line. The unified meter and A/C amp. then sends the signal to the ECM by CAN communication line. D
E
(The CAN communication line is open or short- F
ed)
The almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) signal from (The vehicle speed signal circuit is open or
P0500
Vehicle speed sensor vehicle speed sensor is sent to ECM even shorted)
G
0500
when vehicle is being driven. • Wheel sensor
• VDC/TCS/ABS control unit (with VDC models) H
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
(without VDC models)
FAIL-SAFE MODE I

J
When the fail-safe system for vehicle speed sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates (High) while
Vehicle speed sensor
engine is running.
DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000004656538 K
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. L
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION: M
Steps 1 and 2 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a
road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-III N
1. Start engine (VDC switch or TCS switch OFF).
2. Read “VHCL SPEED SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. The vehicle speed on CON-
SULT-III should exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable gear position. O
3. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. P
4. Warm engine up to normal operating temperature.
1,800 - 6,000 rpm (A/T)

ENG SPEED
1,800 - 6,000 rpm (M/T)

DTC P0500 VSS
5.0 - 31.8 msec (A/T)
B/FUEL SCHDL
5.0 - 31.8 msec (M/T)
Except P or N position (A/T)
Shift lever
Neutral position (M/T)
PW/ST SIGNAL OFF
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the vehicle speed sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st
WITH GST
1. Lift up drive wheels.
2. Start engine.
3. Read vehicle speed sensor signal in Service $01 with GST.
The vehicle speed sensor on GST should be able to exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with
suitable gear position.
1.CHECK DTC WITH “VDC/TCS/ABS CONTROL UNIT (WITH VDC MODELS)” OR “ABS ACTUATOR AND
ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) (WITHOUT VDC MODELS)”
Refer to BRC-81 (with VDC models) or refer to BRC-43 (without VDC models).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC WITH UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP.
Refer to DI-5.
>> INSPECTION END

DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM
A
NOTE: EC
If DTC P0506 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for the other DTC.
The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine adjustment of the air, which is let
into the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. The operating of the throttle valve is
varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The crankshaft position sensor (POS) detects C
the actual engine speed and sends a signal to the ECM.
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator so that the engine speed coincides with the target value
memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily. D
The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consideration various engine conditions,
such as during warming up, deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner, power steering and cooling fan
operation, etc.).
E
F
Idle speed control sys-
P0506 The idle speed is less than the target idle speed • Electric throttle control actuator
tem RPM lower than ex- G
0506 by 100 rpm or more. • Intake air leak
pected

H
NOTE:
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. I
• If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, perform EC-77, "Idle Air Volume Learning",
before conducting DTC Confirmation Procedure. For the target idle speed, refer to EC-664.
TESTING CONDITION:
• Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. J
• Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C(14°F).
4. Restart engine and run it for at least 1 minute at idle speed.
L
M

N
OK or NG
O
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Discover air leak location and repair.
2.REPLACE ECM P
1. Stop engine.
2. Replace ECM.

>> INSPECTION END

A
NOTE: EC
If DTC P0507 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for the other DTC.
The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine adjustment of the air, which is let
into the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. The operating of the throttle valve is
varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The crankshaft position sensor (POS) detects C
the actual engine speed and sends a signal to the ECM.
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator so that the engine speed coincides with the target value
memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily. D
The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consideration various engine conditions,
such as during warming up, deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner, power steering and cooling fan
operation, etc.).
E
F
Idle speed control sys- • Electric throttle control actuator
P0507 The idle speed is more than the target idle
tem RPM higher than • Intake air leak G
0507 speed by 200 rpm or more.
expected • PCV system

H
NOTE:
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. I
• If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, perform EC-77, "Idle Air Volume Learning",
before conducting DTC Confirmation Procedure. For the target idle speed, refer to EC-664.
TESTING CONDITION:
• Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. J
• Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C(14°F).
4. Restart engine and run it for at least 1 minute at idle speed.
L
M
1.CHECK PCV HOSE CONNECTION

N
Confirm that PCV hose is connected correctly.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
O
1. Start engine and let it idle. P
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Discover air leak location and repair.
3.REPLACE ECM
1. Stop engine.

2. Replace ECM.
>> INSPECTION END

DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR
A
Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor (1) is installed to the power EC

steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. This
sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering load
into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator and adjusts the C
throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine speed and
adjusts the idle speed for the increased load.
D
2 : Alternator
: Vehicle front
PBIB3511E E
• Engine: After warming up, idle the Steering wheel: Not being turned OFF G
PW/ST SIGNAL
engine Steering wheel: Being turned ON
On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000004656551 H
The MIL will not light up for this self-diagnosis.

NOTE:
I
Refer to EC-482.
J
P0550 Power steering pressure An excessively low or high voltage from the
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
0550 sensor circuit sensor is sent to ECM. K
• Power steering pressure sensor
L
NOTE:
M
3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-473, "Diagnosis Procedure". N

TBWT1651E
CAUTION:

TER- A
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
EC
Sensor power supply
valve timing control position C
[Engine is running]
• Steering wheel: Being turned
0.5 - 4.5V D
Power steering pressure
87 Y
sensor [Engine is running]
0.4 - 0.8V
• Steering wheel: Not being turned
E
Sensor ground
[Engine is running]
96 P/L • Warm-up condition 0V
• Idle speed
steering pressure sensor] F
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS G

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. H
PBIB3560E
L
: Vehicle front
M
N
PBIB3561E


finisher removed)
: Vehicle front
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK PSP SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect power steering pressure (PNP) sensor (1) harness
connector.
1 : Alternator
: Vehicle front
PBIB3511E
3. Check voltage between PSP sensor terminal 1 and ground with

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0188E
3.CHECK PSP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

3. Check harness continuity between PSP sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 96.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK PSP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 87 and PSP sensor terminal 2.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK PSP SENSOR
OK or NG A
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace PNP sensor.
6.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT EC
Refer to EC-134.
C
>> INSPECTION END
D
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR
E
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 87 and ground under the
F
Condition Voltage
Steering wheel: Being turned 0.5 - 4.5V G
Steering wheel: Not being turned 0.4 - 0.8V
PBIB3575E
I
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR

Refer to PS-33. J

DTC P0603 ECM POWER SUPPLY
Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition switch
is turned OFF for the ECM memory function of the DTC memory, the
air-fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory, the Idle Air Vol-
ume Learning value memory, etc.
PBIB3532E
P0603 ECM power supply cir- ECM back-up RAM system does not function [The ECM power supply (back-up) circuit
0603 cuit properly. is open or shorted.]
• ECM
NOTE:
2. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn ON.
3. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for four times.

EC
P
TBWT1652E
CAUTION:

TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
Power supply for ECM BATTERY VOLTAGE
93 P [Ignition switch: OFF]
(Back-up) (11 - 14V)
1.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY

SULT-III or tester.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB3576E

• 15A fuse
• Harness for open or short between ECM and battery

Refer to EC-134.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-III.
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0603 displayed again?
With GST
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 5.
5.REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.

Refer to BL-135, "ECM Re-communicating Function". A
EC
C
>> INSPECTION END

DTC P0605 ECM
DTC P0605 ECM
The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal

input and output and for power supply. The ECM controls the engine.
PBIB3532E
This self-diagnosis has one or two trip detection logic.
A) ECM calculation function is malfunctioning.
P0605
Engine control module B) ECM EEP-ROM system is malfunctioning. • ECM
0605
C) ECM self shut-off function is malfunctioning.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
ECM enters fail-safe mode when the malfunction A is detected.
Detected items Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode

• ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5
Malfunction A degrees) by the return spring.
• ECM deactivates ASCD operation.
Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first. If the 1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B. If there is no malfunction on PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION
B, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.
NOTE:
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C
3. Repeat step 3 for 32 times.

DTC P0605 ECM
EC
1.INSPECTION START
With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON. C
2. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-III.
See EC-480, "DTC Confirmation Procedure". D
With GST
1. Turn ignition switch ON. E
F
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2. G
2.REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM. H
3. Perform EC-75, "VIN Registration". I
7. Perform EC-77, "Idle Air Volume Learning". J
>> INSPECTION END

K

DTC P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
Trouble diagnosis
name
(APP sensor 1 circuit is shorted.)
(TP sensor circuit is shorted.)
[CMP sensor (PHASE) (bank 1) circuit is shorted.]
ECM detects a voltage of power [EVT control position sensor (bank 1) circuit is shorted.]
P0643 Sensor power supply
source for sensor is excessively (PSP sensor circuit is shorted.)
0643 circuit short
low or high. • Accelerator pedal position sensor
• Throttle position sensor
• Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) (bank 1)
• Exhaust valve timing control position sensor (bank 1)
• Power steering pressure sensor
FAIL-SAFE MODE

ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return
spring.
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
2. Check DTC.

EC
P
TBWT1653E
CAUTION:

TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply
(bank 2)]
Sensor power supply
(bank 1)]
Sensor power supply
97 R
98 SB
Sensor power supply
sensor 1)
Sensor power supply
sensor 2)


EC
PBIB3560E
D
: Vehicle front
E
F
PBIB3561E I

finisher removed) J
: Vehicle front
OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I L
1. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness
connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. M
O
PBIB1080E

3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 6 and ground with
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0914E
3.CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS


43 Electric throttle control actuator (bank 2) terminal 6 EC-346
44 Electric throttle control actuator (bank 1) terminal 6 EC-346
60 EVT control position sensor (bank 1) terminal 1 EC-498
PSP sensor terminal 1 EC-472
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK COMPONENTS
• Camshaft position senosr (PHASE) (bank 1) (Refer to EC-383, "Component Inspection".)
• Power steering pressure sensor (Refer to EC-475, "Component Inspection".)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK TP SENSOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 6.
1. Replace malfunctioning electric throttle control actuator.
>> INSPECTION END

7.CHECK APP SENSOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.

3. Perform EC-76, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". A
>> INSPECTION END EC

Refer to EC-134.
C
>> INSPECTION END

D

DTC P0850 PNP SWITCH
When the shift position is P or N TCM is ON.(A/T models)

When the shift position is Neutral, park/neutral position (PNP) switch is ON. (M/T models)
ECM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the ON signal) exists.

Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
ON
P/N POSI SW • Ignition switch: ON position
Shift lever: Except above position OFF
The signal of the TCM (A/T models) or park/
TCM (A/T models) [The park/neutral position (PNP) switch
P0850 neutral position (PNP) switch (M/T models) is
Park/neutral position circuit is open or shorted.]
0850 not changed in the process of engine starting
switch (M/T models) • Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
and driving.
• TCM (A/T models)
CAUTION:
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-III
2. Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Then check the “P/N POSI SW” sig-
nal under the following conditions.
Position (Shift lever) Known-good signal

N or P position (A/T)
ON
Except above position OFF
If OK, go to following steps.
ENG SPEED 1,400 - 6375 rpm


A
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the TCM (A/T models) or park/neutral position (PNP) switch
(M/T models) circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST EC
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 109 (PNP switch signal)
and ground under the following conditions. C
Condition (Shift lever) Voltage V (Known-good data)

P or N position (A/T) D
Approx. 0
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Except above position
(11 - 14V) E
MBIB0015E

A/T MODELS
TBWT1654E
CAUTION:

TER- A
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
EC
[Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE
• Shift lever: P or N position (11 - 14V)
109 BR PNP switch
0V C

M/T MODELS
TBWT1655E
CAUTION:

TER- A
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
EC
• Shift lever: Neutral position (11 - 14V)
109 BR PNP switch
0V C
D
A/T MODELS
1.CHECK DTC WITH TCM
E
Refer to AT-37, "OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. F
2.CHECK STARTING SYSTEM
Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it to START. G
Does starter motor operate?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 3. H
No >> Refer to SC-8.
3.CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT I
2. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector.
J
4. Check harness continuity between A/T assembly terminal 9 and ECM terminal 109.
Continuity should exist. K

OK or NG
L
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART M
• Harness connectors F102, M72
• Harness for open or short between A/T assembly and ECM. N
5.CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II O
1. Check harness continuity between A/T assembly terminal 9 and TCM terminal 8.
Refer to AT-93.
P
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

Refer to EC-134.
>> INSPECTION END

M/T MODELS
1.CHECK PNP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect TCM (A/T models) or park/neutral position (PNP) switch (M/T models) harness connector.
4. Check the voltage between PNP switch terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3
NG >> GO TO 2.
• Harness connector E10, F1
• 10A fuse
• IPDM harness connector E7
• Harness for open or short between ECM and fuse
3.CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 109 and PNP switch terminal 1.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
• Harness connector F102, M72
• Harness for open or short between PNP switch and ECM
5.CHECK PNP SWITCH
Refer to MT-12, "Checking".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace PNP switch.
Refer to EC-134.
OK or NG
OK >> Replace IPDM E/R.

NG >> Repair open dircuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
A
EC

DTC P1078 P1084 EVT CONTROL POSITION SENSOR
Exhaust valve timing control position sensor detects the concave

groove of the exhaust camshaft rear end.
This sensor signal is used for sensing a position of the exhaust cam-
shaft.
This sensor uses a Hall IC.
Based on the position of the exhaust camshaft, ECM controls
exhaust valve timing control magnet retarder to optimize the shut/
open timing of exhaust valve for the driving condition.
PBIB3565E

• Engine: After warming up Idle −5° - 5°CA
EXH/V TIM B1
(M/T) position Around 2,500 rpm while the engine speed
EXH/V TIM B2 Approx. 0° - 30°CA
• Air conditioner switch: OFF is rising
• No load
NOTE:
Refer to EC-482.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause A
[Exhaust valve timing control position
sensor (bank 1) circuit is open or short- EC
ed)
P1078 • Exhaust valve timing control position
1078 sensor (bank 1)
(Bank 1) • Crankshaft position sensor (POS) C
(bank 1)
• Accumulation of debris to the signal
pick-up portion of the camshaft D
[EVT control position sensor (bank 2)
circuit is shorted.] E
Exhaust valve timing con- An excessively high or low voltage from the [CMP sensor (PHASE) (bank 2) circuit
trol position sensor circuit sensor is sent to ECM. is open or shorted.]
(APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.) F
P1084 (Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is
1084 shorted.) G
(Bank 2) • Exhaust valve timing control position
sensor (bank 2)
• Crankshaft position sensor (POS) H
(bank 2)
• EVAP control system pressure sensor I
• Accumulation of debris to the signal
pick-up portion of the camshaft
J
NOTE:
K
L
M

BANK 1
TBWT1656E
CAUTION:

TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
4.0 - 5.0V
C
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
NOTE: D
idle.
Exhaust valve timing control PBIB3551E

E
58 Y/G
4.0 - 5.0V
[Engine is running] F
G
PBIB3552E
Sensor power supply

[Camshaft position sensor H
steering pressure sensor] I
Sensor ground
[Exhaust valve timing con- [Engine is running]
88 LG/B trol position sensor (bank 1), • Warm-up condition 0V J
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) K

BANK 2
TBWT1657E
CAUTION:

TER- A
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
EC
Sensor power supply
(POS)]
4.0 - 5.0V
C
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed D
NOTE:
idle.
E
PBIB3551E
62 B/Y
4.0 - 5.0V
F
[Engine is running]
G
PBIB3552E
Sensor power supply H

sensor (bank 2)] I
Sensor ground
[Exhaust valve timing con- [Engine is running]
88 LG/B trol position sensor (bank 1), • Warm-up condition 0V J
Sensor power supply
K
sensor 2)
Sensor power supply
107 BR (EVAP control system pres- [Ignition switch: ON] 5V L
sure sensor)
Sensor power supply
111 OR (Refrigerant pressure sen- [Ignition switch: ON] 5V M
sor)
N
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS O

2. Loosen and retighten ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-142, "Ground Inspection" . P

PBIB3560E

: Vehicle front

PBIB3561E

finisher removed)
: Vehicle front
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Disconnect exhaust valve timing control position sensor harness connector.
PBIB3518E
1. Exhaust valve timing control position 2. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) 3. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
sensor (bank 2)

3. Check voltage between exhaust valve timing control position
sensor terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. A
OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG-1 >> P1078: Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to
power in harness connector. C
NG-2 >> P1084: GO TO 3.
PBIB3312E
3.CHECK EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II D

E
3. Check harness continuity between exhaust valve timing control position sensor terminal 1 and ECM termi-
nal 64.
F
OK or NG
G
OK >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III H
ECM terminal Sensor terminal Reference Wiring Diagram I

64 J
107 EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 3 EC-432 K
OK or NG
L
OK >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK COMPONENTS M
• Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) (bank 2) (Refer to EC-383, "Component Inspection" .) N
• EVAP control system pressure sensor (Refer to EC-436, "Component Inspection" .)
OK or NG
O
OK >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK APP SENSOR P
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> GO TO 7.

>> INSPECTION END

8.CHECK EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between exhaust valve timing control position sensor terminal 2 and ECM termi-
nal 88. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors..
9.CHECK EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 58 (bank 1) or 62 (bank 2) and exhaust valve timing con-
trol position sensor terminal 3.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
10.CHECK EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Replace exhaust valve timing control position sensor.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
13.CHECK CAMSHAFT (EXH)
Check the following;

• Chipping signal plate of camshaft rear end A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft EC
rear end or replace malfunctioning camshaft.
PBIB3534E
14.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT D
Refer to EC-134.
E
>> INSPECTION END
F
EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR
1. Disconnect exhaust valve timing control position sensor harness connector.
G
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping. H
PBIB3566E K
5. Check resistance as shown below.

L
1 (+) - 2 (-)
1 (+) - 3 (-) Except 0 or ∞ M
2 (+) - 3 (-)
6. If NG, replace exhaust valve timing control position sensor.
N
PBIA9584J
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004656584 O
EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR

Refer to EM-72. P

DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL
DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL
P1148 The closed loop control function for bank 1 does
1148 not operate even when vehicle is driving in the • Harness or connectors
(Bank 1) specified condition. [The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit is
Closed loop control
open or shorted.]
P1168 function The closed loop control function for bank 2 does • Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
1168 not operate even when vehicle is driving in the • Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
(Bank 2) specified condition.
NOTE:
DTC P1148 or P1168 is displayed with another DTC for air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
Perform the trouble diagnosis for the corresponding DTC.

DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT
DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT
A
The malfunction information related to TCS is transferred through the CAN communication line from VDC/ EC
TCS/ABS control unit (with VDC models) or “ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)” (without VDC mod-
els) to ECM.
Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only for VDC/TCS/ABS control unit
(with VDC models) or “ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)” (without VDC models) but also for C
ECM after TCS related repair.
D
• Freeze frame data is not stored in the ECM for this self-diagnosis.
• The MIL will not light up for this self-diagnosis.
E
• VDC/TCS/ABS control unit
ECM receives a malfunction information from F
(with VDC models)
P1211 VDC/TCS/ABS control unit (with VDC models)
TCS control unit • ABS actuator and electric unit (control
1211 or “ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)”
unit) (without VDC models)
(without VDC models).
• TCS related parts
G
TESTING CONDITION: H
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-III
I
3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-507, "Diagnosis Procedure". J
WITH GST
K
Go to BRC-81 (With VDC models) or BRC-43 (Without VDC models).

L

DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE
DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE
NOTE:
U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-144.
to EC-146.
This CAN communication line is used to control the smooth engine operation during the TCS operation. Pulse
signals are exchanged between ECM and VDC/TCS/ABS control unit (with VDC models) or “ABS actuator
and electric unit (control unit)” (without VDC models).
Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only for VDC/TCS/ABS control unit
(with VDC models) or “ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)” (without VDC models) but also for
ECM after TCS related repair.
• Freeze frame data is not stored in the ECM for this self-diagnosis.
ECM can not receive the information from (The CAN communication line is open or short-
VDC/TCS/ABS control unit (with VDC ed.)
P1212
TCS communication line models) or “ABS actuator and electric unit • VDC/TCS/ABS control unit (with VDC models)
1212
(control unit)” (without VDC models) con- • ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
tinuously. (without VDC models)
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle.
Go to BRC-81 (With VDC models) or BRC-43 (Without VDC models).

DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
A
NOTE:
U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-144. C
to EC-146.
Cooling Fan Control D

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) E

Wheel sensor Vehicle speed*2 Cooling fan IPDM E/R F
control (Cooling fan relays)
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner ON signal*2 G
Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure
*1: The ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
*2: This signal is sent to ECM through CAN communication line. H
The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, refrigerant
pressure, and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 3-step control [HIGH/LOW/OFF].
Cooling Fan Operation I
N
PBIB2483E
Cooling Fan Relay Operation

The ECM controls cooling fan relays in the IPDM E/R through CAN communication line. O
Cooling fan relay

Cooling fan speed P
1 2 3
Stop OFF OFF OFF
Low ON OFF OFF
High ON ON ON
Cooling Fan Motor

The cooling fan operates at each speed when the current flows in the cooling fan motor as follows.
Cooling fan motor terminals

Cooling fan speed
(+) (−)
1 4
Low
2 3
High 1 and 2 3 and 4

AIR COND SIG Air conditioner switch: ON
engine ON
OFF
(206°F) or less
Engine coolant temperature is between
COOLING FAN engine LOW
98°C (208°F) and 99°C (210°F)
HI
(212°F) or more
If the cooling fan or another component in the cooling system malfunctions, engine coolant temperature will
rise.
When the engine coolant temperature reaches an abnormally high temperature condition, a malfunction is
indicated.
(The cooling fan circuit is open or short-
ed.)
• Cooling fan does not operate properly (Over-
• Cooling fan
heat).
• IPDM E/R
• Cooling fan system does not operate proper-
(Cooling fan relays)
P1217 Engine over tempera- ly (Overheat).
• Radiator hose
1217 ture (Overheat) • Engine coolant was not added to the system
• Radiator
using the proper filling method.
• Radiator cap
• Engine coolant is not within the specified
• Water pump
range.
• Thermostat
For more information, refer to EC-518,
"Main 12 Causes of Overheating".
CAUTION:
When a malfunction is indicated, be sure to replace the coolant. Refer to CO-9, "Changing Engine
Coolant". Also, replace the engine oil. Refer to LU-6, "Changing Engine Oil".
1. Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute. Be sure to
use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-10, "Engine Oil Recommendation".
2. After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow noise is emitted.
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the cooling fan. During this check, a DTC might not be con-
firmed.
WARNING:

Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pres-
sure fluid escaping from the radiator. A
Wrap a thick cloth around cap. Carefully remove the cap by turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up
pressure to escape. Then turn the cap all the way off.
WITH CONSULT-III EC
1. Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator.
NOTE:
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level. C
If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below
the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-513,
"Diagnosis Procedure". D
2. Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer
filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-513,
"Diagnosis Procedure".
E
4. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON- SEF621W
SULT-III.
F
5. If the results are NG, go to EC-513, "Diagnosis Procedure".
WITH GST
1. Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator. G
NOTE:
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level.
If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below H
the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-513,
2. Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer I
filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-513,
3. Start engine.
J
CAUTION: SEF621W
Be careful not to overheat engine.

4. Turn air conditioner switch ON.
K
5. Turn blower fan switch ON.
6. Make sure that cooling fans operates at low speed.
If OK, go to the following steps. L
8. Turn air conditioner switch and blower fan switch OFF.
M
9. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connec-
tor.
10. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor
N
harness connector.
SEC163BA
11. Restart engine and make sure that cooling fans operates at O
higher speed than low speed.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to overheat engine. P
MEC475B

TBWT1658E

EC
TBWT1659E
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004656599 P
1.INSPECTION START
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 4.

2.CHECK COOLING FAN LOW SPEED OPERATION
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III and touch “LOW” on the CONSULT-
III screen.
3. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at low speed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Check cooling fan low speed control circuit. (Refer to "PROCEDURE A".)
3.CHECK COOLING FAN HIGH SPEED OPERATION
With CONSULT-III
1. Touch “HIGH” on the CONSULT-III screen.
2. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at higher speed than low speed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Check cooling fan high speed control circuit. (Refer to "PROCEDURE B".)
4.CHECK COOLING FAN LOW SPEED OPERATION
Without CONSULT-III
2. Turn air conditioner switch ON.
3. Turn blower fan switch ON.
4. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at low speed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Check cooling fan low speed control circuit. (Refer to
"PROCEDURE A".)
SEC163BA
5.CHECK COOLING FAN HIGH SPEED OPERATION

Without CONSULT-III
2. Turn air conditioner switch and blower fan switch OFF.
3. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
4. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
5. Restart engine and make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 oper-
ate at higher speed than low speed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Check cooling fan high speed control circuit. (Refer to
"PROCEDURE B".)
MEC475B
6.CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK

Refer to CO-9, "Inspection".
OK or NG

OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Check the following for leak. A
• Hose
• Radiator
• Water pump
EC
7.CHECK RADIATOR CAP
Refer to CO-14, "Checking Radiator Cap".
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace radiator cap.
8.CHECK THERMOSTAT D
Refer to CO-25.
OK or NG E
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace thermostat
9.CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR F
OK or NG
G
OK >> GO TO 10.
10.CHECK MAIN 12 CAUSES H
If the cause cannot be isolated, refer to EC-518, "Main 12 Causes of Overheating".
>> INSPECTION END I
PROCEDURE A
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT J
3. Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminals 15, 16 and ground K
with CONSULT-III or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage L

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2. M
PBIB1924E
N
Check the following. O
• 40A fusible links
• Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and battery
P
3.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 harness connector and cooling fan motor-2 harness connector.

PBIB3509E

: Vehicle front
2. Disconnect all IPDM E/R harness connectors.

3. Check harness continuity between the following;
cooling fan motor-1 terminal 2 and IPDM E/R terminal 11,
cooling fan motor-1 terminal 3 and ground,
IPDM E/R terminal 38, 60 and ground,
Refer to wiring diagram.

cooling fan motor-2 terminal 3 and ground.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
• Harness connector E12, F3
els wiithout VDC system, navigation system and telephone)
• Harness for open or short between cooling fan motors-1, 2 and IPDM E/R
• Harness for open or short between cooling fan motors-1, 2 and ground
• Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and ground
5.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning cooling fan motors.
Perform EC-134.
OK or NG
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connector.
PROCEDURE B

1.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS CIRCUIT A
2. Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 harness connector and cooling fan motor-2 harness connector.
EC
PBIB3509E
E
: Vehicle front
F
3. Disconnect all IPDM E/R harness connectors.
cooling fan motor-1 terminal 4 and IPDM E/R terminal 9, G
IPDM E/R terminal 14 and ground,
H
5. Also check harness connector for short to ground or short to power.
6. Check harness continuity between the following; I
Refer to wiring diagram. J

7. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2. L
• Harness for open or short between cooling fan motors-1, 2 and IPDM E/R
• Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and ground
N
3.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS
Refer to EC-518, "Component Inspection". O
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning cooling fan motors. P
Perform EC-134.
OK or NG

Main 12 Causes of Overheating INFOID:0000000004656600
Engine Step Inspection item Equipment Standard Reference page

OFF 1 • Blocked radiator • Visual No blocking —
• Blocked condenser
• Blocked radiator grille
• Blocked bumper
2 • Coolant mixture • Coolant tester 50 - 50% coolant mixture MA-10
3 • Coolant level • Visual Coolant up to MAX level in CO-9
reservoir tank and radiator
filler neck
4 • Radiator cap • Pressure tester 88 - 127 kPa CO-14
(0.90 - 1.30 kg/cm2, 12.8 -
18.4 psi) (Limit)
ON*2 5 • Coolant leaks • Visual No leaks CO-9
ON*2 6 • Thermostat • Touch the upper and Both hoses should be hot CO-25
lower radiator hoses
ON*1 7 • Cooling fan • CONSULT-III Operating See trouble diagnosis for

DTC P1217 (EC-509).
OFF 8 • Combustion gas leak • Color checker chemical Negative —
tester 4 Gas analyzer
ON*3 9 • Coolant temperature • Visual Gauge less than 3/4 when —

gauge driving
• Coolant overflow to res- • Visual No overflow during driving CO-9
ervoir tank and idling
OFF*4 10 • Coolant return from res- • Visual Should be initial level in CO-9
ervoir tank to radiator reservoir tank
OFF 11 • Cylinder head • Straight gauge feeler 0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maxi- EM-89
gauge mum distortion (warping)
12 • Cylinder block and pis- • Visual No scuffing on cylinder EM-106
tons walls or piston
*1: Turn the ignition switch ON.
*2: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes.
*3: Drive at 90 km/h (55 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes.
*4: After 60 minutes of cool down time.
For more information, refer to CO-6.
COOLING FAN MOTORS-1 AND -2

1. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connectors.
2. Supply cooling fan motor terminals with battery voltage and
check operation.
terminals
Speed
(+) (−)
1 4
Low
Cooling fan motor 2 3
High 1 and 2 3 and 4 SEF734W
Cooling fan motor should operate.

If NG, replace cooling fan motors.

DTC P1225, P1234 TP SENSOR
A

PBIB0145E E
The MIL will not light up for this self-diagnosis. F
P1225 G
1225
(Bank 1) Closed throttle position Closed throttle position learning value is exces- • Electric throttle control actuator
P1234 learning performance sively low. (TP sensor 1 and 2) H
1234
(Bank 2)

I
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at J
TESTING CONDITION:
K
3. Turn ignition switch ON. L
M
1.CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY N

2. Remove the intake air duct.
3. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and the housing.
O
PBIB3513E

1. Throttle valve (bank 1) 2. Throttle valve (bank 2)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle control actuator inside.
>> INSPECTION END


Refer to EM-18.

A

PBIB0145E E
The MIL will not light up for this self-diagnosis. F
P1226 G
1226
(Bank 1) Closed throttle position Closed throttle position learning is not per- • Electric throttle control actuator
P1235 learning performance formed successfully, repeatedly. (TP sensor 1 and 2) H
1235
(Bank 2)

I
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at J
TESTING CONDITION:
K
3. Turn ignition switch ON. L
4. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for 32 times.
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-521, "Diagnosis Procedure". M
1.CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY N

2. Remove the intake air duct. O

PBIB3513E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
>> INSPECTION END


Refer to EM-18.

DTC P1233, P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
A
NOTE: EC
If DTC P1233 or P2101 is displayed with DTC P1238, P1290, P2100, P2119 first perform the trouble
diagnosis for DTC P1238, P2119 or P1290, P2100. Refer to EC-539 or EC-549.
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc.
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve. C
The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feed-
back to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in
response to driving condition. D
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. E
P1233 F
(Bank 2) Electric throttle control Electric throttle control function does not oper- (The throttle control motor circuit is open
P2101 performance ate properly. or shorted) G
2101 • Electric throttle control actuator
(Bank 1)
FAIL-SAFE MODE H
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode I

spring.
J
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at K
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V when engine L
is running.
2. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds. M
3. Check DTC.
N

BANK 1
TBWT1666E
CAUTION:

TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
0 - 14V
C
• Engine stopped
• Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) D
Throttle control motor PBIB3539E

E
2 G
(Open) (bank 1)
0 - 14V

• Engine stopped
F
G
PBIB3540E

power supply (bank 1) (11 - 14V) H
0 - 14V

• Engine stopped I
(Close) (bank 1)
operation J
PBIB3541E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Ignition switch: OFF] K
[Ignition switch: ON] 0 - 1.0V
52 R/W
(11 - 14V)
L

BANK 2
TBWT1667E
CAUTION:

TER- A
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
EC
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Ignition switch: OFF] C
0 - 14V D
• Engine stopped
(Close) (bank 2) E
operation
PBIB3541E
F
0 - 14V

• Engine stopped
H
PBIB3539E
50 PU/W
(Open) (bank 2)
0 - 14V
I
• Engine stopped
• Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) J
PBIB3540E
K
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) L
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS M

PBIB3560E


: Vehicle front

PBIB3561E

finisher removed)
: Vehicle front
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I
Check voltage between ECM terminal 3 (bank 1), 52 (bank 2) and
ground under the following conditions with CONSULT-III or tester.
Ignition switch Voltage

OFF Approximately 0V
Battery voltage
ON
(11 - 14V)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
3.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

SULT-III or tester.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB3579E
4.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

3. Check continuity between ECM terminal 25 and IPDM E/R terminal 47.


OK or NG
EC
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
5.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART C
D
6.CHECK FUSE E
1. Disconnect 15A fuse.
2. Check 15A fuse for blown.
OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 9.
G
7.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E8. H
3. Check continuity between ECM terminal 3 (bank 1), 52 (bank 2) and IPDM E/R terminal 42.

OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.
• Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R L
M
Refer to EC-134.
OK or NG N
10.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT O
P

PBIB3504E
1. Electric throttle control acutator 2. Electric throttle control acutator

(bank 1) (bank 2)

Electric throttle control ac-

Bank ECM terminal Continuity
tuator terminal
2 Should exist
1
4 Should not exist
1
2 Should not exist
2
4 Should exist
49 Should not exist
1
50 Should exist
2
49 Should exist
2
50 Should not exist
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
11.CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY
PBIB3513E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
12.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13. A
NG >> GO TO 14.
EC
Refer to EC-134.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14. C
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. D
E
>> INSPECTION END
F
THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR

1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. G
2. Check resistance between terminals 1 and 2.
J
PBIB3581E
Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15 Ω [at 25 °C (77°F)] K

3. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next step.
L
M
Refer to EM-18.
N

DTC P1236, P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feed-
back to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in
response to driving condition.
P1236
(Bank 2) (The throttle control motor circuit is short-
Throttle control motor ECM detects short in both circuits between
ed.)
P2118 circuit short ECM and throttle control motor.
• Electric throttle control actuator
2118 (Throttle control motor)
(Bank 1)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode

spring.
NOTE:
3. Check DTC.

A
BANK 1
EC
P
TBWT1668E
CAUTION:

TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
0 - 14V

• Engine stopped

2 G
(Open) (bank 1)
0 - 14V

• Engine stopped
PBIB3540E

0 - 14V

• Engine stopped
(Close) (bank 1)
operation
PBIB3541E
BATTERY VOLTAGE

BANK 2
A
EC
TBWT1669E
P
CAUTION:

TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
0 - 14V

• Engine stopped
(Close) (bank 2)
operation
PBIB3541E
0 - 14V

• Engine stopped
PBIB3539E
50 PU/W
(Open) (bank 2)
0 - 14V

• Engine stopped
PBIB3540E


PBIB3560E

1. Body ground E17 2. Body ground E43 3. Body ground B102 A

: Vehicle front

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. EC
PBIB3561E
F
finisher removed)
G
: Vehicle front
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. H
2.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
I
L
PBIB3504E
1. Electric throttle control acutator 2. Electric throttle control acutator M

(bank 1) (bank 2)

3. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. N
Electric throttle control ac- O

tuator terminal
2 Should exist
1
4 Should not exist P
1
2 Should not exist
2
4 Should exist

Electric throttle control ac-
tuator terminal
49 Should not exist
1
50 Should exist
2
49 Should exist
2
50 Should not exist
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 5.
Refer to EC-134.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
>> INSPECTION END

THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR

2. Check resistance between terminals 1 and 2.
PBIB3581E
Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15 Ω [at 25 °C (77°F)]

3. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next step.

Refer to EM-18 .

DTC P1238, P2119 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
A
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. EC
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
The throttle position sensor detects the throttle valve position, and the opening and closing speed of the throt-
tle valve and feeds the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle
valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening C
angle properly in response to driving condition.
D
E
P1238 Electric throttle control actuator does not func-
1238 A) tion properly due to the return spring malfunc-
(Bank 2) tion. F
Electric throttle control
• Electric throttle control actuator
P2119 actuator Throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is
B)
2119 not in specified range.
(Bank 1) C) ECM detects the throttle valve is stuck open. G
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. H
Malfunction A
ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the idle position. The I
engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm.
Malfunction B ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20 degrees or less.
While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, the engine stalls. J
Malfunction C The engine can restart in N or P (A/T), Neutral (M/T) position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm
or more.

K
NOTE:
• Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B first. If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform L
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.
M
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B
2. Set shift lever to D position (A/T) or 1st position (M/T), and wait at least 3 seconds. N
3. Set shift lever to P position (A/T) or Neutral position (M/T).
5. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. O
6. Set shift lever to D position (A/T) or 1st position (M/T), and wait at least 3 seconds.
7. Set shift lever to P position (A/T) or Neutral position (M/T).
P
9. Check DTC.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C
2. Set shift lever to D position (A/T) or 1st position (M/T) and wait at least 3 seconds.

3. Set shift lever to N, P position (A/T) or Neutral (M/T) position.
5. Check DTC.
1.CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY

PBIB3513E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
>> INSPECTION END

A

PBIB0145E E

TP SEN 1-B1 • Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V G
TP SEN 2-B1*1 (Engine stopped)
TP SEN 1-B2 • Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
TP SEN 2-B2*1 position
H

I
NOTE:
If DTC P1239 or P2135 is displayed with DTC P0643, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0643. J
Refer to EC-482.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause K
P2135
2135 • Harness or connector
(Bank 1) Throttle position sensor Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM (TP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or
circuit range/perfor- compared with the signals from TP sensor 1 shorted.) L
P1239 mance and TP sensor 2. • Electric throttle control actuator
1239 (TP sensor 1 and 2)
(Bank 2)
M
FAIL-SAFE MODE
N
degrees. O
DTC Confirmation Procedure INFOID:0000000004656633 P
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:

2. Check DTC.
BANK 1
TBWT1672E

CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam- A
TER-
EC
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
[Ignition switch: ON] C
• Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
30 Y D
• Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
• Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed E
• Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
• Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) F
34 L
• Engine stopped
More than 0.36V G
40 R [Throttle position sensor • Warm-up condition 0V H
Sensor power supply
44 B [Throttle position sensor [Ignition switch: ON] 5V I
(bank 1)]

BANK 2
TBWT1673E
CAUTION:

TER- A
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
EC
• Engine stopped
More than 0.36V
31 L/G
• Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V
D
• Engine stopped
Less than 4.75V E
35 L/Y
More than 0.36V
Sensor power supply
G
(bank 2)]
48 W/L [Throttle position sensor • Warm-up condition 0V H

I

J
K
PBIB3560E N

: Vehicle front O

PBIB3561E

finisher removed)
: Vehicle front
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
PBIB3504E

(bank 1) (bank 2)

3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal 6 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
PBIB3471E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to ground or short to power in harness or connec-
tors.
3.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1) or 48 (bank 2). A
Continuity should exist. EC

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. C
4.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
D
ECM terminal 30 (bank 1) or 31 (bank 2) and electric throttle control actuator terminal 4,
ECM terminal 34 (bank 1) or 35 (bank 2) and electric throttle control actuator terminal 5.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. E

2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
G
Refer to EC-547, "Component Inspection". H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6. I
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. J
K
>> INSPECTION END
Refer to EC-134. L
>> INSPECTION END

M
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR N

3. Turn ignition switch ON. O

5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 30 [TP sensor 1 (bank 1) signal], 31 [TP sensor 1 (bank 2) signal],
34 [TP sensor 2 (bank 1) signal]. 35 [TP sensor 2 (bank 2) signal] and ground under the following condi-
tions.
PBIB3472E

31 [TP sensor 1 (bank 2)] Fully depressed Less than 4.75V


Refer to EM-18.

DTC P1290, P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
A
Power supply for the throttle control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay. The throttle EC
control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the ECM sends
an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is provided to the ECM. When the ignition
switch is turned OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not
provided to the ECM. C
Specification data are reference values. D

E
THRTL RELAY • Ignition switch: ON ON
F
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause G
P1290
(Bank 2) Throttle control motor ECM detects a voltage of power source for (The throttle control motor relay circuit is H
P2100 relay circuit open throttle control motor is excessively low. open)
2100 • Throttle control motor relay
(Bank 1)
I
P2103 Throttle control motor ECM detect the throttle control motor relay is (The throttle control motor relay circuit is
2103 relay circuit short stuck ON. shorted)
• Throttle control motor relay J
FAIL-SAFE MODE
K

ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return L
spring.
M
NOTE:
N
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P1290, P2100
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8V. O
3. Check DTC. P
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P2103
3. Check DTC.

BANK 1
TBWT1664E
CAUTION:

TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
0 - 14V
C
• Engine stopped
• Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) D

E
2 G
(Open) (bank 1)
0 - 14V

• Engine stopped
F
G
PBIB3540E

power supply (bank 1) (11 - 14V) H
0 - 14V

• Engine stopped I
(Close) (bank 1)
operation J
PBIB3541E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Ignition switch: OFF] K
52 R/W
(11 - 14V)
L

BANK 2
TBWT1665E
CAUTION:

TER- A
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
EC
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Ignition switch: OFF] C
0 - 14V D
• Engine stopped
(Close) (bank 2) E
operation
PBIB3541E
F
0 - 14V

• Engine stopped
H
PBIB3539E
50 PU/W
(Open) (bank 2)
0 - 14V
I
• Engine stopped
• Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) J
PBIB3540E
K
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) L
1.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I M

SULT-III or tester. N

O
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 2.
P
PBIB3579E
2.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II


3. Check continuity between ECM terminal 25 and IPDM E/R terminal 47.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
4.CHECK FUSE
2. Check 15A fuse for blown.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
5.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I
Check voltage between ECM terminal 3 (bank 1), 52 (bank 2) and
ground under the following conditions with CONSULT-III or tester.
Ignition switch Voltage

OFF Approximately 0V
Battery voltage
ON
(11 - 14V)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
6.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II

3. Check continuity between ECM terminal 3 (bank 1), 52 (bank 2) and IPDM E/R terminal 42.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
Refer to EC-134.

OK or NG
OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-16. A
EC

DTC P1421 COLD START CONTROL
ECM controls ignition timing and engine idle speed when engine is started with prewarming up condition.
This control promotes the activation of three way catalyst by heating the catalyst and reduces emissions.
ECM does not control ignition timing and engine • Lack of intake air volume
P1421 Cold start emission reduction
idle speed properly when engine is started with • Fuel injection system
1421 strategy monitoring
prewarming up condition. • ECM
NOTE:
• If DTC P1421 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for other DTC.
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-III
4. Check that the “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication is between 4°C (39°F) and 36°C (97°F).
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication is within the specified value, go to the following step.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication is out of the specified value, cool engine down or warm engine up and go
to step 1.
WITH GST

Perform EC-77, "Idle Air Volume Learning".
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning.
Check for the cause of intake air volume lacking. Refer to the following.
• Crushed intake air passage
• Intake air passage clogging
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part
3.CHECK FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
Perform EC-306, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" for DTC P0171.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. A
NG >> Go to EC-313, "Diagnosis Procedure" for DTC P0171.
EC
With CONSULT-III
3. Touch “ERASE”. C
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P1421 displayed again? D
With GST
2. Select Service $04 with GST. E
Yes or No F
Yes >> GO TO 5.
G
5.REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
2. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. H
5. Perform EC-76, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". I
J
>> INSPECTION END

DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
ASCD steering switch has variant values of electrical resistance for each button. ECM reads voltage variation
of switch, and determines which button is operated.
PBIB3497E
1. ASCD steering switch 2. RESUME/ACCELERATE switch 3. SET/COAST switch

4. CANCEL switch 5. MAIN switch
Refer to EC-28 for the ASCD function.


MAIN switch: Pressed ON
MAIN SW • Ignition switch: ON
MAIN switch: Released OFF
CANCEL switch: Pressed ON
CANCEL SW • Ignition switch: ON
CANCEL switch: Released OFF
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch:
ON
Pressed
RESUME/ACC SW • Ignition switch: ON
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Re-
OFF
leased
SET/COAST switch: Pressed ON
SET SW • Ignition switch: ON
SET/COAST switch: Released OFF
• This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.

NOTE:
Refer to EC-480.
Trouble Diagnosis
Name
• An excessively high voltage signal from the ASCD
steering switch is sent to ECM. • Harness or connectors
P1564 • ECM detects that input signal from the ASCD steer- (The switch circuit is open or shorted.)
ASCD steering switch
1564 ing switch is out of the specified range. • ASCD steering switch
• ECM detects that the ASCD steering switch is stuck • ECM
ON.
NOTE:

least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. A
2. Press MAIN switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Press CANCEL switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds. EC
4. Press RESUME/ACCELERATE switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 sec-
onds.
5. Press SET/COAST switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds. C
6. Check DTC.
D

TBWT1660E
CAUTION:

TER- A
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
EC
4V
• ASCD steering switch: OFF
0V C
• MAIN switch: Pressed
101 G/Y ASCD steering switch 1V
• CANCEL switch: Pressed
[Ignition switch: ON] D
3V
• RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Pressed
2V
• SET/COAST switch: Pressed E
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
108 B/Y • Warm-up condition 0V
(ASCD steering switch)
• Idle speed F
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS G

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. H
PBIB3560E
L
: Vehicle front
M
N
PBIB3561E


finisher removed)
: Vehicle front
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “MAIN SW”, “RESUME/ACC SW”, “SET SW” and “CANCEL SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-III.
3. Check each item indication under the following conditions.
Switch Monitor item Condition Indication

Pressed ON
MAIN switch MAIN SW
Released OFF
Pressed ON
CANCEL switch CANCEL SW
Released OFF
Pressed ON
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch RESUME/ACC SW
Released OFF
Pressed ON
SET/COAST switch SET SW
Released OFF
Without CONSULT-III
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground with
pressing each button.
Switch Condition Voltage [V]

Pressed Approx. 0
MAIN switch
Released Approx. 4
Pressed Approx. 1
CANCEL switch
Released Approx. 4
RESUME/ACCELERATE Pressed Approx. 3 PBIB1537E

switch Released Approx. 4
Pressed Approx. 2
SET/COAST switch
Released Approx. 4
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Disconnect combination switch harness connector M203.
4. Check harness continuity between combination switch terminal 15 and ECM terminal 108.


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. A
NG >> GO TO 4.
EC
• Combination switch (spiral cable)
• Harness for open and short between ECM and combination switch
C
5.CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT D
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and combination switch terminal 14.
E
OK or NG F
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
G
• Combination switch (spiral cable) H
• Harness for open and short between ECM and combination switch
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. I
7.CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH
J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace steering wheel.
K
Refer to EC-134.
L
>> INSPECTION END
M
ASCD STEERING SWITCH

1. Disconnect combination switch (spiral cable) harness connector M203. N
2. Check continuity between combination switch harness connec-
tor terminals 14 and 15 with pushing each switch.
O
Switch Condition Resistance [Ω]
Pressed Approx. 0
MAIN switch
Released Approx. 4,000 P
Pressed Approx. 250
CANCEL switch
Released Approx. 4,000
RESUME/ACCELERATE Pressed Approx. 1,480 PBIB2549E

switch Released Approx. 4,000

Switch Condition Resistance [Ω]
Pressed Approx. 660
SET/COAST switch
Released Approx. 4,000
3. If NG, replace ASCD steering switch.

DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
A
When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned EC

OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of
the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal).
C
PBIB1282E E

• Brake pedal: Fully released (A/T) G
(ASCD brake switch) • Brake pedal: Slightly depressed (A/T) H
BRAKE SW2 Brake pedal: Fully released OFF

• Ignition switch: ON I
J
NOTE: K
• If DTC P1572 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer
to EC-480.
• This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. When malfunction A is detected, DTC is not
stored in ECM memory. And in that case, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip freeze frame data are displayed. L
1st trip DTC is erased when ignition switch OFF. And even when malfunction A is detected in two
consecutive trips, DTC is not stored in ECM memory.
M
Trouble Diagnosis
Name
When the vehicle speed is above 30km/h (19 • Harness or connectors
N
MPH), ON signals from the stop lamp switch (The stop lamp switch circuit is shorted.)
A)
and the ASCD brake switch are sent to ECM • Harness or connectors
at the same time. (The ASCD brake switch circuit is shorted.)
• Harness or connectors O
(The ASCD clutch switch circuit is shorted.)
(M/T models)
P1572
ASCD brake switch • Stop lamp switch
1572
ASCD brake switch signal is not sent to ECM • ASCD brake switch P
B) for extremely long time while the vehicle is • ASCD clutch switch (M/T models)
driving • Incorrect stop lamp switch installation
• Incorrect ASCD brake switch installation
• Incorrect ASCD clutch switch installation
(M/T models)
• ECM

CAUTION:
NOTE:
• Procedure for malfunction B is not described here. It takes extremely long time to complete procedure for
malfunction B. By performing procedure for malfunction A, the incident that causes malfunction B can be
detected.
TESTING CONDITION:
Steps 4 and 5 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a
road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-III
3. Press MAIN switch and make sure that CRUISE indicator lights up.
4. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the following condition.

If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to the following step.
7. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the following condition.

Depress the brake pedal for more than five seconds
Driving location so as not to come off from the above-mentioned ve-
hicle speed.
WITH GST

A
A/T MODELS
EC
P
TBWT1661E
CAUTION:

TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
0V
[Ignition switch: OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE
0V
• Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
• Brake pedal: Fully released (11 - 14V)

M/T MODELS
A
EC
TBWT1662E
P
CAUTION:

TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
0V
• Brake pedal and/or clutch pedal: Slightly de- 0V
126 L/OR ASCD brake switch pressed
A/T MODELS
1.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions.
CONDITION INDICATION
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
Brake pedal: Fully released ON
Without CONSULT-III
CONDITION VOLTAGE
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Approximately 0V
Brake pedal: Fully released Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB3577E
2.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II

With CONSULT-III
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON
Without CONSULT-III
Check voltage between ECM terminal 122 and ground under the following conditions.

CONDITION VOLTAGE A
Brake pedal: Fully released Approximately 0V
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Battery voltage
EC
PBIB3578E
D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> GO TO 8. E
3.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. F
I
PBIB1089E
4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and

J

K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
L
PBIB0857E
M
• Fuse block (J/B) connector E101 N
• 10A fuse
• Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse
O
5.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
P
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 126 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2.


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
• Harness for open or short between ECM and ASCD brake switch
7.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Refer to EC-577, "Component Inspection"
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Replace ASCD brake switch.
8.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
PBIB1089E
3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 3 and ground


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 9.
PBIB2309E

• Fuse block (J/B) connector E101
• 10A fuse
• Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and battery
10.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 122 and stop lamp switch terminal 4.


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12. A
NG >> GO TO 11.
EC
• Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch
C
12.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13. E
NG >> Replace stop lamp switch.
13.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT F
Refer to EC-134.
>> INSPECTION END G

M/T MODELS
1.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I H
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. I
CONDITION INDICATION J
Brake pedal and/or clutch pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
Brake pedal and clutch pedal: Fully released ON
K
Without CONSULT-III
following conditions. L
CONDITION VOLTAGE
M
Brake pedal and/or clutch pedal: Slightly depressed Approximately 0V
Brake pedal and clutch pedal: Fully released Battery voltage
OK or NG N
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB3577E
O
2.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II
With CONSULT-III
1. Select “BRAKE SW2” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. P
Without CONSULT-III

Check voltage between ECM terminal 122 and ground under the fol-
lowing conditions.
CONDITION VOLTAGE
Brake pedal: Fully released Approximately 0V
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 11.
PBIB3578E
3.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector.
PBIB1282E
4. Check voltage between ASCD clutch switch terminal 1 and


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0799E

2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector.
PBIB1282E

ground with CONSULT-III or tester. A

OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
C
PBIB0857E

E
• 10A fuse
F
2. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminal 2 and ASCD clutch switch terminal 1.
H
OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH J

OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 16.
8.CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT L
3. Check harness continuity between ASCD clutch switch terminal 2 and ECM terminal 126. M
Continuity should exist. N

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. O
NG >> GO TO 9.
• Harness for open or short between ECM and ASCD clutch switch
10.CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> Replace ASCD clutch switch.
PBIB1282E


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> GO TO 12.
PBIB2309E

• 10A fuse
• Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and battery
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 122 and stop lamp switch terminal 4.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 14.

15.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16. EC
NG >> Replace stop lamp switch.
C
Refer to EC-134.
>> INSPECTION END D

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH E

F
3. Check continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals 1 and 2
under the following conditions.
G
Condition Continuity
Brake pedal: Fully released Should exist
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Should not exist H
If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to BR-7, and
perform step 3 again.
I
SEC023D
ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH (M/T MODELS)

3. Check continuity between ASCD clutch switch terminals 1 and 2
under the following conditions. K
L
Clutch pedal: Fully released Should exist
Clutch pedal: Slightly depressed Should not exist
If NG, adjust ASCD clutch switch installation, refer to CL-5, and M
SEC024D
N
STOP LAMP SWITCH
2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. O

3. Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 3 and 4
Brake pedal: Fully released Should not exist
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Should exist
If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-7, and
PBIB2310E

DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
A
The ECM receives two vehicle speed sensor signals via CAN communication line. One is sent from “unified EC
meter and A/C amp.”, and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses these signals
for ASCD control. Refer to EC-28 for ASCD functions.
On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000004656663 C

NOTE: D
U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-144.
• If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC U1010, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer E
to EC-146.
to EC-465
F
to EC-480
Trouble Diagnosis G
Name
(The CAN communication line is open or H
shorted.)
• VDC/TCS/ABS control unit
P1574 ASCD vehicle speed ECM detects a difference between two vehicle
(with VDC models) I
1574 sensor speed signals is out of the specified range.
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
(without VDC models)
• Wheel sensor
• TCM(A/T models) J
• ECM

K
CAUTION:
NOTE: L
TESTING CONDITION: M
Step 3 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test
is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-III N
3. Drive the vehicle at more than 40 km/h (25 MPH). O
4. Check DTC.
P
WITH GST

Check DTC with TCM. Refer to AT-37.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Perform trouble shooting relevant to DTC indicated.
2.CHECK DTC WITH “VDC/TSC/ABS CONTROL UNIT (WITH VDC MODELS)” OR “ABS ACTUATOR AND
ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) (WITHOUT VDC MODELS)”
Refer to BRC-81 or refer to BRC-43.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
Refer to DI-5.
>> INSPECTION END

DTC P1715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR
DTC P1715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR
A
ECM receives input speed sensor signal from TCM through CAN communication line. ECM uses this signal for EC
engine control.
C

D
I/P PULLY SPD • Vehicle speed: More than 20 km/h (12 MPH)
On Board Diagnosis Logic INFOID:0000000004656668 E
NOTE:
• If DTC P1715 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001 first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, F
U1001. Refer to EC-144.
to EC-146.
• If DTC P1715 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer G
to EC-480.
to EC-367. H
• If DTC P1715 is displayed with DTC P0340 or P0345 first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
P0340 or P0345. Refer to EC-375.
I
• Harness or connectors J
Input speed sensor signal is different from (The CAN communication line is open or short-
P1715 Input speed sensor the theoretical value calculated by ECM ed)
1715 (TCM output) from revolution sensor signal and engine • Harness or connectors
rpm signal. (Input speed sensor circuit is open or shorted) K
• TCM
L
Check DTC with TCM. Refer to AT-37.
M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Perform trouble shooting relevant to DTC indicated.
N
2.REPLACE TCM
Replace TCM. Refer to AT-40.
O
>> INSPECTION END

DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp switch when the brake pedal is depressed.
This signal is used mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is driving.

BRAKE SW • Ignition switch: ON
P1805 A brake switch signal is not sent to ECM for ex- (The stop lamp switch circuit is open or
Brake switch
1805 tremely long time while the vehicle is driving. shorted.)
• Stop lamp switch
FAIL-SAFE MODE

ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to a small range.
Therefore, acceleration will be poor.
Vehicle condition Driving condition
When engine is idling Normal
When accelerating Poor acceleration

2. Fully depress the brake pedal for at least 5 seconds.
3. Erase the DTC.

EC
P
TBWT1663E
CAUTION:

TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
0V
1.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT

2. Check the stop lamp when depressing and releasing the brake pedal.
Brake pedal Stop lamp

Fully released Not illuminated
Slightly depressed Illuminated
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB1282E


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB2309E

• 10A fuse
• Harness for open and short between stop lamp switch and fuse
2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. A
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 122 and stop
lamp switch terminal 4.
EC
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5. PBIB1282E D
E
F
6.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
Refer to EC-585, "Component Inspection". G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace stop lamp switch. H
Refer to EC-134. I
>> INSPECTION END

J
STOP LAMP SWITCH

K
N
PBIB1282E
2. Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 3 and 4

under the following conditions. O
Conditions Continuity
P
Brake pedal: Fully released Should not exist
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Should exist
3. If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-7, and
PBIB2310E

DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end

of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelera-
tor position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM.
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of
the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The
ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from
these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these
signals.
PBIB1741E
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM
receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine oper-
ation such as fuel cut.

ACCEL SEN 1


CLSD THL POS
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage.

NOTE:
If DTC P2122 or P2123 is displayed with DTC P0643, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0643.
Refer to EC-482.
Accelerator pedal posi-
P2122 An excessively low voltage from the APP sen- • Harness or connectors
tion sensor 1 circuit low
2122 sor 1 is sent to ECM. (The APP sensor 1 circuit is open or
input
shorted.)
Accelerator pedal posi- • Accelerator pedal position sensor
P2123 An excessively high voltage from the APP sen-
tion sensor 1 circuit high (APP sensor 1)
2123 sor 1 is sent to ECM.
input
FAIL-SAFE MODE

degrees.

A
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
C
2. Check DTC.
D

TBWT1670E
CAUTION:

TER- A
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
EC
97 R
sensor 1 [Ignition switch: ON] C
[Ignition switch: ON] D
98 SB
sensor 2 [Ignition switch: ON] E
Sensor power supply
99 L (Accelerator pedal position [Ignition switch: ON] 5V F
sensor 1)
100 W (Accelerator pedal position • Warm-up condition 0V G
Sensor power supply
103 G (Accelerator pedal position [Ignition switch: ON] 5V H
sensor 2)
sensor 2) • Idle speed I
J
Models with VDC system, navigation system or telephone K
L
PBIB3560E
O
: Vehicle front
P

PBIB3561E

finisher removed)
: Vehicle front
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
connector.
PBIB1080E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0914E

• Harness for open or short between ECM and APP sensor
4.CHECK APP SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 100.


OK or NG
EC
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
D
6.CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT E
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 97 and APP sensor terminal 5.
F
G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
H
• Harness connectors E108, M15 I
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. J
8.CHECK APP SENSOR
K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 9. L
2. Perform EC-76, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". M
N
>> INSPECTION END
O
Refer to EC-134.
>> INSPECTION END P

ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR


3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 97 (APP sensor 1 sig-
nal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following
conditions.

97 Fully released 0.5 - 1.0V
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1) Fully depressed 3.9 - 4.7V

sensor 2) Fully depressed 1.95 - 2.40V PBIB3582E
4. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next step.

ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Refer to ACC-3.

A
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end EC

are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal C
the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The D
signals.
PBIB1741E E
F

G

ACCEL SEN 1 H

I
CLSD THL POS
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage. J
K
L
Accelerator pedal posi- • Harness or connectors
P2127 An excessively low voltage from the APP sen-
tion sensor 2 circuit low (APP sensor 2 dircuit is open or shorted.)
2127 sor 2 is sent to ECM.
input [CKP sensor (POS) circuit is open or
shorted.] M
shorted.]
cuit is shorted.] N
Accelerator pedal posi- (Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is
P2128 An excessively high voltage from the APP sen- O
tion sensor 2 circuit high shorted.)
2128 sor 2 is sent to ECM. • Accelerator pedal position sensor
input
• Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) P
(bank 2)
• Exhaust valve timing control position
sensor (bank 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE


degrees.
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
2. Check DTC.

EC
P
TBWT1671E
CAUTION:

TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply
(POS)]
Sensor power supply
sensor (bank 2)]
97 R
98 SB
Sensor power supply
sensor 1)
Sensor power supply
sensor 2)
Sensor power supply
sure sensor)
Sensor power supply
sor)


EC
PBIB3560E
D
: Vehicle front
E
F
PBIB3561E I

finisher removed) J
: Vehicle front
OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT- I L
connector.
O
PBIB1080E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0915E
3.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
• Harness for open between ECM and APP sensor

5.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

64
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK COMPONENTS
• EVAP control system pressure sensor (Refer to EC-436, "Component Inspection" .)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
7.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. A
EC
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.
• Harness for open or short between ECM and APP sensor E
F
9.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 98 and APP sensor terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. G

2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10. I
Check the following. J
K
11.CHECK APP SENSOR
Refer to EC-608, "Component Inspection". L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> GO TO 12. M

1. Replace accelerator pedal assembly. N
O
>> INSPECTION END

13.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT P
Refer to EC-134.
>> INSPECTION END


conditions.



ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Refer to ACC-3.

DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
A
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end EC

are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal C
the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The D
signals.
PBIB1741E E
F

G

ACCEL SEN 1 H

I
CLSD THL POS
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage. J
K
NOTE:
Refer to EC-482. L

• Harness or connector
(The APP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open
or shorted.)
Harness or connectors
(APP sensor 2 dircuit is open or shorted.)
[CKP sensor (POS) circuit is open or
shorted.]
shorted.]
cuit is shorted.]
Accelerator pedal posi- Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM
P2138 (EVAP control system pressure sensor
tion sensor circuit range/ compared with the signals from APP sensor 1
2138 circuit is shorted.)
performance and APP sensor 2.
(Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is
shorted.)
(APP sensor 1 and 2)
(bank 2)
sor (bank 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE

degrees.
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
2. Check DTC.

EC
P
TBWT1674E
CAUTION:

TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply
(POS)]
Sensor power supply
sensor (bank 2)]
97 R
98 SB
Sensor power supply
sensor 1)
Sensor power supply
sensor 2)
Sensor power supply
sure sensor)
Sensor power supply
sor)


EC
PBIB3560E
D
: Vehicle front
E
F
PBIB3561E I

finisher removed) J
: Vehicle front
OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT L
connector.
O
PBIB1080E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0914E

4.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 4 and ground with
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 5.
PBIB0915E
5.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
• Harness for open between ECM and APP sensor

7.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

64

A
111 Refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1 EC-658 EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. C
8.CHECK COMPONENTS
D
• EVAP control system pressure sensor (Refer to EC-436, "Component Inspection" .) E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15. F
9.CHECK APP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
G
APP sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 100. H
APP sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 104,
I
OK or NG J
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.

• Harness connectors E108, M15 L
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. M
11.CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
ECM terminal 97 and APP sensor terminal 5, N
ECM terminal 98 and APP sensor terminal 2.
O
OK or NG P
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> GO TO 12.

13.CHECK APP SENSOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 14.
>> INSPECTION END

Refer to EC-134.
>> INSPECTION END


conditions.



ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Refer to ACC-3.

DTC P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1
A
(1,472°F).
F
PBIB3354E

J
A/F SEN1 (B1)
• Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm Fluctuates around 2.2V
A/F SEN1 (B2)
K
To judge the malfunction, the A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal is monitored not to be L
shifted to LEAN side or RICH side.
M
P2A00 • The output voltage computed by ECM from the
2A00 • Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
A/F sensor 1 signal is shifted to the lean side for
(Bank 1) • Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 a specified period.
• Fuel pressure N
P2A03 circuit range/performance • The output voltage computed by ECM from the
• Fuel injector
2A03 A/F sensor 1 signal is shifted to the rich side for
• Intake air leaks
(Bank 2) a specified period.
O
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-III

SULT-III.
4. Clear the self-learning coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
6. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute under no load.
8. Keep engine speed between 2,500 and 3,000 rpm for 20 minutes.
WITH GST
PBIB3501E

6. Select Service $03 with GST and make sure that DTC P0102 is detected.
8. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute under no load.
10. Keep engine speed between 2,500 and 3,000 rpm for 20 minutes.

A
BANK 1
EC
P
TBWT1632E
CAUTION:

TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
2.9 - 8.8V
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
(bank 1)
gine)
PBIB3538E


BANK 2
A
EC
TBWT1633E
P
CAUTION:

TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
2.9 - 8.8
[Engine is running]
A/F sensor 1 heater
(bank 2)
gine)
PBIB3538E


PBIB3560E

: Vehicle front

PBIB3561E


finisher removed)
: Vehicle front
EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2.RETIGHTEN AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR 1
1. Loosen and retighten the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
D
PBIB3517E
G
1. A/F sensor 1 (bank1) 2. A/F sensor 1 (bank 2)

: Vehicle front
H
Tightening torque: 50 N-m (5.1 kg-m, 37 ft-lb)

I
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK J

K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
L
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. M
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. N
Without CONSULT-III O
P

PBIB3501E

Yes or No
No >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
PBIB3516E
nector nector
: Vehicle front
3. Check harness connector for water.
Water should not exit.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT


OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
C
PBIB3308E

E
• IPDM E/R harness connector E7
• 15A fuse
• Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse
F
8.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT G
3. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. H
A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal I

1 57
Bank1
2 61
1 65 J
Bank 2
2 66
K
Refer to Wiring Diagram. L
Bank 1 Bank 2
A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal M
1 57 1 65
2 61 2 66
N
5. Also check harness for short to power. O
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. P
9.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 11.

Perform EC-134.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
CAUTION:
• Before installing new A/F sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
>> GO TO 12.
12.CONFIRM A/F ADJUSTMENT DATA
2. Select “A/F ADJ-B1” and “A/F ADJ-B2” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Make sure that “0.000” is displayed on CONSULT-III screen.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 13.
13.CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA.
With CONSULT-III
Without CONSULT-III
PBIB3501E

>> GO TO 14.
14.CONFIRM A/F ADJUSTMENT DATA
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and then ON.

2. Select “A/F ADJ-B1” and “A/F ADJ-B2” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Make sure that “0.000” is displayed on CONSULT-III screen. A
>> INSPECTION END

EC

C
Refer to EM-23.

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned

OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of
the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal).
PBIB1282E

• Brake pedal: Fully released (A/T)
(ASCD brake switch) • Brake pedal: Slightly depressed (A/T)
BRAKE SW2 Brake pedal: Fully released OFF


ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
A
A/T MODELS
EC
P
TBWT1675E
CAUTION:

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
0V
0V
• Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
• Brake pedal: Fully released (11 - 14V)

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
M/T MODELS
A
EC
TBWT1676E
P
CAUTION:

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
0V
• Brake pedal and/or clutch pedal: Slightly de- 0V
126 L/OR ASCD brake switch pressed
A/T MODELS
With CONSULT-III
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
Brake pedal: Fully released ON
Without CONSULT-III
CONDITION VOLTAGE
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Approximately 0V
Brake pedal: Fully released Battery voltage
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB3577E

PBIB1089E

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
C
PBIB0857E

E
• 10A fuse
F
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 126 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2.

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5. J
K
• Harness for open or short between ECM and ASCD brake switch
L
6.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Refer to EC-628, "Component Inspection" M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace ASCD brake switch. N
Refer to EC-134. O
>> INSPECTION END

M/T MODELS P

With CONSULT-III

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Brake pedal and/or clutch pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
Brake pedal and clutch pedal: Fully released ON
Without CONSULT-III
CONDITION VOLTAGE
Brake pedal and/or clutch pedal: Slightly depressed Approximately 0V
Brake pedal and clutch pedal: Fully released Battery voltage
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB3577E
2.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT

PBIB1282E
4. Check voltage between ASCD clutch switch terminal 1 and


OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0799E

PBIB1282E

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
C
PBIB0857E

E
• 10A fuse
F
2. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminal 2 and ASCD clutch switch terminal 1.
H
OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH J

OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 10.
7.CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT L
3. Check harness continuity between ASCD clutch switch terminal 2 and ECM terminal 126. M
Continuity should exist. N

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. O
NG >> GO TO 8.
• Harness for open or short between ECM and ASCD clutch switch
9.CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace ASCD clutch switch.
Refer to EC-134.
>> INSPECTION END

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

3. Check continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals 1 and 2
Brake pedal: Fully released Should exist
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Should not exist
If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to BR-7, and
SEC023D
ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH (M/T MODELS)

3. Check continuity between ASCD clutch switch terminals 1 and 2
Clutch pedal: Fully released Should exist
Clutch pedal: Slightly depressed Should not exist
If NG, adjust ASCD clutch switch installation, refer to CL-5, and
SEC024D

ASCD INDICATOR
ASCD INDICATOR
A
ASCD indicator lamp illuminates to indicate ASCD operation status. Lamp has two indicators, CRUISE, SET, EC
and is integrated in combination meter.
CRUISE indicator illuminates when MAIN switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON to indicated that
ASCD system is ready for operation.
SET indicator illuminates when following conditions are met. C
• CRUISE indicator is illuminated.
• SET/COAST switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON while vehicle speed is within the range of ASCD
setting. D
SET indicator remains lit during ASCD control.
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode INFOID:0000000004656714 E
Specification data are reference value.

F
MAIN switch: Pressed at the 1st time →
at the 2nd time
G
• MAIN switch: ON ASCD: Operating ON
• When vehicle speed is between
SET LAMP
40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h ASCD: Not operating OFF
(89MPH) H

ASCD INDICATOR
TBWT1677E
1.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION

Check ASCD indicator under the following conditions.

ASCD INDICATOR
ASCD INDICATOR CONDITION SPECIFICATION A

• MAIN switch: Pressed at the
1st time → at the 2nd time
• MAIN switch: ON ASCD: Operating ON EC
• When vehicle speed is be-
SET LAMP
tween 40 km/h (25 MPH) and ASCD: Not operating OFF
144 km/h (89 MPH)
C
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
D
2.CHECK DTC
Check that DTC U1000 or U1001 is not displayed.
OK or NG E
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Perform trouble diagnoses for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-144.
F
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Go to DI-49, "DTC [B2202] Meter Communication Circuit".
4.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT H
Refer to EC-134.
I
>> INSPECTION END

ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
The electrical load signal (Headlamp switch signal, rear window defogger switch signal, etc.) is transferred
through the CAN communication line from BCM to ECM via IPDM E/R.

Rear window defogger switch: ON and/
ON
or lighting switch: 2nd position
LOAD SIGNAL • Ignition switch: ON
Rear window defogger switch and light-
OFF
ing switch: OFF
• Engine: After warming up, idle the Heater fan switch: ON ON

HEATER FAN SW
engine Heater fan switch: OFF OFF
1.CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-I

3. Select “LOAD SIGNAL” and check indication under the following conditions.
Condition Indication
Rear window defogger switch: ON ON
Rear window defogger switch: OFF OFF
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 4.
2.CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-II
Check “LOAD SIGNAL” indication under the following conditions.
Lighting switch: ON at 2nd position ON
Lighting switch: OFF OFF
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 5.
3.CHECK HEATER FAN SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
Check “HEATER FAN SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III under the following conditions.
Heater fan: Operating ON
Heater fan: Not operating OFF
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 6.

4.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM A
Refer to GW-51.
>> INSPECTION END EC

5.CHECK HEADLAMP SYSTEM
Refer to LT-5 or LT-31.
C
>> INSPECTION END

6.CHECK HEATER FAN CONTROL SYSTEM D
Refer to ATC-28.
E
>> INSPECTION END

FUEL INJECTOR
FUEL INJECTOR
The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM
supplies a ground to the fuel injector circuit, the coil in the fuel injec-
tor is energized. The energized coil pulls the ball valve back and
allows fuel to flow through the fuel injector into the intake manifold.
The amount of fuel injected depends upon the fuel injection pulse
duration. Pulse duration is the length of time the fuel injector remains
open. The ECM controls the injection pulse duration based on
engine fuel needs.
SEF375Z

B/FUEL SCHDL See EC-126 .
• Engine: After warming up Idle 2.0 - 3.0 msec
INJ PULSE-B1
(M/T) position
INJ PULSE-B2 2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.9 msec
• No load

FUEL INJECTOR
EC
P
TBWT1678E
CAUTION:

FUEL INJECTOR
TER-
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
NOTE:
81 R/B Fuel injector No. 3 idle.
82 L/R Fuel injector No. 6
PBIB3555E
86 W/B Fuel injector No. 5 BATTERY VOLTAGE
89 G/Y Fuel injector No. 1
(11 - 14V)
90 Y/R Fuel injector No. 4
[Engine is running]
PBIB3556E
1.INSPECTION START
Turn ignition switch to START.
Is any cylinder ignited?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.
Without CONSULT-III

OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB3332E
3.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT


FUEL INJECTOR
2. Disconnect fuel injector harness connector.
A
1 : Ignition coil No.5 (with power transistor)
2 : Ignition col No.3 (with power transistor)
3 : Ignition coil No.1 (with power transistor) EC
4 : Condenser
5 : Fuel injector No.3
6 : Fuel injector No.1 C
8 : Fuel injector No.4 PBIB3512E
9 : Ignition coil No.2 (with power transistor) D

12 : Fuel injector No.6 E
4. Check voltage between fuel injector terminal 1 and ground with F
Voltage: Battery voltage G

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4. H
PBIB0582E
I
Check the following. J
• Fuse block (J/B) connector M4
• 10A fuse
• Harness for open or short between fuel injector and fuse K
L
5.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. M
3. Check harness continuity between fuel injector terminal 2 and ECM terminals 81, 82, 85, 86, 89, 90.
N
OK or NG O
OK >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR P
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning fuel injector.
FUEL INJECTOR
Refer to EC-134.
>> INSPECTION END

FUEL INJECTOR
1. Disconnect fuel injector harness connector.
2. Check resistance between terminals as shown in the figure.
Resistance: 11.1 - 14.3Ω [at 10 - 60°C (50 - 140°F)]
PBIB1727E
FUEL INJECTOR
Refer to EM-35.

FUEL PUMP
FUEL PUMP
A
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM Function Actuator

Engine speed*
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Fuel pump control Fuel pump relay
Battery Battery voltage*
*: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. D
The ECM activates the fuel pump for several seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON to improve engine
startability. If the ECM receives a engine speed signal from the camshaft position sensor (PHASE), it knows
that the engine is rotating, and causes the pump to operate. If the engine speed signal is not received when E
the ignition switch is ON, the engine stalls. The ECM stops pump operation and prevents battery discharging,
thereby improving safety. The ECM does not directly drive the fuel pump. It controls the ON/OFF fuel pump
relay, which in turn controls the fuel pump.
F
Condition Fuel pump operation
Ignition switch: ON Operates for 1 second.
G
Engine running or cranking Operates.
Engine: Stopped Stops in 1.5 seconds.
Except as shown above Stops. H
A turbine type design fuel pump is used in the fuel tank.
I
2 : Fuel pressure regulator
J
PBIB2707E
L

• For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON
ON
N
FUEL PUMP RLY • Engine running or cranking
• Except above conditions OFF
O

FUEL PUMP
TBWT1679E
CAUTION:

FUEL PUMP
TER- A
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
EC
• For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON 0 - 1.5V
[Engine is running]
22 L/W Fuel pump relay
[Ignition switch: ON] C
BATTERY VOLTAGE
• More than 1 second after turning ignition
(11 - 14V)
switch ON.
D
1.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION E

2. Pinch fuel feed hose (1) with two fingers.
F
Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt on the fuel feed
hose for 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON.
OK or NG G
NG >> GO TO 2.
H
PBIB3524E
2.CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I I

3. Turn ignition switch ON. J
SULT-III or tester.
K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. L
NG >> GO TO 3.
M
PBIB3583E
3.CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

N
2. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 40 and ECM terminal 22.
O
P
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 15.
• Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and ECM

FUEL PUMP
5.CHECK CONDENSER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
3. Disconnect condenser harness connector.
5. Check voltage between condenser terminal 1 and ground with
Voltage: Battery voltage should exist for 1 sec-

ond after ignition switch is turned ON.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 6.
PBIB0624E
6.CHECK 15A FUSE

3. Check 15A fuse.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace fuse.
7.CHECK CONDENSER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
2. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 39 and condenser terminal 1.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 8.
• Harness connectors E107, B3
• Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and condenser
9.CHECK CONDENSER GROUND CIRCUIT
2. Check harness continuity between condenser terminal 2 and ground.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10

FUEL PUMP
• Harness connectors B39, D102 (Coupe models)
EC
• Harness connectors B61, T23 (Roadster models)
• Harness for open or short between condenser and ground
C
11.CHECK CONDENSER
Refer to EC-643, "Component Inspection". D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Replace condenser. E
12.CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness con- F
nector.
2. Disconnect harness connectors E107, B3.
“fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 1 and harness G
connector B3 terminal 4,
“fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 3 and ground.

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. PBIB1665E
I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> GO TO 13. J
K
• Harness connector B3
• Harness connectors B39, D102 (Coupe models)
• Harness connectors B61, T23 (Roadster models) L
• Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and harness connector B3
• Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and ground
M
14.CHECK FUEL PUMP
N
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15. O
NG >> Replace “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”.
Refer to EC-134. P
OK or NG
FUEL PUMP
FUEL PUMP
1. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector.
terminals 1 and 3.
SEC918C
CONDENSER
2. Check resistance between condenser terminals 1 and 2.
Resistance: Above 1 MΩ [at 25°C (77°F)]
PBIB0794E
FUEL PUMP
Refer to FL-4.

IGNITION SIGNAL
IGNITION SIGNAL
A
IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR EC

The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the
power transistor. The power transistor turns ON and OFF the ignition
coil primary circuit. This ON/OFF operation induces the proper high C
voltage in the coil secondary circuit.

D
4 : Condenser
E
PBIB3512E
F
G
H

IGNITION SIGNAL
TBWT1680E
CAUTION:

IGNITION SIGNAL
TER- A
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
EC
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
24 BR/Y
(Self shut-off)
C
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
tion switch OFF
D
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)

IGNITION SIGNAL
TBWT1681E
CAUTION:

IGNITION SIGNAL
TER- A
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
EC
0 - 0.2V
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed C
NOTE:
idle.
D
12 LG/R Ignition signal No. 3 PBIB3543E
15 PU Ignition signal No. 5
20 Y/B Ignition signal No. 1 0.1 - 0.4V
E
[Engine is running]
F
PBIB3544E
G

IGNITION SIGNAL
TBWT1682E
CAUTION:

IGNITION SIGNAL
TER- A
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
EC
0 - 0.2V
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed C
NOTE:
idle.
D
11 GY Ignition signal No. 4 PBIB3543E
16 G/B Ignition signal No. 2
19 L/R Ignition signal No. 6 0.1 - 0.4V
E
[Engine is running]
F
PBIB3544E
G
H
1.CHECK ENGINE START
Turn ignition switch OFF and restart engine.
Is engine running? I
Yes or No
Yes (With CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 2.
Yes (Without CONSULT-III)>>GO TO 3. J
No >> GO TO 4.
K
With CONSULT-III
L
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 10.
M
Without CONSULT-III
1. Let engine idle. N
2. Read the voltage signal between ECM terminals 11, 12, 15, 16,
19, 20 and ground with an oscilloscope.
3. Verify that the oscilloscope screen shows the signal wave as O
shown below.
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle.
P
PBIB3584E
PBIB3543E
OK or NG

IGNITION SIGNAL
NG >> GO TO 10.
4.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminals 125 and ground with

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Go to EC-135.
PBIB3585E
5.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II


4 : Condenser

4. Check voltage between condenser terminal 1 and ground with

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 6.
PBIB0624E
6.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

3. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 17 and condenser terminal 1.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.

IGNITION SIGNAL
NG >> GO TO 7.

EC
• Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and condenser
C
8.CHECK CONDENSER GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between condenser terminal 2 and ground. D
Continuity should exist. E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9. F
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
9.CHECK CONDENSER G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. H
NG >> Replace condenser.
10.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. I
3. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.
J
3 : Ignition coil No.1 (with power transistor) K
4 : Condenser
6 : Fuel injector No.1 L
9 : Ignition coil No.2 (with power transistor) M

12 : Fuel injector No.6 N
O

IGNITION SIGNAL
5. Check voltage between ignition coil terminal 3 and ground with

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
PBIB0138E
11.CHECK IGNITION COIL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

2. Check harness continuity between ignition coil terminal 2 and ground.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
12.CHECK IGNITION COIL OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 11, 12, 15, 16, 19, 20 and ignition coil terminal 1.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
13.CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning ignition coil with power transistor.
Refer to EC-134.
OK or NG
IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR

CAUTION:
2. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.

IGNITION SIGNAL
3. Check resistance between ignition coil terminals as follows.
A
1 and 2 Except 0 or ∞
EC
1 and 3
Except 0
2 and 3
4. If NG, Replace ignition coil with power transistor. C
PBIB0847E
D
NOTE:
Do not use CONSULT-III to release fuel pressure, or fuel pres-
sure applies again during the following procedure. E
8. Start engine.
pressure. F
11. Remove ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical
discharge from the ignition coils.
12. Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be G
PBIB2206E
checked.
13. Crank engine for 5 seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder.
14. Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil. H
as shown in the figure.
16. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and check whether spark is I
generated between the spark plug and the grounded part.
Spark should be generated. J

CAUTION:
within 50cm. Be careful not to get an electrical shock K
while checking, because the electrical discharge voltage PBIB2325E

• It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of 17 mm or more is taken. L
NOTE:
17. If NG, Replace ignition coil with power transistor.
M
CONDENSER
3. Check resistance between condenser terminals 1 and 2. N
Resistance: Above 1 MΩ [at 25°C (77°F)]

O
PBIB0794E

IGNITION SIGNAL
IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR

Refer to EM-32.

REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
A
The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the condenser of the EC

air conditioner system. The sensor uses an electrostatic volume
pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The
voltage signal is sent to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system.
C
1 : Refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector
PBIB3514E E
PBIB2657E
J

TBWT1683E
CAUTION:

TER- A
MI- WIRE
NAL COLOR
NO.
EC
[Engine is running]
105 L Refrigerant pressure sensor 1.0 - 4.0V
• Both A/C switch and blower switch: ON
(Compressor operates.) C
Sensor power supply
sor)
D
116 W (Refrigerant pressure sen- • Warm-up condition 0V
sor) • Idle speed
E
1.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR OVERALL FUNCTION F

2. Turn A/C switch and blower fan switch ON.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 105 and ground with G
Voltage: 1.0 - 4.0V H

OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2. I
PBIB3586E J
Models with VDC system, navigation system or telephone K
1. Turn A/C switch and blower fan switch OFF.
2. Stop engine.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF. L
O
PBIB3560E
1. Body ground E17 2. Body ground E43 3. Body ground B102 P

: Vehicle front

1. Turn A/C switch and blower fan switch OFF.
2. Stop engine.

PBIB3561E

finisher removed)
: Vehicle front
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector (1).
PBIB3514E
3. Check voltage between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1

and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0188E

• Harness connectors E251, E31
• Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor
5.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 116.


OK or NG
EC
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
• Harness connectors E251, E31
D
7.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT E
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 105 and refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 2.
F
G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.
H
• Harness connectors E251, E31 I
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. J
Refer to EC-134.
K
OK or NG
OK >> Replace refrigerant pressure sensor.
NG >> Repair or replace. L
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR M

Refer to ATC-120, "Removal and Installation of Refrigerant Pressure Sensor".

MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR
TBWT1685E

EC
TBWT1686E

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Fuel Pressure INFOID:0000000004656742
Fuel pressure at idling kPa (kg/cm2, psi) Approximately 350 (3.57, 51)
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing INFOID:0000000004656743
A/T No load* (in P or N position)

Target idle speed 650 ± 50 rpm
M/T No load* (in Neutral position)
A/T In P or N position 650 rpm or more
Air conditioner: ON
M/T In Neutral position 800 rpm or more
A/T In P or N position
Ignition timing 16° ± 5° BTDC
M/T In Neutral position
*: Under the following conditions:
• Electric load: OFF (Lights, heater fan & rear window defogger)
• Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position
Calculated Load Value INFOID:0000000004656744
Conditions Calculated load value % (Using CONSULT-III or GST)

At idle 5 - 35
At 2,500 rpm 5 - 35
Mass Air Flow Sensor INFOID:0000000004656745
Supply voltage Battery voltage (11 - 14V)

Output voltage at idle 0.8 - 1.1V*
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec at idle*
Mass air flow (Using CONSULT-III or GST)
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec at 2,500 rpm*
*: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no load.
Intake Air Temperature Sensor INFOID:0000000004656746

25 (77) 1.800 - 2.200
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor INFOID:0000000004656747

20 (68) 2.37 - 2.63
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor 1 Heater INFOID:0000000004656748
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] 1.8 - 2.44Ω

Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater INFOID:0000000004656749
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] 3.4 - 4.4Ω

EC
Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) INFOID:0000000004656750

C
Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) INFOID:0000000004656751

D
Throttle Control Motor INFOID:0000000004656752
E
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Approximately 1 - 15Ω
Fuel Injector INFOID:0000000004656753
Resistance [at 10 - 60°C (50 - 140°F)] 11.1 - 14.3Ω
Fuel Pump INFOID:0000000004656754

G
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] 0.2 - 5.0Ω H

Engine Control System: Section

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Engine Control System: Section

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Engine Control System: Section

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the purpose of the document?

What is the purpose of the document?

What components are described in the document?

What components are described in the document?

ENGINE

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

Revision: 2009 October EC-1 2008 & 2009 350Z

Revision: 2009 October EC-2 2008 & 2009 350Z

Revision: 2009 October EC-3 2008 & 2009 350Z

Revision: 2009 October EC-4 2008 & 2009 350Z

Revision: 2009 October EC-5 2008 & 2009 350Z

Revision: 2009 October EC-6 2008 & 2009 350Z

Revision: 2009 October EC-7 2008 & 2009 350Z

Revision: 2009 October EC-8 2008 & 2009 350Z

P0011 - P0084 INFOID:0000000004656141

Revision: 2009 October EC-9 2008 & 2009 350Z

P0130 - P0159 INFOID:0000000004656143

Revision: 2009 October EC-10 2008 & 2009 350Z

P0300 - P0345 INFOID:0000000004656145

Revision: 2009 October EC-11 2008 & 2009 350Z

P0451 - P0463 INFOID:0000000004656147

P0500 - P0643 INFOID:0000000004656148

Revision: 2009 October EC-12 2008 & 2009 350Z

P0700 - P0745 INFOID:0000000004656149

Revision: 2009 October EC-13 2008 & 2009 350Z

P1610 - P1615 INFOID:0000000004656152

P1715 - P1805 INFOID:0000000004656153

Revision: 2009 October EC-14 2008 & 2009 350Z

Revision: 2009 October EC-15 2008 & 2009 350Z

On Board Diagnosis (OBD) System of Engine and A/T INFOID:0000000004656158

Revision: 2009 October EC-16 2008 & 2009 350Z

• Always use a 12 volt battery as power source. E

• Do not disassemble ECM.

Revision: 2009 October EC-17 2008 & 2009 350Z

• When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never allow

Revision: 2009 October EC-18 2008 & 2009 350Z

• B1 indicates the bank 1, B2 indicates the bank 2 as shown in A

• Do not operate fuel pump when there is no fuel in lines.

• When installing C.B. ham radio or a mobile phone, be sure to L

Revision: 2009 October EC-19 2008 & 2009 350Z

Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000004656161

EVAP service port Applying positive pressure through EVAP service

Socket wrench Removing and installing engine coolant tempera-

Revision: 2009 October EC-20 2008 & 2009 350Z

Anti-seize lubricant Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool

Revision: 2009 October EC-21 2008 & 2009 350Z

1. ECM 2. Data link connector 3. MIL

Revision: 2009 October EC-22 2008 & 2009 350Z

Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System INFOID:0000000004656163 F

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

Air conditioner switch Air conditioner operation*2

Revision: 2009 October EC-23 2008 & 2009 350Z

Revision: 2009 October EC-24 2008 & 2009 350Z

Two types of systems are used. D

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

Battery Battery voltage*2

Revision: 2009 October EC-25 2008 & 2009 350Z

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART